Yamaha ELC-02 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: ELC-02

Categorie: Synthesizer

Type: de handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

ELCU-M02

Owner’s Manual

ENEN

* For information on assembling the ELC-02, refer to the instructions at the end of

this manual.

** The explanations in this Owner’s Manual apply to the ELC-02. Only the Main unit

is included in the ELCU-M02. Since the ELCU-M02 does not include the Bench,

Stand, Speaker, or Pedal unit, explanations for those items can be ignored when

using the ELCU-M02.

v2.1

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

WARNING

• This AC adaptor is designed for use with only Yamaha electronic

instruments. Do not use for any other purpose.

• Indoor use only. Do not use in any wet environments.

CAUTION

• When setting up, make sure that the AC outlet is easily accessible. If

some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power

switch of the instrument and disconnect the AC adaptor from the

outlet. When the AC adaptor is connected to the AC outlet, keep in

mind that electricity is flowing at the minimum level, even if the

power switch is turned off. When you are not using the instrument

for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall

AC outlet.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or

radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the

cord, or place heavy objects on it.

• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The

required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the specified adaptor (page 208) only. Using the wrong adaptor

can result in damage to the instrument or overheating.

• Use only the supplied power cord/plug for the Electone.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust

which may have accumulated on it.

• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the

instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal

components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning,

discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified

Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or

wet conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles

or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any openings.

If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the

power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet.

Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service

personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning

item may fall over and cause a fire.

• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the

power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then

have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel.

- The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.

- It emits unusual smells or smoke.

- Some object has been dropped into the instrument.

- There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.

For AC Adaptor

For ELC-02/ELCU-M02

Power supply/AC adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

DMI-5 1/2

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a

multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or

possibly cause overheating in the outlet.

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet,

always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can

damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not

to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly

process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence

might result in damage to the instrument or even injury.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might

accidentally fall over.

• Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-

inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation,

and possibly result in the instrument overheating.

• When transporting or moving the instrument, always use two or

more people. Attempting to lift the instrument by yourself may

damage your back, result in other injury, or cause damage to the

instrument itself.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to

prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip

over them.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are

using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs,

immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from

the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is

still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not

using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power

cord from the wall AC outlet.

• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching it,

use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage

to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components,

turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on

or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum.

• Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum

levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the

instrument to set the desired listening level.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps

on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or

others, damage to the instrument or other property, or operational

failure.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the

instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches

or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of

time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause

permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or

ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

• Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might

accidentally fall over.

• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool

or stepladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or

injury.

• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to

prevent the possibility of accident or injury.

• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use,

tighten them periodically using the specified tool in order to prevent

the possibility of accident or injury.

• Keep special watch over any small children so that they don’t fall off

the rear of the bench. Since the bench does not have a backrest,

unsupervised use may result in accident or injury.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Power supply/AC adaptor

Assembly

Location

Connections

Handling caution

Using the bench (If included)

DMI-5 2/2

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

NOTICE

To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the

product, damage to data, or damage to other property,

follow the notices below.

 Handling and Maintenance

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio,

stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric

devices. Otherwise, the instrument and/or other devices

may generate noise. When you use the instrument along

with an application on your iPad, iPhone or iPod touch,

we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON”

on that device in order to avoid noise caused by

communication.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or

vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct

sunlight, near a heater, or in a vehicle during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to

the internal components or unstable operation.

(Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41°

– 104°F.)

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the

instrument, since this might discolor the panel or

keyboard.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not

use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or

chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

 Saving data

• Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect

operation. Save important data to a USB flash drive.

• To protect against data loss through media damage, we

recommend that you save important data you’ve created

onto two USB storage devices.

Information

 About copyrights

• Copying of the commercially available musical data

including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio

data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use.

• This product incorporates and bundles computer

programs and contents in which Yamaha owns

copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use

others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include,

without limitation, all computer software, style files,

MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound

recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and

contents outside of personal use is not permitted under

relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal

consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE

ILLEGAL COPIES.

 About functions/data bundled with the

instrument

• This device is capable of using various types/formats of

music data by optimizing them to the proper format for

use with the device in advance. As a result, this device

may not play the data back precisely as their producers

or composers originally intended.

• The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been

provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.

 About this manual

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this

manual are for instructional purposes only, and may

appear somewhat different from those on your

instrument.

• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft®

Corporation in the United States and other countries.

• Apple, iTunes, Mac, Macintosh, iPhone, iPad, iPod

touch and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in

the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.

• Electone and STAGEA are the trademarks of Yamaha

Corporation.

• The company names and product names in this manual

are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their

respective companies.

• The panel illustrations and LCD screens shown in this

owner’s manual are taken from the ELC-02/ELCU-M02,

Version 2.1.

• The pan flute and sitar, shown in the displays of the

Electone, are on display at the Hamamatsu Museum of

Musical Instruments.

The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be found on

or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit. You should note this

serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a

permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft.

Model No.

Serial No.

(bottom_en_01)

The name plate is located

on the bottom of the unit.

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

About model names

In this manual, the ELS-02 and ELS-02C are referred to as “ELS-02 series” while the previous models are referred to as

“ELS-01 series.”

About the Manuals

This instrument has the following documents and instructional materials.

Included Documents

Owner’s Manual (this book)

Provides overall explanations of the functions of this instrument.

Online Materials (Downloadable from the web)

MIDI Reference

Contains MIDI related information such as MIDI Data Format and the MIDI Implementation Chart.

For Electone users iPhone/iPad Connection Manual

Explains how to connect this instrument to the iPhone/iPad.

To obtain these manuals, access the Yamaha Downloads. Select your country, enter “ELC-02” to the Model Name box,

then click [SEARCH].

Items Included with the ELC-02

Congratulations!

You are the proud owner of a fine electronic organ, the Electone STAGEA ELC-02/ELCU-M02.

The Yamaha Electone combines the most advanced tone generation technology with state-of-the-art digital

electronics and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical versatility.

In order to make the most of your Electone and its extensive performance potential, we urge you to read the manual

thoroughly while trying out the various features described.

Keep the manual in a safe place for later reference.

Yamaha Downloads

http://download.yamaha.com/

•Main unit

• Stand (page 197)

• Speaker (page 198)

• Pedal unit (page 199)

• Bench (page 202)

• Accessories

-Owner’s Manual (this book)

- Owner’s Manual (for the Speaker)

-Music rest

- Music rest brackets (×2)

-AC adaptor

-Power cord

(for the Electone)

*1 May not be included depending on your particular area.

Please check with your Yamaha dealer.

*2 Bench, Stand, Speaker and Pedal unit are not included in

ELCU-M02.

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Main Features

A wide variety of Voices including Super Articulation Voices pages 34 and 37

• The Electone features a wide variety of special Super Articulation Voices, which realistically recreate characteristic

instrument sounds, such as the sound of finger slides on guitar and the breath noises of saxophone or other wind

instruments, as well as many of the performance techniques such as legato, vibrato and glissando necessary for wind

instruments.

• The Electone features a piano Voice created with samples of the Yamaha CFX flagship concert grand piano, as well

as high-quality Voices of strings, orchestra percussion, and ethnic instruments of the world — lending amazing

dynamic realism to your Electone performance.

• The Electone adds to a virtually limitless variety of Organ Flute Voices. The authentic touch response keyboard lets

you play these Voices with all the expressiveness and control of an actual acoustic instrument.

Sophisticated “Registration Menu” which can be called up

any time during your performance

page 19

The five Registration Menu buttons on the front panel feature preset Registrations, allowing you to instantly set up

the Electone for playing your favorite type of music. The Registrations in the Registration Menu are divided into basic

music categories for ease of selection. Moreover, you can edit any of the Registrations and customize them to fit your

own performance needs.

Dynamic, Contemporary Rhythms and Auto Accompaniment page 54

The exceptionally of wide selection of various rhythms lets you choose exactly the rhythm you need in your

performance. Each rhythm contains 15 variations (sections) — such as Main, Fill In, Intro, Ending, and Break — that

you can easily switch while you play, to make your performance even more dynamic and professional. Each rhythm

has its own matching accompaniment divided into five instrument parts, providing basic backing as well as

embellishments.

Convenient Edit Functions pages 48, 79, 93,

and 136

• The Voice Link function lets you collect your favorite Voices to a single display and call them up any time during

your performance.

• The Registration Memory function lets you memorize your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re

needed. Up to 80 Registrations (5 Banks of 16 Registrations each) can be stored.

• The Voice Edit function lets you create up to 80 original Voices as User Voices. From a wide variety of more than

300 Effect Types divided into 16 categories, two Effect Types can be assigned to each Voice Section, giving you even

more tools to enhance, transform and customize the Voices.

• The Keyboard Percussion feature allows for flexible and detailed editing, letting you assign your desired percussion

sound to each note of the keyboard to create your own original drum kit.

Audio Recording page 130

You can record your performances as audio data (.WAV) to a USB flash drive. Since the data is saved in stereo WAV

format of normal CD quality resolution (44.1kHz/16bit), it can be transmitted to and played on portable music

players by using a computer, allowing you to share your recordings with your friends, and make your own CDs to

enjoy as well.

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

• The bitmap fonts used in this Electone have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.

Large, 7.0-inch TFT-LCD with Intuitive Touch Panel Operation page 14

This large LCD display not only lets you clearly see a wide selection of settings and parameters at almost any angle, it

also serves as a touch control panel — letting you intuitively make selections and adjust settings simply by touching

the screen! Once you touch a setting, you can even adjust it in finer detail if necessary with the Data Control dial.

This Electone is compatible with the following formats.

GM (General MIDI) is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. GM System Level 2 is a

standard specification that enhances the original GM and improves Song data compatibility.

It provides for increased polyphony, greater Voice selection, expanded Voice parameters, and

integrated effect processing.

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha

specifically to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and

effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future.

The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality

and open-ended expandability for the future. This instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an

XF file containing lyric data is played.

GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major

enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations, as well

as greater expressive control over Voices and effects.

The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single unified

format.

“AEM” is the trademark of Yamaha’s leading-edge tone generation technology. For information on

AEM, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Contents

PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................... 2

About the Manuals...................................................................... 5

Items Included with the ELC-02.................................................. 5

Main Features ............................................................................. 6

Panel Layout 10

Front Panel................................................................................ 10

LCD Display/Display Select...................................................... 12

Overview ................................................................................... 12

1. Quick Introductory Guide 13

Getting Started.......................................................................... 13

Turning the Power On......................................................... 13

Using the LCD Display ............................................................. 14

Changing the display page................................................ 14

Using the display buttons................................................... 14

Adjusting parameter values by using the display sliders .. 15

LCD Display Settings................................................................ 16

Selecting the display language .......................................... 16

Muting the touch panel sound............................................ 16

Adjusting the display brightness........................................ 16

Voice Guide .............................................................................. 17

Adjusting the Voice Guide settings .................................... 17

Voice Display ............................................................................ 17

Registration Menu..................................................................... 19

Selecting Registrations from the Registration Menu .......... 19

Registration Menu list ......................................................... 20

Confirming the Electone Version .............................................. 23

Factory Set (Initializing the Electone) ....................................... 23

2. Voices 24

Voices for Each Keyboard ........................................................ 24

Selecting Voices with the Voice Buttons................................... 25

Registering a Voice to Voice Link....................................... 25

Changing the Voice volume ............................................... 26

Selecting Voices from the User Buttons ................................... 28

Voice List .................................................................................. 29

Tone Generator......................................................................... 37

AWM Tone Generator......................................................... 37

3. Organ Flutes 38

4. Voice Controls and Effects 40

Settings Selected from the Voice Condition Display ................ 41

Selecting from the Panel........................................................... 44

Reverb ................................................................................ 44

Sustain................................................................................ 46

Rotary Speaker................................................................... 47

Using Voice Link ....................................................................... 48

Registering a Voice with the settings on the Voice Condition

display to Voice Link .......................................................... 48

Selecting a Voice registered to Voice Link......................... 48

Editing the Voice registered to Voice Link ......................... 49

Releasing the current Voice settings from Voice Link ........ 49

Registering a Voice to Voice Link with a different

Voice name......................................................................... 50

Deleting a Voice from Voice Link ....................................... 50

Effect List .................................................................................. 52

5. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 54

Selecting Rhythms with the Rhythm Buttons.............................54

Selecting a rhythm ..............................................................54

Operating the rhythm from the panel..................................55

Changing the rhythm volume..............................................57

Adjusting the tempo............................................................57

Changing the rhythm reverb ...............................................58

Selecting Rhythms from the User Buttons.................................58

Rhythm List................................................................................59

Accompaniment ........................................................................63

Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) ..........64

Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) .......................................................65

Keyboard Percussion ................................................................66

Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion ..............................66

Preset Keyboard Percussion List........................................68

Creating a User Keyboard Percussion Kit ..........................79

Copying the Keyboard Percussion settings .......................81

Detailed settings for each percussion instrument ..............81

Kit Assign list.......................................................................83

6. Registration Memory 93

Storing Registrations ................................................................. 93

Storing Registrations to Another Bank ......................................94

Selecting Registrations..............................................................94

Saving the Registration Data to USB Flash Drive......................95

Initializing Registration Memory ................................................ 96

Registration Shift .......................................................................97

Setting the Registration Shift mode

in the Regist Shift display....................................................97

Confirming the Registration Shift setting

in the Voice Display ............................................................99

Unifying Values/Settings of a Specific Parameter ...................100

Copying Registrations .............................................................102

7. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 104

Calling Up the MDR Display....................................................104

Using the MDR Display ...........................................................104

Song icons ........................................................................106

Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal..108

Using USB flash drives .....................................................108

Formatting a USB Flash Drive .................................................109

Selecting a Song .....................................................................110

Searching for a Song ........................................................110

Recording................................................................................112

Recording your performance............................................112

Re-recording (Retry) .........................................................112

Recording specified parts only......................................... 113

Punch-in recording ...........................................................114

Changing the Song Name.......................................................114

Saving Registrations and Other Data to a Unit .......................116

Creating two or more Registration Units in a Song...........116

Overwriting Registration data to a Unit .............................116

Changing the order of the Registration Units ...................117

Recalling Recorded Registrations...........................................118

Playing Back a Song ...............................................................119

Playing back the selected part(s) .....................................120

Fast forward, Rewind and Pause ......................................120

Changing the tempo .........................................................121

Repeat playback...............................................................121

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Displaying the Score............................................................... 122

Changing the score contents and settings ...................... 123

Other Functions (Tools) .......................................................... 124

Song copy ........................................................................ 124

Song delete ...................................................................... 126

Converting to XG .............................................................. 127

Converting to EL format.................................................... 128

Converting from EL format ............................................... 129

Checking the remaining memory ..................................... 129

8. Audio 130

Recording Your Performance as Audio .................................. 130

Playing Back Audio Files ........................................................ 132

Rewind, Fast Forward and Pause .................................... 133

Changing the Volume, Tempo and Pitch ......................... 134

Repeat playback .............................................................. 134

Other Functions (Tools) .......................................................... 135

Creating a New Folder/Deleting the File/

Changing the File Name................................................... 135

Audio file copy.................................................................. 135

9. Voice Edit 136

Voice Structure ....................................................................... 136

AWM Voice structure........................................................ 136

Editing a Voice........................................................................ 136

Selecting a Voice for editing ............................................ 136

Editing an AWM Voice...................................................... 137

Saving the Edited Voice.......................................................... 140

Quitting Voice Edit .................................................................. 141

Recalling an Edited Voice....................................................... 141

10. Rhythm Program 142

Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation...................... 142

Rhythm Pattern Program......................................................... 142

Entering the Rhythm Pattern Program .............................. 142

Basic settings for the rhythm pattern ............................... 144

Entering percussion sounds to a rhythm pattern

— Step Write .................................................................... 147

Editing entered percussion notes .................................... 148

Entering percussion sounds to a rhythm pattern

— Real Time Write............................................................ 151

Creating backing patterns (Rhythmic Chord function) .... 152

Changing the Voices for Accompaniment parts .............. 154

Adjusting volume and panning ........................................ 155

Effect settings................................................................... 155

Detailed settings for each percussion instrument ............ 156

Saving rhythm patterns .................................................... 157

Quitting the Rhythm Pattern Program............................... 158

Recalling User rhythm patterns........................................ 159

Selecting rhythms from a USB flash drive ........................ 159

Percussion Kit list ............................................................. 160

Rhythm Sequence Program.................................................... 168

Selecting a sequence....................................................... 168

Programming a sequence................................................ 169

Auditioning a sequence ................................................... 169

Editing an existing Rhythm Sequence ............................. 170

Programming a Registration Sequence ........................... 170

Editing an existing Registration Sequence ...................... 171

Quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program.......................... 172

Playing Rhythm Sequences ............................................. 172

Playing all sequences in order ......................................... 172

Copying a Rhythm Sequence .......................................... 173

Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data

to a USB Flash Drive............................................................... 173

11. Foot Controllers 174

Footswitches............................................................................174

Controlling the Rhythm......................................................175

Controlling Glide ............................................................... 175

Controlling Rotary Speaker ...............................................176

Calling up another page of the music score.....................176

Controlling the Super Articulation Voices .........................176

Foot Pedal (sold separately) ...................................................176

Controlling Sustain ............................................................176

Controlling Melody On Chord ...........................................177

Controlling Lead Slide with Foot Pedal (sold separately) .177

Controlling the Solo function .............................................177

Expression Pedals...................................................................178

Controlling Pitch Bend ......................................................178

Controlling the Rhythm Tempo .........................................179

12. Transpose and Pitch Controls 180

13. Connections 181

Accessory Jacks and Controls................................................181

Connection Examples – External Devices...............................183

Using headphones............................................................183

Playing the sounds of the Electone through

an external audio system ..................................................183

Using a mixer for live performance...................................183

Selecting Outputs for Each Part........................................184

Recording the sounds of the Electone to

an external recorder..........................................................184

Outputting the sound of an external device through

the speakers of this Electone............................................185

Connecting a microphone ................................................185

Controlling external MIDI devices from the Electone........185

Controlling the Electone from an external device .............186

Connecting a Pedal Unit ...................................................186

Connecting a Foot Pedal ..................................................186

Connection with Computer......................................................187

MIDI Control ............................................................................188

Connecting to an iPhone/iPad.................................................189

Wireless LAN settings .......................................................189

Wireless LAN Detailed Settings ........................................194

Initialize the wireless LAN settings....................................196

Glossary of Terms .............................................................196

14. Appendix 197

Stand Assembly ......................................................................197

Installing the Speaker..............................................................198

Installing the Pedal unit ...........................................................199

Installing and Connecting the Main Unit .................................201

Installing the Music Rest .........................................................202

Using the Bench (if included)..................................................202

Troubleshooting.......................................................................204

Specifications ..........................................................................207

Index .......................................................................................209

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

13 14 15 16

123

Panel Layout

Front Panel

LOWER KEYBOARD

VOICE 1/2 (page 25)

REVERB buttons

(page 44)

UPPER KEYBOARD

VOICE 1/2 (page 24)

SUSTAIN buttons

(page 46)

REGISTRATION MENU

(page 19)

RHYTHM/

KEYBOARD PERCUSSION

(page 54)

[M.] (Memory) button

(page 93)

PEDAL VOICE 1/2

(page 25)

LEAD VOICE 1/2

(page 24)

[VOICE SECTION 2]

button (page 24)

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

45678910 12

LCD display/DISPLAY SELECT

(page 12)

[USB TO DEVICE] terminals

(page 108)

MASTER VOLUME dial

(page 13)

[ ] Power switch

(page 13)

[D.] (Disable) button

(page 94)

Registration memory

(page 93)

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

LCD Display/Display Select

Overview

NOTE

• For information on the Stand, Pedal unit, Speakers and Bench, refer to the pages 197 to 203.

• Stand, Pedal unit, Speakers and Bench are not included in ELCU-M02.

LCD display (touch panel).................... page 14

DATA CONTROL dial........................... page 15

[VOICE DISPLAY] button...................... page 17

[A.B.C./M.O.C.] button ................. pages 64, 65

[MDR] button..................................page 104

[FOOT SWITCH] button ................pages 97, 174

[UTILITY] button ........... pages 16, 178, 180, 188

[AUDIO] button................................page 130

[VOICE EDIT] button ......................... page 136

[PATTERN] button ............................ page 142

[SEQUENCE] button .......................... page 168

[U. ORGAN FLUTES] button...................page 38

[L. ORGAN FLUTES] button ...................page 38

[ROTARY SP SPEED] button ..................page 47

Music rest (page 202)

Front Panel (page 10)

Upper keyboard

Lower keyboard

USB TO DEVICE terminals (page 182)

Left footswitch (page 174)

Expression pedal (page 13)

Second expression pedal (page 178)

Pedalboard (page 199)

Speaker (page 198)

I/O connectors

(page 181)

Right footswitch (page 97)

Keyboard stand

(page 197)

Main unit

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Whether you are an advanced performer or have never touched an electronic keyboard in your life, we

recommend that you take the time to go through this basic section. It shows you in the simplest possible

manner how to start playing your Electone.

Getting Started

Connect the plugs of the AC adaptor in

the order shown in the illustration.

Cable clip

Wrap the DC output cable of the adaptor around the

cable clip (as shown below) to prevent accidental

unplugging of the cable during operation.

WARNING

Use the specified adaptor (page 208) only. The use of

other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to

both the adaptor and the instrument.

WARNING

Use only the supplied power cord/plug for the Electone.

CAUTION

Remove the AC plug from the AC outlet when the

instrument is not to be used for extended periods of

time, or during electrical storms.

NOTE

Follow this procedure in reverse order when disconnecting

the AC adaptor.

2 Ensure that the speaker and the Pedal

Unit are correctly connected (page 201).

3 Plug the power cord of the speakers

into an appropriate electrical outlet.

4 Press the [ ] Power switch

located on the right of the

keyboard to turn the power on.

To turn off the Electone, press the

[ ] Power switch again.

CAUTION

Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is

still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level.

When you are not using the instrument for a long time,

make sure you unplug the power cable from the wall

AC outlet.

5 Press the Power switch of the

Speaker to turn the power on.

The POWER indicator lights up green

when the power is ON.

6 Set the MASTER VOLUME control.

The MASTER VOLUME control is an overall

control that affects the volume of the entire

Electone.

7 Press the Expression pedal down with

your foot.

Turning the Power On

CAUTION

Only use the voltage specified as correct for the Electone.

The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the

Electone. Yamaha products are manufactured specifically

for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be

sold. If you intend to use the instrument in another

location, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage,

please consult with a qualified technician.

Power cord

AC outlet

adaptor

DC IN jack

(page 181)

AC plug

DC plug

Cable clip

Decreasing

the volume

Increasing

the volume

Maximum

volume

Minimum

volume

Quick Introductory Guide

Using the LCD Display

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Using the LCD Display

This instrument features a special touch panel that allows

you to change the parameters by simply touching the

‘virtual’ buttons or sliders on the display. (Please note that

two or more parameters cannot be operated

simultaneously.)

You can also use the Data Control dial (page 12) to make

fine changes to the parameter value shown in the display.

NOTE

When cleaning the display, use a soft, dry cloth.

NOTICE

Do not use any sharp or hard tools to operate the touch

panel. Doing so may damage the display.

There are some oval-shaped numbered buttons at the top

right of the display. Pressing these buttons changes the

“page” of the display. The button of the selected page is

highlighted in orange.

There are three types of display buttons: those that select

a function, those that switch a function on/off, and those

that open a list or menu of parameters. To select the

desired function, simply press the button in the display

directly.

To switch a function on/off or open a parameter list, see

the instructions below.

To switch the function on or off:

You can independently mute each Voice section in the

Voice Display, each accompaniment part in Rhythm

Menu display, and each Element in the Voice Edit display.

Changing the display page

Page 1

Page 2

Press this button

to select Page 1

Press this button

to select Page 2

Press this button

to select Page 3

Using the display buttons

Off, or muted (button is grayed out)

Using the LCD Display

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

To open the parameter list:

When you press a button, a parameter list will appear in

which you can select the desired parameter. When you

select items in the display, the list closes automatically.

You can also close the list by pressing the [CLOSE] button

at the top right of the list.

To change the parameter value:

To make coarse changes to the value, use the []/[]

buttons. For fine adjustment, use the Data Control dial.

You can adjust some parameters such as Volume, Reverb,

Pan and so on, by using the ‘virtual’ sliders in the display.

There are two ways to move the slider in the display:

touching it directly, and using the Data Control dial. We

suggest that you touch the display slider when making

coarse adjustments and use the Data Control dial for fine

adjustment.

Touching the display slider directly:

To change a display slider value, press the desired point in

the slider. The slider moves to the point that is pressed.

You can also change the parameter value by sliding your

finger up or down while holding down on the display

slider.

Using the Data Control dial:

Touch on/above the slider in the display to enable the

parameter and set a rough value, then turn the Data

Control dial.

To control Pan, you can move the horizontal slider in the

same way as vertical sliders.

Adjusting parameter values by

using the display sliders

DATA CONTROL

Slider will move to the point you touch

Slider will follow your finger

DATA CONTROL

Touch here to enable the parameter

Blue mark

DATA CONTROL

LCD Display Settings

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

LCD Display Settings

Here you can change the display settings: displayed

language (English or Japanese), touch panel sound, and

display brightness.

The LCD display can be shown in two languages, English

and Japanese. The default setting is English.

1 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the

GLOBAL Page of the Utility display.

NOTE

The settings in the Utility display are automatically saved

when another display is called up.

2 Press the desired button,

(Japanese) or [English].

By default, the Electone is set with the touch panel sound

turned on, giving you audio feedback when you press a

button or control. If you want to mute the touch panel

sound, follow the procedure below.

1 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up

GLOBAL Page of the Utility display.

2 Press the [OFF] button of the TOUCH

PANEL SOUND to mute the sound.

To turn the sound on again, select [ON] in step 2.

You can adjust the display brightness to a comfortable,

easy-to-read level.

1 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the

GLOBAL Page of the Utility display.

2 Move the LCD BRIGHTNESS slider by

touching it directly or using the Data

Control dial.

Higher settings make the display brighter and lower

settings make it darker.

Selecting the display language

LANGUAGE

Muting the touch panel sound

Adjusting the display brightness

TOUCH PANEL SOUND

LCD BRIGHTNESS

Voice Guide

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

Voice Guide

The Voice Guide function gives you audible information

on the current display or operation being executed. To

use this function, you need to download the Voice Guide

(audio) file from the Yamaha website, and save it to USB

flash drive, which you then connect to this instrument.

For information on using Voice Guide, refer to the Voice

Guide Tutorial Manual (simple text file).

For information on downloading Voice Guide (audio)

files and the Voice Guide Tutorial Manual, access the

website of your product via the URL below, then go to the

“Features” page:

https://www.yamaha.com/

NOTE

Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Precautions

when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal” and “Using USB

flash drives” on page 108.

You can adjust the volume and the speed of the Voice

Guide.

1 Connect the USB flash drive in which

the Voice Guide file is saved to the [USB

TO DEVICE] terminal.

2 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up

GLOBAL Page of the Utility display.

3 Move the VOLUME and SPEED sliders

of [VOICE GUIDE] to adjust the volume

and the speed.

Voice Display

You can visually confirm the currently assigned Voices to

each keyboard, currently selected rhythm, Registration

Shift, and so on, in the Voice Display.

How to call up the Voice Display:

The Voice Display always appears when the Electone is

turned on. To call up the Voice Display from any other

display, press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button.

The Voice Display consists of three different pages that

can be switched by pressing the [1], [2], or [3] button at

the top right of the display.

Adjusting the Voice Guide settings

VOICE GUIDE

Voice Display

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Voice Display [Page 1]

Voice Sections

Shows the Voices currently assigned to each Voice

section. You can also mute a specific Voice section by

pressing its button (the button is grayed-out).

Reference page

• Selecting a Voice (page 25)

RHYTHM

Shows the currently selected rhythm.

Reference page

• Selecting a rhythm (page 54)

A.B.C. MODE

Shows the Auto Bass Chord mode.

Reference page

• Auto Bass Chord (page 64)

TEMPO

Shows the current rhythm tempo.

Reference page

• Adjusting the tempo (page 57)

BAR/BEAT

Shows the bar/beat when the rhythm is playing.

Registration Unit

Shows the currently selected Registration Unit.

Reference pages

• About Banks and Units (page 96)

• Creating two or more Registration Units in a Song (page 116)

Registration Bank Selection

For selecting the desired Registration Bank. You can

select the Banks from A (at top) to an empty Bank next to

the last Bank containing data. When Banks A and B

contain Registration data, for example, you can select

Banks A, B, and C (which is empty). The on/off

indication of Bank (A – E) shows whether the selected

Bank contains data or not.

Reference pages

• Registration Memory and Bank (page 93)

• Storing Registrations to Another Bank (page 94)

Registration Shift

Shows the current position of the Registration Shift.

Reference page

• Registration Shift (page 97)

Voice Display [Page 2]

You can confirm the parameter values (for example,

Reverb, Volume, Pan) for each Registration Memory

simultaneously. Moreover, you can unify the values of a

specific parameter used in various Registration Memories

at one time. See page 100 for the details.

Voice Display [Page 3]

The Registrations stored to the Registration number can

be copied to another Registration number for each

individual section. Also Banks can be copied or deleted.

For details, see page 103.

Reference page

• Registration Memory (page 93)

Switching the display pages

Registration Menu

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

Registration Menu

A “Registration” consists of panel settings including the

selected Upper Keyboard Voices, Lower Keyboard Voices,

Pedal Voices, rhythm and so on. Each Registration Menu

button (1 – 5) includes each different music styles of the

Registrations. Use each button properly in accordance

with the music styles you want to perform.

NOTE

Additional basic Registrations are preset on the Registration

Memory locations from 1 to 16. See page 93 for details.

1 Press one of the REGISTRATION MENU

buttons.

Each button has different Registrations for different

music genres. For example, if you want to play Jazz,

press the [4] button. For details on the Registration

Menu, see page 20.

2 Select the desired Registration by

pressing the appropriate button on the

display.

Each of the REGISTRATION MENU buttons

features two tabs on the display: [01] and [02] which

calls up two pages alternatively. [01] and [02] feature

the same Registration Menu as that of the ELS-01

series and ELS-02 series respectively. On each of

[01] page and [02] page, press any of the number

buttons [1] – [5] then select the desired Registration.

The color of the selected Registration name changes

to orange, indicating that it has been selected, and

the Auto Bass Chord mode is shown at the bottom

of the display.

Reference page

• Auto Bass Chord (page 64)

3 Play your favorite Song with the

selected Registration.

Selecting Registrations from the

Registration Menu

01 Kids / 02 Simple

01, 02 Pops & Rock

01, 02 Dance & Ballad

01, 02 Jazz & Latin

01, 02 Symphony & World

Change the display pages here.

Registration Menu

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

REGISTRATION MENU 01

*1 When the foot pedal (sold separately) is connected, flute & harp is sounded.

When the foot pedal (sold separately) is not connected, string & harp is sounded.

Registration Menu list

Page REGISTRATION MENU 1

01 KIDS

REGISTRATION MENU 2

01 POPS & ROCK

REGISTRATION MENU 3

01 DANCE & BALLAD

REGISTRATION MENU 4

01 JAZZ & LATIN

REGISTRATION MENU 5

01 SYMPHONY & WORLD

1 Simple 8Beat 1 Dynamic 8Beat Organ Ballad Blow On Sax Fanfare

Simple 8Beat 2 NY Ballad Dramatic Ballad Sax Ensemble String Orchestra

Light Step British Pop Love Ballad Moonlight Romantic Violin

Sunny Pop 8Beat Modern Smooth Lead Big Band Baroque

Kids March 1 Rock Band Pop Ballad Clarinet Swing Flute & Harp *1

Kids March 2 Detroit Pop Guitar Ballad Jazz Combo Serenade

Kids March 3 Techno Pop Acoustic Ballad Medium Jazz Fast March

Synth Rock Sheriff Reggae Healing Guitar Organ Session Wild West

SymphonicMarch 1 Rock & Roll Chillout Guitar Combo Vienna Waltz

SymphonicMarch 2 Power Rock Sweetheart 1 Tender Ballad Polka

Bluegrass 60s Guitar Rock Sweetheart 2 Jazz Waltz Chanson Club

Sea Carnival Unplugged Slow & Easy Five-Four Theatre Organ

2 Basic Waltz Motor City Euro Trance Big Band Samba Flamenco

Brass Ensemble Lovely Shuffle 6/8 Trance Mambo Brass Pop Flamenco

Pure Waltz Gospel Shuffle Cool Hip Hop Mambo Tenor Mexican Dance

Rococo Ensemble Joyful Gospel Latin House Montuno Mariachi

Pop Cha Cha Frankly Soul Dance Beat Bossa Nova Celtic Dance

Comical Rumba Soul Euro Dance Pop Pop Bossa Folk Step

Comical Samba Gospel UK Pop Sweet Rumba Italiano

Toy Orchestra 6/8 Soul Jive Beguine Musette

Charleston Hit Pop Disco Queen Cha Cha Cha Country

Winter Swing New Country Disco Soul Mellow Groove Hawaiian

Snow Waltz 1 Eternal Pop Pop Disco Modern R&B Chinese Nocturne

Snow Waltz 2 Ground Beat Hot Disco Dixieland Jazz Japanese Sound

3 Alpine Polka *A Bounce Pop *A Ibiza *A Jungle Drum *A OrchestraMarch*A

Alpine Polka *B Bounce Pop *B Ibiza *B Jungle Drum *B OrchestraMarch*B

Alpine Polka *C Bounce Pop *C Ibiza *C Jungle Drum *C OrchestraMarch*C

Alpine Polka *D Bounce Pop *D Ibiza *D Jungle Drum *D OrchestraMarch*D

Dream Ballad *A Blues Jam *A Power House *A Jazz Club *A Pasodoble *A

Dream Ballad *B Blues Jam *B Power House *B Jazz Club *B Pasodoble *B

Dream Ballad *C Blues Jam *C Power House *C Jazz Club *C Pasodoble *C

Dream Ballad *D Blues Jam *D Power House *D Jazz Club *D Pasodoble *D

Pops Orchestra*A EvergreenWaltz*A Dance Latino *A Afro Session *A Tango *A

Pops Orchestra*B EvergreenWaltz*B Dance Latino *B Afro Session *B Tango *B

Pops Orchestra*C EvergreenWaltz*C Dance Latino *C Afro Session *C Tango *C

Pops Orchestra*D EvergreenWaltz*D Dance Latino *D Afro Session *D Tango *D

4 Kids On Stage *A 16Beat Pop *A Twilight Disco*A ChaCha Grandee*A Show Time *A

Kids On Stage *B 16Beat Pop *B Twilight Disco*B ChaCha Grandee*B Show Time *B

Kids On Stage *C 16Beat Pop *C Twilight Disco*C ChaCha Grandee*C Show Time *C

Kids On Stage *D 16Beat Pop *D Twilight Disco*D ChaCha Grandee*D Show Time *D

Galaxy March *A Top Gear Rock *A Love Song *A 3/4 Fast Jazz *A Majestic Sound*A

Galaxy March *B Top Gear Rock *B Love Song *B 3/4 Fast Jazz *B Majestic Sound*B

Galaxy March *C Top Gear Rock *C Love Song *C 3/4 Fast Jazz *C Majestic Sound*C

Galaxy March *D Top Gear Rock *D Love Song *D 3/4 Fast Jazz *D Majestic Sound*D

SE *A Southern Pop *A Movie Ballad *A Twilight Sax *A OrchestraSwing*A

SE *B Southern Pop *B Movie Ballad *B Twilight Sax *B OrchestraSwing*B

SE *C Southern Pop *C Movie Ballad *C Twilight Sax *C OrchestraSwing*C

SE *D Southern Pop *D Movie Ballad *D Twilight Sax *D OrchestraSwing*D

Registration Menu

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

REGISTRATION MENU 02

Page REGISTRATION MENU 1

02 SIMPLE

REGISTRATION MENU 2

02 POPS & ROCK

REGISTRATION MENU 3

02 DANCE & BALLAD

REGISTRATION MENU 4

02 JAZZ & LATIN

REGISTRATION MENU 5

02 SYMPHONY & WORLD

1 SimpleReg Strs 1 70s Easy Pop R&B Pop Ballad Big Band Tutti Orch Full Unit

SimpleReg Strs 2 BoysGuitarBallad R&B Soul Ballad Alto Sax Combo String Classic

SimpleReg Orch 1 Soul Pop R&B Cool Ballad Jazz Combo Fast Sweet Pizzicato

SimpleReg Orch 2 70s Top Duo Cool AC Jazz Combo 66 Baroque Symphony

SimpleReg Orch 3 Daydream Shuffle Sweet Chart Hits The Big Band *A Nostalgic Green

SimpleReg Pops 1 Oldies Pop SweetSlowBallad The Big Band *B New Year March

SimpleReg Pops 2 EuroPopFolklore YourPiano Ballad GuitarJazzCombo Wind Orchestra

SimpleReg Latin Discotheque Rock Sweet EP Ballad The Swing Jazz BrassBand Parade

SimpleReg Jazz 1 Slow Hand Ballad J-Pop EasyBallad New Orleans Jazz Choral No.9

SimpleReg Jazz 2 Sweet AC Ballad Sweet Sax Ballad Ragtime Band Angel Voices

SimpleReg Jazz 3 70s PrimeTimeTV Sweet R&B Ballad Funky Cat Groove Beat Classic

SimpleReg Organ Crossover Funk Lovers R&B Afro Cuban Jazz Can Can Pop

2 BrassBandMarch*A Joyful Gospel #2 Sentimental Bld GuitarJazzWaltz Elegant Waltz

BrassBandMarch*B Gospel Groove Tears Ballad Sax Jazz Waltz Chorus Waltz

Orchestra March Worship Shuffle Glory Ballad Swing Steps Love Waltz

6/8MarchingBand Worship 16beat Unplugged Ballad Swing Chorus Fantasy World

6/8MarchingKids Soulful Wonder SentimentalMovie Relax Swing Movie Pirates

Light Waltz Lovely & Soulful BeautyCinemaBld Urban Lounge Chorus Symphony

OrchestraWaltz*A Danceable Funk CinemaSymphoBld Broadway Tap Hollywood Sound

OrchestraWaltz*B Bright Pop Rock Enka Ballad Super Showtune

OrchestraWaltz*C AmericanHardRock 6/8 Enka Shuffle TV Drama Track*A

OrchestraWaltz*D Power Rock 80s Christmas Ballad TV Drama Track*B

USA RockStandard Movie Symphonic

Movie Soundtrack

3 8Beat Synth Pop Seaside Rock Disco Hits 70s Brazilian Bossa Yoo-Hoo Polka

8Beat Pop 70s Folk Rock 70s Disco Night Lounge BossaNova Pop Polka

Pop Shuffle Alternative Rock Euro Pop Disco 8Beat Bossa Nova Funny Polka

R&B Shuffle Alternative6/8Rk Synth Disco Pop Bossa Nova Casual Polka

Rock Highway Rock Ballroom Disco Tiny Bossa Nova Country Town

Rock Shuffle Funky Rock&Roll SynDancePop 80s Cafe Samba Tango Band

Rock Pop Ballad Synth Pop Rock Dirty Dance Beat BitterSweetLatin Turkish Pops

Funk Power Synth Rock Fortune Disco Latin Rock Oriental Dance

RockGuitarBallad Girls Pop 48 *A DanceBeatLatin*A Celtic Beat

Pop Rock&Roll Girls Pop 48 *B DanceBeatLatin*B Celtic Waltz

Back To The 60s Shiny Girls Pop Pop Accordion Trad Irish Pipe

Dancing Boogie Share The Peace Sweet Bomba Irish Ballad

4 Dance Pop 6/8 Shuffle Rock DanceAndRhythm*A Orquesta Salsa ChinaSweetBallad

Disco Pop ShuffleBoysRock DanceAndRhythm*B New Flamenco ChinaRomanticBld

R&B E.Piano Bld Shuffle Pop Rock DanceAndRhythm*C Jummin' Reggae China Dance Beat

R&B Piano Ballad Shfl Rock Ballad DanceAndRhythm*D RumbaAndTheCity China Kung Fu

8Beat Ballad Pop Rock Band Girls Techno French Caribbean China Trad Song

8BeatOrchBallad ShufflePopPiano Candy Pop Techno Caribbean Sea China Trad Dance

3/4 Pop Ballad Contemp. Country Dancing Platform

6/8 Pop Ballad Smooth Country Dance Beat EX.

Xmas Shuffle Club Beat

Snowy Christmas Electronica Beat

Kool Garage

Electronic Dance

5 BigBand King *A Pretty Rock New Age Chillout

BigBand King *B Ultra Rock Eurobeat Party

BigBand King *C Rock Graffiti Ibiza Trance

BigBand Swing Casual Rock Casual Trance

Jazz Session Rookie Rock Trance Party

Fusion Samba Happy Rock WonderTranceShfl

Pop Samba J-Pop Idol Rock

Simple Bossanova J-Pop Band Rock

Mambo Spirit Pop

Rumba Sweet Love Pop

Summer Pop

Shaky Dance

Registration Menu

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

6 Cls Organ Chapel J-Pop Piano Band

Cls Organ Hall J-Pop Boys

RockOrganBallad J-PopShuffleBeat

R&B Rock Organ J-Pop BandBallad

Organ Combo Breezy Ballad

6/8 Organ Ballad HeroRangerTheme

Soul Jazz Organ Sunset Pop

Pop Organ 60s Funky Punch *A

Toy Organ Funky Punch *B

Theatre Organ NY GlxyBattleship*A

Nostalgic Organ GlxyBattleship*B

7 J-Pop Anime *A

J-Pop Anime *B

70s Honey

70s Hero

DBZ *A

DBZ *B

DBZ *C

DBZ *D

Page REGISTRATION MENU 1

02 SIMPLE

REGISTRATION MENU 2

02 POPS & ROCK

REGISTRATION MENU 3

02 DANCE & BALLAD

REGISTRATION MENU 4

02 JAZZ & LATIN

REGISTRATION MENU 5

02 SYMPHONY & WORLD

Confirming the Electone Version

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

Confirming the Electone

Version

You can confirm the version of your Electone by the

following procedure.

1 Press the [UTILITY] button.

The Utility display appears.

2 On the GLOBAL Page, press the

[Version] button in the display.

The Version dialog appears in the display. Pressing

[OK] closes the dialog.

About the latest Firmware Version

Yamaha may from time to time update firmware of the

product without notice for improvement. We recommend

that you check our web site for the latest releases and

upgrade your firmware of the Electone.

http://download.yamaha.com/

Note that the explanations in this Owner’s Manual apply

to the version of firmware when this Owner’s Manual was

produced.

Factory Set (Initializing

the Electone)

All current settings including Registration Memory, User

Voices, User Rhythms, and LCD display settings can be

deleted at once by the following procedure. Note that the

operation here does not affect the settings of the wireless

LAN settings, which can be initialized on page 196.

Reference pages

• Saving Registrations (page 116)

• Initialize the wireless LAN settings (page 196)

1 Turn off the power.

2 While holding down the ENDING [1]

button, turn the power back on.

3 Release the ENDING [1] button after

Voice Display appears.

If you don’t want to reset the LCD display settings, you

can initialize only the Registration settings. See page 96

for more information.

Reference page

• Initializing Registration Memory (page 96)

NOTICE

Executing the Factory Set will erase all your existing data.

Always save your important data to the USB flash drive.

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Voices

This Electone features more than 900 high-quality Voices. Any of these Voices can be used on the Upper

Keyboard, Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard. Up to four Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard

for playing together in a layer, while the Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard each have two Voice sections.

Voices for Each Keyboard

Voices for the Upper Keyboard

Up to four different Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing together: Upper Keyboard

Voice 1, Upper Ke yboard Voice 2, L ead Voi ce 1, and Lead Voice 2. Voices for each section can be sele cted from

the panel.

Lead Voice 1 and 2 sound only the highest note (or last note played) if two or more keys are played together.

This makes the Lead Voices ideal for “lead” or solo instruments such as Trumpet and Saxophone.

Reference page

• Tone Generator (page 37)

Voices for Pedalboard

Voices for the Upper Keyboard

Voices for the Lower Keyboard

Upper Keyboard Voice 1/2

Lead Voice 1/2

[VOICE SECTION 2] button

Selecting Voices with the Voice Buttons

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Voices

Voices for the Lower Keyboard

Up to two different Voice sections are available on the

Lower Keyboard for playing together: Lower Keyboard

Voice 1 and Lower Keyboard Voice 2. Voices for each

section can be selected from the panel.

Voices for the Pedalboard

Up to two different Voice sections are available on the

Pedalboard for playing together: Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal

Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the

panel. By default, Pedal Voices 1 and 2 sound only the

highest note if two or more pedals are played.

Reference page

• POLY (page 42)

Selecting Voices with the

Voice Buttons

Since selection of Voices follows the same procedure

throughout all Voice sections, instructions for only the

Upper Keyboard Voice 1 are given here.

After confirming that [VOICE SECTION 2]

button is not lit, press one of the Voice

buttons in the Upper Keyboard Voice 1/2

section.

For example, if you have pressed the [PIANO]

button, the following display (Voice Menu) will

appear.

2 Select the desired Voice name from the

Voice menu.

The Voice menu contains many Piano Voices, more

than can fit on one display page. To change the

display pages, press the appropriate number buttons

in the display.

The color of the selected Voice name changes to

orange, indicating that it has been selected.

By using the [LINK] button at the left top in the display,

you can register the current Voice with all its settings on

the Voice Condition display. This function lets you collect

your favorite Voices, which can then be called up quickly

or conveniently during your performance. The registered

Voice can be selected from the “Voice Link” category on

the display called up via the User buttons of all the Voice

Sections. For detailed instructions, see page 48.

Lower Keyboard Voice 1/2

Pedal Voice 1/2

Voice buttons

Registering a Voice to Voice Link

Selecting Voices with the Voice Buttons

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

There are two ways to set the Voice volume: using the

VOLUME buttons on the panel and using the volume

slider in the display. The VOLUME buttons let you make

coarse adjustments to the volume while the slider gives

you fine control.

Using the VOLUME buttons on the panel

(coarse)

Press one of the VOLUME buttons of the desired Voice

section on the panel to set the level for each Voice.

The buttons have five volume settings, from a minimum

of 0, or no sound, to a maximum of full volume.

Using VOLUME slider in the display (fine)

Pressing the same Voice button on the panel again (or

pressing the Voice name of the selected Voice in the

display) calls up the Voice Condition display.

To set the volume, touch the VOLUME slider in the

display or use the Data Control dial. The control range is

from 0 (no sound) to 24 (full volume).

NOTE

Depending on the volume value (set by the slider), two adjacent

VOLUME lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating an

intermediate position.

Changing the Voice volume

VOLUME slider

Calling up the Voice Menu display

and Voice Condition display

alternatively

Pressing a Voice button once calls up the Voice Menu

display for the selected button. Pressing it a second

time calls up the Voice Condition display. Successive

presses alternate between the two displays.

When the Voice Condition display is shown, pressing

the [VOICE MENU] button on the display also calls

up the Voice Menu.

From the Voice Condition display, you can control

Voice-related parameters such as Pan, Effect, Volume,

and so on. For more information on the Voice

Condition display, see page 41.

NOTICE

Turning the Electone off erases all panel settings you

have made.

If you wish to keep the panel settings you have made,

save them to a USB flash drive before turning the

Electone off (page 116).

Voice Menu display

Voice Condition display

Selecting Voices with the Voice Buttons

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Voices

About the To Lower function

Voices selected for the Lead Voice 1, Pedal Voice 1,

and Pedal Voice 2 sections can also be played on the

Lower Keyboard when the [TO LOWER /SOLO]

or [TO LOWER ] button in each section is on.

When To Lower function is on, the Lead Voice and

Pedal Voice cannot be played on the Upper Keyboard

and Pedalboard, respectively.

The To Lower function is not available in the Lead

Voice 2 s ec tion.

About the Solo function

The Lead Voice 2 section features an exclusive Solo

function. Solo lets you instantly switch to a solo Lead

Voice in the middle of your performance, muting all

other Upper Keyboard Voices.

NOTE

In order to use the Solo function, a Foot pedal (sold

separately) is needed.

1 Select the Voice that you wish to play

solo in the Lead Voice 2 section.

When the lamp of the [TO LOWER /SOLO]

button is turned off, all the Voices for Upper

Keyboard (Upper Keyboard Voice 1 and 2, and

Lead Voice 1 and 2) can be played.

2 Press the [TO LOWER /SOLO]

button in the Lead Voice 2 section.

This sets Solo to standby status.

3 Connect a Foot Pedal (sold

separately) to the [FOOT PEDAL]

jack located on the rear of the

Electone.

In this condition (Solo on), only the Lead Voice

2 is playable on the Upper Keyboard. (All other

Voices are muted.)

4 To temporarily turn Solo off as you

play, press down on the foot pedal.

In this condition, all Voices set to the Upper

Keyboard except for Lead Voice 2 are playable

on the Upper Keyboard. (Only Lead Voice 2 is

muted.)

Each time you press the foot pedal (Solo off)

you can play all Voices except Lead Voice 2, and

each time you release it (Solo on) you can play

only Lead Voice 2 on the Upper Keyboard.

Notes on using Solo

• The foot pedal can be used to control other

functions. When other functions are assigned to

the foot pedal, pressing foot pedal turns these

functions on at the same time.

• When you release the foot pedal, Solo is not

applied to the key being pressed, but is applied

from the next pressed key. When you press the foot

pedal, Solo remains active for the key being

pressed, and is cancelled from the next pressed key.

• Lead Voices 1 and 2 sound only the highest note if

two or more keys are played. However, in the Solo

mode, Lead Voice 2 sounds for the last key played.

Reference pages

• Foot Pedal (Sold Separately) (page 176)

• Voice Condition Display (page 41)

Selecting Voices from the User Buttons

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Selecting Voices from the

User Buttons

This Electone has a wide variety of Voices from which

you can choose — far greater than what is immediately

apparent from the Voice buttons on the panel. Each Voice

section has one or two User buttons (numbered 1 or 2)

which can be found at the right side of each Voice

section. You can use the User buttons to select Voices that

cannot be selected normally from the Voice buttons —

such as Contrabass for the Upper Keyboard Voice.

1 Press one of the User buttons in any of

the Voice sections.

2 Select the desired instrument category

with the category buttons in the display.

You can also choose the “USER” category to select a

User Voice you have created.

Reference page

• Voice Edit (page 136)

If you select “Voice Link” as Category, you can select

a Voice with the settings made on the Voice

Condition display (page 41).

Reference pages

• Using Voice Link (page 48)

• Selecting a Voice registered to Voice Link (page 48)

For example, to call up Marimba 1, select the

Percussion category.

Reference page

• Voice List (page 29)

The name of the selected category (Percussion) is

displayed on the upper left.

The Voice name shown under the category name is

that of the currently assigned Voice and is irrelevant

to the Voice menu below.

3 Select a Voice (Marimba 1, for example)

from the displayed Voice Menu.

Pressing the number buttons in the display calls up

the other Voices in the category.

The Voice name of the selected Voice (Marimba 1)

appears above the category name, indicating that the

Voice has been selected.

User buttons

Instrument categories

To directly select the desired category, hold down one

of the User buttons and simultaneously press the

desired Voice button.

Percussion

1. While holding down the User button…

2. Press the Voice button.

Voice List

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Voices

Voice List

This list shows all available Voices on the Electone. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list

indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Voice Menu.

STRINGS/VIOLIN

CONTRABASS

BRASS/TRUMPET

WOODWIND/FLUTE

1Strings 1

Strings 2

Strings 3

Strings 4

Strings 5

Strings 6

Strings 7

Strings 8

Strings 9

Strings 10

Strings 11

Strings 12

Strings 13

Strings 14

Slow Strings 1

Slow Strings 2

2 Chamber Strs 1

Chamber Strs 2

Chamber Strs 3

Chamber Strs 4

Chamber Strs 5

Violin Section

Viola Section

Cello Section

S-Strings 1

S-Strings 2

S-Strings 3

3 Pizzicato Strs 1

Pizzicato Strs 2

Pizzicato Strs 3

Pizzicato Strs 4

Pizzicato Strs 5

Tremolo Strings1

Tremolo Strings2

Tremolo Strings3

SpiccatoStrings1

SpiccatoStrings2

SpiccatoStrings3

4Strings1&7

Strings2&Viola

Strings3&4

Strings7&Violin5

Violin5&Cello

Octave Strings 1

Octave Strings 2

Octave Strings 3

5 Violin 1

Violin 2

Violin 3

Violin 4

Violin 5

Violin 6

Violin 7

Violin 8

S-Violin 1

S-Violin 2

Pizzicato Violin

6 Viola

Cello 1

Cello 2

1 Contrabass 1

Contrabass 2

Contrabass 3

Contrabass 4

Contrabass 5

Contrabass 6

Contrabass 7

Pizzicato Bass 1

Pizzicato Bass 2

2 Acoustic Bass 1

Acoustic Bass 2

Acoustic Bass 3

Acoustic Bass 4

Acoustic Bass 5

Bass & Cymbal

S-AcousticBass 1

S-AcousticBass 2

1 Brass Section 1

Brass Section 2

Brass Section 3

Brass Section 4

Brass Section 5

Brass Section 6

Brass Section 7

Brass Section 8

Brass Section 9

1 Power Brass 1

Power Brass 2

Power Brass 3

2 Soft Brass 1

Soft Brass 2

Soft Brass 3

S-BrsSect.Legato

S-BrsSect.Fall

S-BrsSect.Up

Brass Fall

3 Trombone Sec 1

Trombone Sec 2

Trombone Sec 3

Trombone Sec 4

Trombone Sec 5

Trombone Sec 6

Trombone Sec 7

4 Brass1&Trp6

Brass2&Trp6

Horn 1&4

Trumpet & Cornet

Octave Brass 1

Octave Brass 2

Octave Brass 3

Octave Brass 4

Octave Brass 5

Octave Brass 6

Octave Brass 7

Octave Brass 8

Octave Brass 9

5 Trumpet 1

Trum pe t 2

Trum pe t 3

Trum pe t 4

Trum pe t 5

Trum pe t 6

Trum pe t 7

Trum pe t 8

Trum pe t 9

Trum pe t 10

Trum pe t 11

Trum pe t 12

S-Trumpet 1

S-Trumpet 2

S-Trumpet Fall

S-Trumpet Shake

6 Muted Trumpet 1

6 Muted Trumpet 2

Muted Trumpet 3

Muted Trumpet 4

Cornet

Muted Cornet

Flugel Horn 1

Flugel Horn 2

7 Trombone 1

Trombone 2

Trombone 3

Trombone 4

Trombone 5

S-Trombone

Muted Trombone 1

Muted Trombone 2

8 Horn 1

Horn 2

Horn 3

Horn 4

Horn 5

Horn 6

Horn 7

Horn 8

Horn 9

S-Horn Section

Muted Horn 1

Muted Horn 2

9 Tuba 1

Tuba 2

Euphonium

Brass Bass 1

Brass Bass 2

Brass Bass 3

1 Flute 1

Flute 2

Flute 3

Flute 4

Flute 5

S-Flute

S-Flute Flutter

Piccolo

2 Recorder 1

Recorder 2

Ocarina

Voices whose names begin with the prefix “S-” are referred to as “Super Articulation Voices.” For information about what sound is produced when you play

these Voices, see “Super Articulation Voice Supplementary List” on page 34. For details about Super Articulation Voices, see page 37.

Voice List

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

TUTTI

CHOIR

PAD

2Whistle

3 Clarinet 1

Clarinet 2

Clarinet 3

Clarinet 4

Clarinet 5

Clarinet 6

S-Clarinet 1

S-Clarinet 2

Bass Clarinet

4 Oboe 1

Oboe 2

Oboe 3

Oboe 4

Oboe 5

Oboe 6

English Horn 1

English Horn 2

Bassoon 1

Bassoon 2

Bassoon 3

5Alto Sax 1

Alto Sax 2

Alto Sax 3

Alto Sax 4

S-Alto Sax

S-Alto Sax Growl

Tenor Sax 1

Tenor Sax 2

Tenor Sax 3

Tenor Sax 4

S-Tenor Sax 1

S-Tenor Sax 2

S-Tenor Sax 3

S-TenorSax Growl

6 Soprano Sax 1

Soprano Sax 2

S-Soprano Sax

S-SprnoSax Growl

Baritone Sax 1

Baritone Sax 2

7 Sax Ens 1

Sax Ens 2

Sax Ens 3

Sax Ens 4

Sax Ens 5

Sax Ens 6

8 Woodwind Ens 1

Woodwind Ens 2

Woodwind Ens 3

Woodwind Ens 4

Woodwind Ens 5

Woodwind Ens 6

Woodwind Ens 7

Clarinet&Flutes

Clarinet&Oboe

8 Flutes&Oboes

Woodwind&Glocken

1Strings&Winds

Strings&Brass 1

Strings&Brass 2

Strings&Brass 3

Strings&Horn 1

Strings&Horn 2

Strings&Choir

Trum pe ts& Wi nds

Horns&Winds

Orchestra Bass

2 Brass&Sax 1

Brass&Sax 2

Brass&Sax 3

Brass&Sax 4

Brass&Sax 5

Brass&Sax Oct

Brass&Sax Unis

Brass&Winds 1

Brass&Winds 2

3 Orchestra Hit 1

Orchestra Hit 2

Orchestra Hit 3

Orchestra Hit 4

1 Choir 1

Choir 2

Choir 3

Choir 4

Choir 5

Choir 6

Choir 7

Choir 8

Choir 9

Choir 10

Choir 11

Vocal

2 S-ChoirSoft Aah

S-ChoirBoys Aah

S-ChoirSoft Ooh

S-ChoirBoys Ooh

3 Gospel Choir 1

Gospel Choir 2

Gospel Choir 3

S-GsplChr Hmm

S-GsplChr Hm/Ah

S-GsplChr Wow

S-GsplChr W/Hey

S-GsplChr Hey

4 PopVocals Haa 1

PopVocals Haa 2

PopVocals Ooh 1

PopVocals Ooh 2

PopVocals Ooh 3

PopVocals Aah

PopVocals Baa

PopVocals Bee

PopVocals Daa

PopVocals Doo

PopVocals Mmh

PopVocals Wah

PopVocals Yoo

5 S-ShoBeDoBa/Hmm

S-ShoBeDoBa/Wah

S-ShoBeDoBa/Doo

S-ShoBaDoBa/Daa

S-DoBaBe/Shoo

S-DoBeDoBe/Wah

S-DoBeBaDa/DoWe

S-BaDaYah/Doo

S-YaBaDaBa/Doo

S-Scat/Doo

S-Scat/DoWe

S-Scat/SFX 1

S-Scat/SFX 2

6 S-WhtShouldWeDo

S-WhoAreYou/Wee

S-DoWeYouBe/Wah

S-HaaVibrato/SFX

S-OohVibrato/SFX

S-OohBoysVib/SFX

S-OhGirlsVib/SFX

S-DooVibrato/SFX

S-DooBoys/SFX

S-DooGirls/SFX

S-DaaVibrato/SFX

S-BaaVibrato/SFX

S-WahVibrato/SFX

S-YooVibrato/SFX

1 Smooth Pad 1

Smooth Pad 2

Smooth Pad 3

Smooth Pad 4

Smooth Pad 5

Smooth Pad 6

Smooth Pad 7

Smooth Pad 8

Smooth Pad 9

2 Resonance Pad 1

Resonance Pad 2

Resonance Pad 3

Resonance Pad 4

2 Resonance Pad 5

Resonance Pad 6

Resonance Pad 7

Resonance Pad 8

Resonance Pad 9

Resonance Pad 10

Resonance Pad 11

3 Bell Pad 1

Bell Pad 2

Bell Pad 3

Bell Pad 4

Bell Pad 5

Bell Pad 6

Bell Pad 7

Bell Pad 8

Bell Pad 9

Bell Pad 10

Bell Pad 11

Bell Pad 12

4 Space Pad 1

Space Pad 2

Space Pad 3

Space Pad 4

Space Pad 5

Space Pad 6

Space Pad 7

Space Pad 8

Space Pad 9

Space Pad 10

5 Galaxy Pad 1

Galaxy Pad 2

Galaxy Pad 3

Galaxy Pad 4

Galaxy Pad 5

Bright Pad 1

Bright Pad 2

Bright Pad 3

Bright Pad 4

Bright Pad 5

6 Noisy Pad 1

Noisy Pad 2

Noisy Pad 3

Noisy Pad 4

Noisy Pad 5

Noisy Pad 6

7 Ambi Pad 1

Ambi Pad 2

Ambi Pad 3

Ambi Pad 4

Ambi Pad 5

Ambi Pad 6

Warm Pad 1

Warm Pad 2

Warm Pad 3

Warm Pad 4

Warm Pad 5

Voices whose names begin with the prefix “S-” are referred to as “Super Articulation Voices.” For information about what sound is produced when you play

these Voices, see “Super Articulation Voice Supplementary List” on page 34. For details about Super Articulation Voices, see page 37.

Voice List

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Voices

SYNTH

ORGAN

7 Warm Pad 6

8 Dark Pad 1

Dark Pad 2

Dark Pad 3

Dark Pad 4

Dark Pad 5

Dark Pad 6

Dark Pad 7

Dark Pad 8

Dark Pad 9

9 Vox Pad 1

Vox Pad 2

Vox Pad 3

Vox Pad 4

Vox Pad 5

Vox Pad 6

10 Sweep Pad 1

Sweep Pad 2

Sweep Pad 3

Sweep Phase

Sweep Flanger 1

Sweep Flanger 2

11 Metallic Pad 1

Metallic Pad 2

Metallic Pad 3

SFX Pad 1

SFX Pad 2

SFX Pad 3

1 Synth Lead 1

Synth Lead 2

Synth Lead 3

Synth Lead 4

Synth Lead 5

Synth Lead 6

Synth Lead 7

Synth Lead 8

Synth Lead 9

2 Fat Saw Lead 1

Fat Saw Lead 2

Fat Saw Lead 3

Fat Saw Lead 4

Fat Saw Lead 5

Fat Saw Lead 6

Filter Lead 1

Filter Lead 2

Filter Lead 3

Filter Lead 4

Filter Lead 5

Filter Lead 6

Filter Lead 7

3 Soft Lead 1

Soft Lead 2

Soft Lead 3

3 Soft Lead 4

Soft Lead 5

Soft Lead 6

Soft Lead 7

Early Lead 1

Early Lead 2

PWM Lead 1

PWM Lead 2

Chorus Saw Lead1

Chorus Saw Lead2

Chorus Saw Lead3

4 Vintage Lead 1

Vintage Lead 2

Vintage Lead 3

Vintage Lead 4

Vintage Lead 5

Vintage Lead 6

Vintage Lead 7

5 Dance Chords 1

Dance Chords 2

Dance Chords 3

Dance Chords 4

Dance Chords 5

Club Lead 1

Club Lead 2

Club Lead 3

6 Pop Lead 1

Pop Lead 2

Pop Lead 3

Pop Lead 4

Pop Lead 5

Pop Lead 6

Pop Lead 7

7 Synth Cla 1

Synth Cla 2

Synth Cla 3

Synth Cla 4

Synth Cla 5

Synth Cla 6

Synth Cla 7

Synth Cla 8

Synth Cla 9

Synth Cla 10

Synth Sax

Synth Trumpet

Synth Violin

8 Synth Brass 1

Synth Brass 2

Synth Brass 3

Synth Brass 4

Synth Brass 5

Synth Brass 6

Synth Brass 7

Synth Brass 8

Synth Brass 9

Synth Brass 10

8 Synth Brass 11

Synth Brass 12

Synth Brass 13

9 Fat Synth Brass1

Fat Synth Brass2

Fat Synth Brass3

Fat Synth Brass4

DetunedSawBrass1

DetunedSawBrass2

DetunedSawBrass3

Soft Syn Brass 1

Soft Syn Brass 2

PWM Brass Slow

PWM Brass Fast

Funky Analog

10 Synth Strs 1

Synth Strs 2

Synth Strs 3

Synth Strs 4

Synth Strs 5

Synth Strs 6

Synth Strs 7

Synth Strs 8

Synth Strs 9

Synth Strs 10

Synth Strs 11

Synth Strs 12

Synth Strs 13

11 LightSynStrings1

LightSynStrings2

LightSynStrings3

LightSynStrings4

MovinSynStrings1

MovinSynStrings2

FatSynStrings 1

FatSynStrings 2

FatSynStrings 3

FatSynStrings 4

Oct Synth Strs 1

Oct Synth Strs 2

Oct Synth Strs 3

12 Synth Bell 1

Synth Bell 2

Synth Bell 3

Synth Bell 4

Synth Bell 5

Synth Bell 6

Synth Bell 7

13 Sky Bell 1

Sky Bell 2

Vox Bell 1

Vox Bell 2

Pop Synth Bell 1

Pop Synth Bell 2

Pop Synth Bell 3

Pop Synth Bell 4

13 Pop Synth Bell 5

14 Synth Decay 1

Synth Decay 2

Synth Decay 3

Synth Decay 4

Synth Pluck 1

Synth Pluck 2

Synth Pluck 3

Synth Pluck 4

Synth Pluck 5

Synth Pluck 6

15 Synth Seq 1

Synth Seq 2

Synth Seq 3

Trance Seq 1

Trance Seq 2

Trance Seq 3

Trance Seq 4

Percussive Seq 1

Percussive Seq 2

Percussive Seq 3

Percussive Seq 4

Percussive Seq 5

Percussive Seq 6

1 Pipe Organ 1

Pipe Organ 2

Pipe Organ 3

Pipe Organ 4

Pipe Organ 5

Pipe Organ 6

Pipe Organ 7

Pipe Organ 8

Pipe Organ 9

Pipe Organ 10

2 Theatre Organ 1

Theatre Organ 2

Theatre Organ 3

Theatre Organ 4

Theatre Organ 5

Theatre Organ 6

Theatre Organ 7

Theatre Organ 8

Theatre Organ 9

Theatre Organ 10

Thtr Tibia Full

Thtr Tibia 8&4

Thtr Tibia 16&4

Thtr Tp & Kinura

Thtr Vox & Tibia

Thtr Trumpet16&8

3 Harmonica 1

Harmonica 2

Harmonica 3

Voices whose names begin with the prefix “S-” are referred to as “Super Articulation Voices.” For information about what sound is produced when you play

these Voices, see “Super Articulation Voice Supplementary List” on page 34. For details about Super Articulation Voices, see page 37.

Voice List

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

PIANO

GUITAR

3 Harmonica 4

S-Harmonica

S-BluesHarp

Reed Organ

Bandoneon 1

Bandoneon 2

4 Accordion 1

Accordion 2

Accordion 3

Accordion 4

Accordion 5

Accordion 6

Accordion 7

Accordion 8

Accordion 9

Accordion 10

AccordionMuset.1

AccordionMuset.2

Accordion Full

5 Jazz Organ 1

Jazz Organ 2

Jazz Organ 3

Jazz Organ 4

Jazz Organ 5

Jazz Organ 6

Jazz Organ 7

Jazz Organ 8

Jazz Organ 9

6 Jazz Organ Slow1

Jazz Organ Slow2

Jazz Organ Slow3

Jazz Organ Fast1

Jazz Organ Fast2

Vintage Organ

Vin Organ Slow 1

Vin Organ Slow 2

Vin Organ Fast 1

Vin Organ Fast 2

Vin Organ Fast 3

7 Tonewheel Organ1

Tonewheel Organ2

Tonewheel Organ3

Tonewheel Organ4

Tonewheel Organ5

8 Pop Organ 1

Pop Organ 2

Pop Organ 3

Pop Organ 4

Pop Organ 5

Pop Organ 6

Pop Organ Fast 1

Pop Organ Fast 2

Pop Organ Fast 3

Combo Organ 1

Combo Organ 2

Combo Organ 3

8 Combo Organ 4

9 Rock Organ 1

Rock Organ 2

Rock Organ 3

Rock Organ Slow1

Rock Organ Slow2

Rock Organ Slow3

Rock Organ Slow4

Rock Organ Slow5

Rock Organ Slow6

Rock Organ Slow7

Rock Organ Slow8

Rock Organ Fast1

Rock Organ Fast2

10 Organ Bass 1

Organ Bass 2

Organ Bass 3

Organ Bass 4

1 Piano 1

Piano 2

Piano 3

S-Piano 1

S-Piano 2

Honkytonk Piano

Octave Piano 1

Octave Piano 2

Octave Piano 3

2 Harpsichord 1

Harpsichord 2

Harpsichord 3

S-Harpsichord

Clavichord

3 DX E.Piano 1

DX E.Piano 2

DX E.Piano 3

DX E.Piano 4

DX E.Piano 5

DX E.Piano 6

DX EP Sweet 1

DX EP Sweet 2

DX E.Piano&Pad 1

DX E.Piano&Pad 2

Galaxy EP

DX EP Dynamics

4 Stage E.Piano 1

Stage E.Piano 2

Stage E.Piano 3

Stage E.Piano 4

Stage E.Piano 5

Stage E.Piano 6

S-Stage E.Piano1

S-Stage E.Piano2

S-Stage E.Piano3

4 S-Stage E.Piano4

S-Stage E.Piano5

5 Stack E.Piano 1

Stack E.Piano 2

S-E.Grand CP80 1

S-E.Grand CP80 2

Clavi 1

Clavi 2

Clavi 3

Clavi 4

S-Clavi

S-Muted Clavi

1Nylon Guitar 1

Nylon Guitar 2

Nylon Guitar 3

Nylon Guitar 4

Nylon Guitar 5

S-Nylon Guitar 1

S-Nylon Guitar 2

Flamenco Guitar

S-FlamencoGuitar

2 Steel Guitar 1

Steel Guitar 2

Steel Guitar 3

Steel Guitar 4

SteelGuitarSlide

SteelGuitar Mute

S-Steel Guitar 1

S-Steel Guitar 2

12Str Guitar 1

12Str Guitar 2

3 Jazz Guitar 1

Jazz Guitar 2

Jazz Guitar 3

Jazz Guitar 4

JazzGuitar Slide

Jazz Guitar Oct

S-Jazz Guitar 1

S-Jazz Guitar 2

S-Jazz Guitar 3

4 Elec Guitar 1

Elec Guitar 2

Elec Guitar 3

Elec Guitar 4

Elec Guitar 5

Clean Guitar 1

Clean Guitar 2

Clean Guitar 3

Clean Guitar 4

Clean Guitar 5

Clean Guitar 6

Clean Guitar 7

Clean Guitar 8

5E.Guitar Amp 1

E.Guitar Amp 2

E.Guitar Amp 3

E.Guitar Amp 4

E.Guitar Amp 5

E.Guitar Amp 6

E.Guitar Amp 7

Muted Guitar 1

Muted Guitar 2

Muted Guitar 3

Muted Guitar 4

S-Clean Solid 1

S-Clean Solid 2

S-Clean Solid 3

6 S-Clean Guitar 1

S-Clean Guitar 2

S-Clean Guitar 3

S-Clean Guitar 4

S-Clean Guitar 5

S-Clean Guitar 6

S-Clean Finger 1

S-Clean Finger 2

S-Clean Finger 3

S-Clean Finger 4

S-CleanVintage 1

S-CleanVintage 2

S-CleanVintage 3

7 Distortion Gtr 1

Distortion Gtr 2

Distortion Gtr 3

Distortion Gtr 4

Distortion Gtr 5

Distortion Gtr 6

Distortion Gtr 7

Distortion Gtr 8

Distortion Gtr 9

8 S-Dist Solid 1

S-Dist Solid 2

S-Dist Solid 3

S-Dist Solid 4

S-Dist Solid 5

S-Dist Solid 6

S-Dist Vintage 1

S-Dist Vintage 2

S-Dist Crunch 1

S-Dist Crunch 2

S-Dist Finger 1

S-Dist Finger 2

9 Banjo 1

Banjo 2

Mandolin

Pedal Steel Gtr1

Pedal Steel Gtr2

Pedal Steel Gtr3

Harp 1

Harp 2

Voices whose names begin with the prefix “S-” are referred to as “Super Articulation Voices.” For information about what sound is produced when you play

these Voices, see “Super Articulation Voice Supplementary List” on page 34. For details about Super Articulation Voices, see page 37.

Voice List

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Voices

PERCUSSION

TIMPANI

ELECTRIC BASS

SYNTH BASS

WORLD

9Harp 3

Harp 4

Harp 5

1 Vibraphone 1

Vibraphone 2

Vibraphone 3

Marimba 1

Marimba 2

Marimba 3

Xylophone 1

Xylophone 2

Glockenspiel 1

Glockenspiel 2

Glockenspiel 3

2 Celesta 1

Celesta 2

Music Box 1

Music Box 2

Chime 1

Chime 2

Chime 3

1 Timpani 1

Timpani 2

Timpani 3

Timpani 4

Timpani 5

Timpani Roll 1

Timpani Roll 2

Timpani Roll 3

Timpani Roll 4

S-Timpani Roll

S-TimpaniRoll fp

1 Fingered Bass 1

Fingered Bass 2

Fingered Bass 3

Fingered Bass 4

Fingered Bass 5

Fingered Bass 6

Fingered Bass 7

Fingered Bass 8

Fingered Bass 9

Fingered Bass 10

Fingered Bass 11

S-Fingerd Bass 1

S-Fingerd Bass 2

S-Fingerd Bass 3

2 Slap Bass 1

Slap Bass 2

Slap Bass 3

Slap Bass 4

Slap Bass 5

Slap Bass 6

3 Picked Bass 1

Picked Bass 2

Picked Bass 3

Picked Bass 4

Picked Bass 5

Picked Bass 6

Picked Bass 7

Picked Bass 8

Picked Bass 9

Picked Bass 10

4 Fretless Bass 1

Fretless Bass 2

Fretless Bass 3

Fretless Bass 4

1 Funk Bass 1

Funk Bass 2

Funk Bass 3

Funk Bass 4

Funk Bass 5

Funk Bass 6

Funk Bass 7

Funk Bass 8

Funk Bass 9

Funk Bass 10

2 Dance Bass 1

Dance Bass 2

Dance Bass 3

Dance Bass 4

Dance Bass 5

Dance Bass 6

Dance Bass 7

Dance Bass 8

Dance Bass 9

Dance Bass 10

Dance Bass 11

Dance Bass 12

Dance Bass 13

Dance Bass 14

Dance Bass 15

Dance Bass 16

3 Smooth Bass 1

Smooth Bass 2

Smooth Bass 3

Smooth Bass 4

Smooth Bass 5

Smooth Bass 6

Smooth Bass 7

3 Smooth Bass 8

Smooth Bass 9

Smooth Bass 10

4 Deep Bass 1

Deep Bass 2

Deep Bass 3

Deep Bass 4

Deep Bass 5

Deep Bass 6

5 Fat Bass 1

Fat Bass 2

Fat Bass 3

Fat Bass 4

Fat Bass 5

Fat Bass 6

Fat Bass 7

Fat Bass 8

Fat Bass 9

Fat Bass 10

1 Pan Flute 1

Pan Flute 2

S-Pan Flute 1

S-Pan Flute 2

S-Irish Pipe 1

S-Irish Pipe 2

Bagpipe

Dulcimer 1

Dulcimer 2

Zither

2 Shakuhachi

Yokobue

Shamisen 1

Shamisen 2

Koto

Taishokoto

3Er Hu 1

Er Hu 2

Er Hu 3

Ban Hu

Ma Tou Qin

Di Zi

Suo Na

Hu Lu Si

Sheng

Gu Zheng 1

Gu Zheng 2

Yang Qin

Pi Pa

S-Pi Pa

Liu Qin

San Xian

4Nay

Surnay

4Oud

Sitar 1

Sitar 2

Kamanche

5 Steel Drum

Log Drum

Kalimba

Voices whose names begin with the prefix “S-” are referred to as “Super Articulation Voices.” For information about what sound is produced when you play

these Voices, see “Super Articulation Voice Supplementary List” on page 34. For details about Super Articulation Voices, see page 37.

Voice List

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Super Articulation Voice Supplementary List

This list describes the effects that are produced by playing the Super Articulation Voices (having names beginning with

the prefix “S-”). The meanings of the column titles are as follows:

•Super Articulation

Describes the effects produced just by playing the keyboard, regardless of the settings. For information about AEM in the list, see

page 7. “Key-off Samples” refers to the special, characteristic sound which results when releasing the key.

•Auto

Describes the effects produced by playing the keyboard when setting AUTO (page 43) to ON in page 2 of the Voice Condition display.

An effect marked with “(octave)” will be produced only when you play intervals of minor 7th, Major 7th or octave in legato.

•ART.1 / ART.2

Describes the effects produced by playing the keyboard with the left footswitch when selecting “ART.1” or “ART.2” of FOOT SWITCH

LEFT in page 2 of the Voice Condition display. An effect indicated by “***/***” means a key-on effect/key-off effect. For example,

“Grace Note/Bend Down” indicates that the Grace Note is added by pressing a key while turning on the Left Footswitch while the Bend

Down is applied by releasing a key while turning on the Left Footswitch. An effect indicated by “Sound Effect” is applied when you just

simply press the Left Footswitch. An effect having other indications is applied when you press a key while turning on the Left

Footswitch.

•Type

Lists one of the four types A – D, each of which is determined by how you play the Voice. For example about each of four types, see

page 37.

Category Voice Name Super Articulation Auto ART.1 ART.2 Type

STRINGS/

VIOLIN

S-Strings 1 Legato – – –

S-Strings 2 Legato – – –

S-Strings 3 Legato – – –

S-Violin 1 Key-off Samples,

Legato (AEM)

Bend Up, Bend Down,

Portamento (Octave)

Bend Up /

Bend Down

Grace Note /

Bend Down

S-Violin 2 Key-off Samples,

Legato (AEM)

Portamento (Octave) Grace Note /

Bend Down

Bend Up /

Bend Down

CONTRABASS S-AcousticBass 1 Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-AcousticBass 2 Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

BRASS/

TRUMPET

S-BrsSect.Legato Legato – – –

S-BrsSect.Fall – Fall Down – B

S-BrsSect.Up – Glissando Up – B

S-Trumpet 1 Legato (AEM) Bend Up, Bend Down,

Glissando (Octave)

Bend Up /

Bend Down

Glissando Up /

Glissando Down

S-Trumpet 2 Legato (AEM) Glissando (Octave) Bend Up /

Bend Down

Glissando Up /

Glissando Down

S-Trumpet Fall – Glissando Up – B

S-Trumpet Shake – Shake – B

S-Trombone Legato (AEM) Bend Up, Bend Down,

Glissando (Octave)

Bend Up (Fast) /

Bend Down

Bend Up (Slow) /

Glissando Down

S-Horn Section Legato – – –

WOODWIND/

FLUTE

S-Flute Key-off Samples,

Legato (AEM)

– Grace Note /

Bend Down

Glissando Up /

Glissando Down

S-Flute Flutter Key-off Samples,

Legato (AEM)

Grace Note,

Glissando (Octave)

Grace Note /

Bend Down

Glissando Up /

Glissando Down

S-Clarinet 1 Legato (AEM) Grace Note,

Glissando (Octave)

Bend Up /

Bend Down

Glissando Up /

Glissando Down

S-Clarinet 2 Legato (AEM) Bend Up, Bend Down,

Glissando (Octave)

Bend Up /

Bend Down

Glissando Up /

Glissando Down

S-Alto Sax Key-off Samples,

Legato (AEM)

Bend Up,

Glissando (Octave)

Bend Up /

Bend Down

Glissando Up /

Glissando Down

S-Alto Sax Growl Key-off Samples,

Legato (AEM)

Bend Up,

Glissando (Octave)

Bend Up /

Bend Down

Glissando Up /

Glissando Down

S-Tenor Sax 1 Key-off Samples,

Legato (AEM)

Bend Up,

Glissando (Octave)

Bend Up /

Bend Down

Glissando Up /

Glissando Down

S-Tenor Sax 2 Legato (AEM) Bend Up,

Glissando (Octave)

Bend Up /

Bend Down

Glissando Up /

Glissando Down

S-Tenor Sax 3 Legato (AEM) Bend Up, Bend Down,

Glissando (Octave)

Bend Up /

Bend Down

Glissando Up /

Glissando Down

S-TenorSax Growl Key-off Samples,

Legato (AEM)

Bend Up,

Glissando (Octave)

Bend Up /

Bend Down

Glissando Up /

Glissando Down

S-Soprano Sax Key-off Samples,

Legato (AEM)

Grace Note,

Glissando (Octave)

Grace Note /

Bend Down (Fast)

Bend Up /

Bend Down

S-SprnoSax Growl Key-off Samples,

Legato (AEM)

Bend Up,

Glissando (Octave)

Bend Up /

Bend Down

Glissando Up /

Glissando Down

Voice List

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Voices

CHOIR S-ChoirSoft Aah Legato – – –

S-ChoirBoys Aah Legato – – –

S-ChoirSoft Ooh Legato – – –

S-ChoirBoys Ooh Legato – – –

S-GsplChr Hmm Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-GsplChr Hm/Ah – “Aah” – B

S-GsplChr Wow Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-GsplChr W/Hey – “Hey” – B

S-GsplChr Hey Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-ShoBeDoBa/Hmm Scat Singing – “Hmm” – C

S-ShoBeDoBa/Wah Scat Singing – “Wah” – C

S-ShoBeDoBa/Doo Scat Singing – “Doo” – C

S-ShoBaDoBa/Daa Scat Singing – “Daa” – C

S-DoBaBe/Shoo Scat Singing – “Shoo” – C

S-DoBeDoBe/Wah Scat Singing – “Wah” – C

S-DoBeBaDa/DoWe Scat Singing – “DoWe” – C

S-BaDaYah/Doo Scat Singing – “Doo” – C

S-YaBaDaBa/Doo Scat Singing – “Doo” – C

S-Scat/Doo Scat Singing – “Doo” – C

S-Scat/DoWe Scat Singing – “DoWe” – C

S-Scat/SFX 1 Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Scat/SFX 2 Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-WhtShouldWeDo Scat Singing – “Wah” – C

S-WhoAreYou/Wee Scat Singing – “Wee” – C

S-DoWeYouBe/Wah Scat Singing – “Wah” – C

S-HaaVibrato/SFX Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-OohVibrato/SFX Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-OohBoysVib/SFX Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-OhGirlsVib/SFX Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-DooVibrato/SFX Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-DooBoys/SFX Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-DooGirls/SFX Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-DaaVibrato/SFX Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-BaaVibrato/SFX Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-WahVibrato/SFX Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-YooVibrato/SFX Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

ORGAN S-Harmonica Legato (AEM) Grace Note, Bend Down,

Legato (Octave)

Bend Up /

Bend Down

Grace Note /

Bend Down

S-BluesHarp Legato (AEM) Grace Note, Bend Down,

Legato (Octave)

Bend Up /

Bend Down

Grace Note /

Bend Down

PIANO S-Piano 1 Key-off Samples – – –

S-Piano 2 Key-off Samples – – –

S-Harpsichord Key-off Samples – – –

S-Stage E.Piano1 Key-off Samples – – –

S-Stage E.Piano2 Key-off Samples – – –

S-Stage E.Piano3 Key-off Samples – – –

S-Stage E.Piano4 Key-off Samples – – –

S-Stage E.Piano5 Key-off Samples – – –

S-E.Grand CP80 1 Key-off Samples – – –

S-E.Grand CP80 2 Key-off Samples – – –

S-Clavi Key-off Samples – – –

S-Muted Clavi Key-off Samples – – –

GUITAR S-Nylon Guitar 1 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Nylon Guitar 2 – Harmonics – B

S-FlamencoGuitar Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Steel Guitar 1 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Steel Guitar 2 – Harmonics – B

S-Jazz Guitar 1 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Jazz Guitar 2 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Jazz Guitar 3 Key-off Samples – Octave Playing – B

Category Voice Name Super Articulation Auto ART.1 ART.2 Type

Voice List

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

GUITAR S-Clean Solid 1 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Clean Solid 2 Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Clean Solid 3 Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Clean Guitar 1 Key-off Samples – Harmonics – B

S-Clean Guitar 2 – Harmonics – B

S-Clean Guitar 3 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Clean Guitar 4 – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Clean Guitar 5 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Clean Guitar 6 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Clean Finger 1 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Clean Finger 2 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Clean Finger 3 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Clean Finger 4 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-CleanVintage 1 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-CleanVintage 2 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-CleanVintage 3 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Dist Solid 1 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Dist Solid 2 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Dist Solid 3 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Dist Solid 4 Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Dist Solid 5 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Dist Solid 6 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Dist Vintage 1 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Dist Vintage 2 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Dist Crunch 1 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Dist Crunch 2 Key-off Samples, Legato – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Dist Finger 1 – Grace Note – B

S-Dist Finger 2 – Grace Note – B

TIMPANI S-Timpani Roll Key-off Samples – – –

S-TimpaniRoll fp Key-off Samples – – –

ELECTRIC

BASS

S-Fingerd Bass 1 Key-off Samples – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Fingerd Bass 2 Key-off Samples – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

S-Fingerd Bass 3 Key-off Samples – Sound Effect Sound Effect A

WORLD S-Pan Flute 1 Legato (AEM) Bend Up,

Glissando Up (Octave)

Bend Up (Fast) /

Bend Down

Bend Up (Slow) /

Bend Down

S-Pan Flute 2 Legato (AEM) Bend Up,

Glissando Up (Octave)

Bend Up /

Bend Down

Glissando Up /

Glissando Down

S-Irish Pipe 1 Legato (AEM) Bend Up, Bend Down,

Grace Note (Octave)

Bend Up /

Bend Down

Grace Note /

Bend Down

S-Irish Pipe 2 Legato,

Grace Note (AEM)

Bend Down Bend Up /

Bend Down

Grace Note /

Bend Down

S-Pi Pa Key-off Samples – – –

Category Voice Name Super Articulation Auto ART.1 ART.2 Type

Tone Generator

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Voices

Tone Generator

The Electone features the AWM (Advanced Wave

Memory) tone generation system.

AWM is a synthesis system based on sampled waves, or

audio recordings of actual instruments. AWM Voices use

multiple samples, so that they sound like a real

instrument. This section also describes how to play the

Super Articulation Voices, since you will need special

settings and operations for playing these Voices.

What are Super Articulation Voices?

The Super Articulation Voices (having names beginning

with the prefix “S-”) realistically recreate many of the

performance techniques and characteristic sounds

generated when an artist plays an instrument. As a result,

you can produce superbly detailed expression such as the

realistic sound of finger slides on guitar and keyboard

action noise of electronic piano. Moreover, these Voices

will enable you to feel the breath noise of musicians

which employ performance techniques such as legato,

pitch bend and glissando, as well as scat singing (“Shoo-

Bee-Doo-Bah,” etc.), such as adlibbed by jazz vocalists.

These expressions can be called up by simply playing the

keyboard or by using the Left Footswitch.

Expression examples via the Super

Articulation Voice

The following expressions can be produced by setting the

parameters of ARTICULATION (page 43) on page 2 of

the Voice Condition display.

Example: S-Nylon Guitar (type A)

When either of “ART.1” or “ART.2” is selected, pressing

the Left Footswitch will produce body-tapping sound.

Example: S-Steel Guitar (type B)

When “ART.1” is selected, playing the keyboard with the

Left Footswitch pressed will produce sound via picking

harmonics.

Example: S-ShooBeeDooBah/Hmm (type C)

When “ART.1” is selected, playing the keyboard with the

Left Footswitch pressed will produce a humming sound

while playing the keyboard with the Left Footswitch

released will produce “Shoo,” “Bee,” “Doo,” and “Bah”

alternatively.

Example: S-Alto Saxophone (type D)

When “ART.1” is selected, playing the keyboard with the

Left Footswitch pressed will bend the pitch up.

When “ART.2” is selected, playing the keyboard with the

Left Footswitch pressed will produce glissando.

When “AUTO” is set to ON, both the bend-up and

glissando are produced automatically by just playing the

keyboard.

AWM Tone Generator

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Organ Flutes

This Electone has an Organ Flutes feature that allows you to create your own organ Voices, giving you access

to an unlimited combination of organ sounds. With this function, you can recreate all of the classic organ

sounds by adjusting the flute footage levels and the percussive sounds, just like on conventional organs. There

are nine flute footage settings, with three additional footage settings for the attack sound.

1 Press one of the Organ Flutes buttons

(UPPER or LOWER).

The lamp above the button lights and the Flute

Footage Levers appear on the display.

2 Select the wave type for the Organ Flute

Voice.

Specifies the type of organ tone generation to be

simulated.

• SINE: Produces a clean, clear sound.

• VINTAGE: Produces a gritty, slightly distorted

sound.

• EURO: Produces the sound of the transistor

electronic organ equipped with the electronic

tremolo.

3 Adjust flute footage settings (over a

range of 0 – 8).

The Flute footage levers can be adjusted by directly

touching the display.

The Data Control dial cannot be used. Play the

keyboard and listen to the changes in the sound as

you adjust the footage levels.

Press the [ATTACK/VOLUME] button in

the upper right on the display to adjust

the volume and Rotary Speaker settings.

ATTACK/VOLUME Page

ATTACK

Determines the level of each volume in the percussive

portion of the Voice. Footage settings are 4', 2-2/3' and 2'.

The LENGTH lever determines the duration of the attack

sound.

RESP. (Response)

Determines the overall speed of the keyboard response.

Moving the lever downward makes the keyboard

response slower, creating a pipe organ effect.

MODE

Determines which notes in a held group of notes are

given an attack sound.

This parameter is common to both Upper and Lower

Organ Flute Voices.

• FIRST: Only the first note played will have attack. All

other notes played while the first is held have no attack.

• EACH: All notes played have an attack sound.

FOOTAGE Page

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Organ Flutes

REVERB

Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Organ

Flute Voice. When the panel REVERB control is set to the

minimum, the setting here will have no effect.

Reference page

• Reverb (page 44)

VOLUME

Determines the overall volume of the Organ Flute Voice.

The volume balance of the individual footages is

maintained. A minimum setting here produces no Organ

Flute sound.

5 Press the [VIBRATO] button in the upper

right on the display, then set the related

parameters.

VIBRATO Page

VIBRATO

The Vibrato function wavers the level of the Voices,

making them sound warmer and more animated. This

effect is applied independently to each Voice section.

-1 ON/OFF

Turns on or off the Vibrato effect.

-2 DEPTH

Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect.

Higher settings result in a more pronounced vibrato.

Range: 1 – 3

-3 SPEED

Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect. Higher

settings increase the speed of the vibrato.

Range: 0 – 63

6 Press the [EFFECT] button at the top

right of the display for the Rotary

Speaker settings.

EFFECT Page

EFFECT TYPE

Selects the Rotary Speaker (tremolo) effect type. Press the

EFFECT TYPE button to call up a list of the effect types.

Select the desired type from the list.

To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button.

Reference pages

• Effect List (page 52)

• Rotary Speaker (page 47)

Effect Parameters

Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the

selected effect type.

7 Press one of the Organ Flutes buttons

(UPPER or LOWER) to cancel the Organ

Flute function (the lamp above the

button turns off).

-1 -2 -3

Select the desired effect type

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

The Electone is equipped with two general kinds of functions that can be used to change the sound of the

Voices: Voice Controls and Effects. Each Voice has been given certain factory-preset effect settings to best

enhance its sound. However, if you wish, you can change the sound to suit your preferences by using the

controls and effects described in this section. All built-in effects are digital.

The chart below shows the various Voice controls and effects for the individual Voice sections. Available

functions are indicated by circles. The controls and effects are applied differently according to the different

types: independently for each Voice section, independently for each keyboard, or globally for the entire

system.

*Priority is applied only for Lead Voice 2.

NOTE

Vibrato, Touch Vibrato, Slide, Articulation Auto, Articulation Foot SW Left and Sustain may not be available on some Voices.

Controls and Effects Reference

page for

changing

the

settings

Voice sections to which the controls/effects are applied

Upper Keyboard Lead Voice Lower Keyboard Pedalboard

Upper

Keyboard

Voice 1, 2

Organ Flute

Voice

Lead Voice

1, 2

Lower

Keyboard

Voice 1, 2

Organ Flute

Voice

Pedalboard

Voice 1, 2

Pan page 41

 — — 

Touch Tone page 41

 — — 

Pitch page 41

 — — 

Feet page 42

 — — 

Reverb (send level) page 42



Brilliance page 42

 — — 

Volume page 42



Priority page 42

—— *———

Poly (Pedal

polyphonic mode)

page 42

—————

Vibrato page 42

 — — 

Touch Vibrato page 43

 — — 

Lead Slide page 43

—— ———

Articulation Auto page 43

 — — 

Articulation Foot

SW Left

page 43

 — — 

Transpose page 44

 — — 

Tun e page 44

 — — 

Effect (1/2) page 43



(Rotary

Speaker only)





(Rotary

Speaker only)



Reverb page 44



Sustain page 46

 — 

Rotary Speaker page 47



Selected from the display

Selected from

the panel

Settings Selected from the Voice Condition Display

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

Settings Selected from the

Voice Condition Display

Choose a Voice on the panel, then press the same button

on the panel again (or press the name of the selected

Voice in the display). The Voice Condition display

appears.

Voice Condition display for each Voice has five pages that

can be switched by pressing [1] – [5] buttons at the top

right of the display.

Voice Condition [Page 1]

In this display, you can adjust the basic Voice controls,

including panning, touch tone and volume. The displays

of the various Voice sections have slight differences in

their functions.

Voice Link

Lets you register the settings on the Voice Condition

display (except for Volume and Brilliance) to the Voice

Link Category as a Voice. The registered Voice can be

selected from the “Voice Link” category on the display

called up via the User buttons of all the Voice Sections.

For detailed instructions, see page 48.

PAN

Determines the position of the Voice in the stereo image.

Seven pan positions are available.

TOUCH TONE

The Touch Tone function gives you expressive control

over the volume and timbre of a Voice. All Voices are

provided with this expressive function, making it possible

to perfectly reproduce the subtle dynamic and tonal

changes of actual instruments.

Two types of keyboard touch affect this function: Initial

Touch and After Touch.

-1 INITIAL touch

Controls volume and timbre according to the

velocity at which you play the keys. The harder you

play the keys, the greater the volume and the

brighter the timbre will become.

Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum

setting produces no effect.

Range: 0 – 14

NOTE

Initial Touch may not be effective on some organ Voices.

-2 AFTER touch

Controls volume and timbre according to the

pressure you apply to the keys after playing them.

The harder you press down on the keys, the greater

the volume and the brighter the timbre will become.

Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum

setting produces no effect.

Range: 0 – 14

NOTE

• After Touch is not applied to the Pedal Voices.

• After Touch has no effect on percussive Voices (such as

piano or vibraphone), percussion sounds, or some organ

Voices.

PITCH

Controls pitch according to the playing style of

Horizontal Touch or After Touch. On some Voices in the

Lead Voice 2 section, not only pitch but also timbre may

be affected.

-1 AFTER touch

Controls the pitch according to the pressure you

apply to the keys after playing them.

The minimum setting produces no effect at all.

Higher (positive) settings make the pitch higher

according to the pressure and lower (negative)

settings make the pitch lower. The extreme settings

of +14 and -14 result in the widest pitch change.

Range: -14 – +14

-1 -2 -1

-1

Settings Selected from the Voice Condition Display

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

FEET

Determines the octave setting of the Voice, letting you

use the Voice over a wide register. There are three

settings: 4', 8' and 16' (4' is highest and 16' is lowest). A 2'

setting is added to the Pedal Voice sections. PRESET is

the original (factory) setting.

REVERB

Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Voice

section. When the panel REVERB control is set to the

minimum, the setting here will have no effect.

See page 44 for details.

BRILLIANCE

Determines the tonal quality of the Voice, brighter or

mellower. Range is from -3 to +3. Higher settings makes

the Voice tone brighter.

VOLUME

Fine adjustment of the Voice volume. See page 26 for

more information.

PRIORITY (only for the Lead Voice 2)

Determines the mode of Lead Voice 2, Last or Top.

• LAST: Only the last played key is sounded when two or

more keys are played simultaneously.

• TOP: Only the highest note is sounded when two or

more keys are played simultaneously. When the Solo

mode is on, Lead Voice 2 sounds according to Last

mode, regardless of the setting made here.

Reference page

• Solo function (page 27)

POLY (only for Pedal Voices)

Allows you to switch the pedal polyphonic mode on or

off. Setting POLY to on switches the normally

monophonic pedal Voices to polyphonic play. This makes

it possible to play the Pedalboard in various expressive

ways, such as playing legato or playing intervals and

chords.

Keep in mind that you cannot exceed the total maximum

polyphony: 14 notes for all sections, Upper, Lower and

Pedal.

Voice Condition [Page 2]

The items included in this page differ between the Lead

Voice sections and the other sections. SLIDE ( ) only

applies to Lead Voice 1 and 2.

VIBRATO

The Vibrato function wavers the level of the Voices,

making them sound warmer and more animated. This

effect is applied independently to each Voice section. For

some Voices, vibrato may not be effective at all or the

effect may not sound as expected.

-1 PRESET/USER

Selecting PRESET calls up the original (factory)

vibrato settings for the Voice.

When PRESET is selected, DELAY, DEPTH and

SPEED parameters cannot be edited.

Selecting USER lets you adjust the vibrato settings

for yourself.

Vibrato Control

-2 DELAY

Determines the amount of time that elapses between

the playing of a key and the start of the vibrato

effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the

vibrato onset.

Range: 0 – 14

-3 DEPTH

Determines the intensity of the vibrato effect.

Higher settings result in a more pronounced vibrato.

The minimum setting cancels the vibrato effect.

Range: 0 – 14

-2 -3 -4 -1 -2

-1

-1 -2

Delay

Speed

Depth

Settings Selected from the Voice Condition Display

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

-4 SPEED

Determines the speed of the vibrato effect. Higher

settings increase the speed of the vibrato.

Range: 0 – 14

TOUCH VIBRATO

Turns the Touch Vibrato function on or off. Setting

Touch Vibrato to on lets you apply vibrato to individual

notes as you play them by after touch. The harder you

press down the key, the greater the vibrato will be. When

Touch Vibrato is off, vibrato depth cannot be controlled,

no matter how hard you press the keys.

NOTE

Touch Vibrato is not applied to the Pedal Voices of this Electone.

SLIDE (only for Lead Voices)

Applies a portamento effect to notes played in legato. The

Slide function is effective within a one-octave range for

Lead Voices. Slide has no effect when playing notes

beyond a one-octave range.

Reference page

• Controlling Lead Slide with Foot Pedal (sold separately; see

page 177)

-1 ON/FOOT PEDAL/OFF

On/Off switch and Foot Pedal selector for the Slide

effect.

-2 TIME

Determines the speed of the slide or portamento

effect. Higher settings makes the slide speed slower.

Range: 0 – 14

NOTE

The parameters here are not available when a Super Articulation

Voice is selected.

ARTICULATION

The settings here, available only for Super Articulation

Voices, produce effects (such as pitch bend and

glissando) which are characteristic of the corresponding

acoustic instrument, making your keyboard performance

more realistic.

-1 AUTO

Setting this to ON will apply various effects such as

pitch bend and glissando to your keyboard

performance.

-2 FOOT SW LEFT

Determines the effect produced via the Left

Footswitch: ART.1, ART.2 and OFF.

NOTE

For information about what effect is produced by setting

AUTO, ART.1 and ART.2 to ON, see “Super Articulation

Voice Supplementary List” on pages 34 – 36. As listed on

these pages, AUTO, ART.1 and ART.2 are not available for

some Voices.

Voice Condition [Pages 3 and 4]

You can edit the effect parameters from these two

displays. Both displays have the same contents. You can

select two effects for each Voice section with these

displays (Voice Condition Pages 3 and 4).

EFFECT 1 (Page 3)/EFFECT 2 (Page 4)

Selects the effect category. Pressing the EFFECT button

on the display calls up the effect category list. Select the

desired effect category from the list.

To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button.

Reference page

• Effect List (page 52)

By selecting [PRESET] in the list, the original (factory)

effect category for the selected Voice is automatically set.

Selecting [THRU] bypasses the effect (no effect is added

to the selected Voice).

TYPE 1 (Page 3)/ TYPE 2 (Page 4)

Determines the type of the effect. Pressing the TYPE

button on the display calls up the effect type list,

corresponding to the selected effect category. Select the

desired effect type from the list.

To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button.

If you have selected the [PRESET] category, the effect

type cannot be edited.

After changing the effect type, the effect parameter below

is automatically changed corresponding to the selected

effect type.

Effect Parameters

Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the

selected effect type.

Selecting from the Panel

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Voice Condition [Page 5]

TRANSPOSE

Changes the pitch in semitones for each Voice section.

Range is from -6 to +6.

Reference page

• Transpose (for entire instrument); (page 180)

TUNE

Determines the fine pitch settings (detune) for each Voice

section, producing a richer sound. Each step represents a

1-cent change in pitch.

Range: -64 – +63

Reference page

• Pitch (for entire instrument); (page 180)

Selecting from the Panel

The Reverb, Sustain, Brilliance and Rotary Speaker

displays are called up by pressing the respective buttons

on the panel.

Reverb adds an echo-like effect to the sound, giving the

impression of a performance in a large room or concert

hall. You can adjust the reverb volume for each Voice

sections, or adjust the reverb volume for rhythm and

accompaniment separately.

To adjust the reverb effect and call up

the Reverb pages:

Press one of the REVERB buttons, located to the left of

the panel, to set the Reverb effect. The Reverb display

appears.

The Reverb display consists of four pages.

REVERB [Page 1]

DEPTH:

Fine adjustment of the depth of reverberation or the level

of the reflected sounds. Coarse reverb depth settings are

made with the panel REVERB buttons. The REVERB

buttons let you make coarse adjustment in five settings to

the reverb depth while the slider gives you fine control.

When this parameter or the panel REVERB control is set

to the minimum, the settings in the pages that follow

have no effect.

Range: 0 – 24

Reverb

Selecting from the Panel

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

NOTE

Depending on the reverb depth value (set by the slider), two

adjacent REVERB lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating

an intermediate position.

REVERB [Page 2]

TYPE

Determines the reverb type for each of the Voice sections

and the Organ Flute Voice.

Several types can be selected: Room, Hall, Stage, and so

on.

Pressing the TYPE button on the display calls up the

Reverb Type list.

Reference page

• Effect List (page 52)

The list contains many reverb types, more than can fit on

one display page. To change the display pages, press the

appropriate number buttons [1] or [2] in the display.

Select the desired reverb type from the list.

To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button.

After changing the reverb type, the TIME parameter

below is automatically changed corresponding to the

selected reverb type.

TIME

Determines the reverb length for each of the Voice

sections and the Organ Flute Voice.

Higher settings make the reverb effect longer.

Range: 0.3s – 30.0s

ORGAN

Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Organ

Flute Voice. This parameter corresponds to the REVERB

slider contained in the ATTACK/VOLUME Page of the

Organ Flute display.

Range: 0 – 24

Reference page

• Organ Flutes (page 38)

REVERB [Page 3]

Determines the amount of reverb effect applied to each

Voi ce section.

Each slider corresponds to the REVERB slider in Voice

Condition Page 1 of the respective Voices.

Range: 0 – 24

REVERB [Page 4]

TYPE

Determines the reverb type for rhythm, accompaniment,

keyboard percussion, and microphone signal.

Reference page

• Connecting a microphone (page 185)

TIME

Determines the length of reverb applied to the rhythm,

accompaniment, keyboard percussion, and microphone

signal.

Range: 0.3s – 30.0s

Press the number buttons to change the display pages.

Selecting from the Panel

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

RHYTHM

Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythm

(with PERCUSSION slider) and accompaniment (with

ACCOMPANI. slider). Each slider corresponds to the

REVERB slider in the Rhythm Condition display.

Range: 0 – 24

Reference page

• Changing the rhythm reverb (page 58)

KEYBOARD PERCUSSION

Determines the amount of reverb applied to the

Keyboard Percussion.

Range: 0 – 24

Reference page

• Keyboard Percussion (page 66)

The sustain effect, selectable for each Voice section,

causes Voices to gradually fade out when the keys are

released. The sustain on/off and sustain length settings

are independent for each keyboard, providing maximum

expressive control.

The Foot Pedal can also be used to switch the sustain on/

off. Sustain cannot be applied to the Lead Voices.

Reference page

• Foot Pedal (page 176)

To add sustain to the Voices and call up

the Sustain Length display:

Press one of the SUSTAIN buttons, located to the left of

the panel, to set the sustain. The SUSTAIN LENGTH

display appears.

The lamp of the button lights up to indicate that sustain is

on. Press the button again to turn sustain off and the

lamp turns off. When the lamp is off, sustain does not

affect the corresponding keyboard.

Remember to check whether the sustain button lamps are

on or off before you start to play.

SUSTAIN LENGTH display

To adjust the sustain length value, use the display slider. If

you set the highest value (HOLD), some Voices such as

organ or synth will sound continuously even when the

keys are released.

Range: 0 – 12, HOLD

NOTE

• If you change the Voice when the sustain length is set to HOLD

and the keys are released, the Voice only changes after you play

another key.

• When the sustain length is set to HOLD, previously played note(s)

may be cut off by subsequently played notes.

• The minimum setting results in no sustain. Turning sustain off

automatically resets the sustain length to be the default setting.

• Only “HOLD” is available for the Voices listed below. No effect is

produced when a value of 0 – 12 is set.

S-Violin 1/ 2 S-Tenor Sax 1/2/3

S-Trumpet 1/2 S-TenorSax Growl

S-Trombone S-Soprano Sax

S-Flute S-SprnoSax Growl

S-Flute Flutter S-Harmonica

S-Clarinet 1/2 S-BluesHarp

S-Alto Sax S-Pan Flute 1/2

S-Alto Sax Growl S-Irish Pipe 1/2

• If the pedal Voice using a Super Articulation Voice (excepting

S-Piano 1/2) is played when the sustain length is set to HOLD, the

Voice sound which is played earlier continues to sound without

being cut off, regardless of whether Pedal Poly (page 42) is set to

on or off.

Sustain

Selecting from the Panel

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

Rotary Speaker recreates the rich, swirling sound of the

popular rotating speaker effect.

The Rotary Speaker effect can be switched in real time as

you play, with either the front panel button or the Left

Footswitch (when properly set for Footswitch operation).

Keep in mind that the Rotary Speaker effect CANNOT be

turned on only by turning on the [ROTARY SP SPEED]

button. To properly use the Rotary Speaker effect, follow

the procedure below.

1 Select the Rotary Speaker effect from

the desired Voice.

When you want to set Rotary Speaker to one of the

Voice sections, you can select the effect category of

Rotary Speaker in the Voice Condition display

Page 3 or 4. See page 43 for details.

When you want to set Rotary Speaker for the Organ

Flute Voice, select the effect type in the EFFECT

Page. See page 39 for details.

2 Adjust the rotating speed and mode of

the Rotary Speaker.

Press the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel.

The ROTARY SPEAKER display appears. The

settings in this display are common to all Voice

sections.

SPEED

Determines the speed of the speaker rotation.

Range: 2.69Hz – 39.7Hz

MODE

Determines the slow/stop mode when [ROTARY SP

SPEED] button is off. If [SLOW] is selected, a slow

chorus effect is applied when you turn off the button on

the panel.

If [STOP] is selected, the Rotary Speaker effect turns off

when you turn off the button on the panel.

Once the Rotary Speaker effect has been turned on

and set, you can control the effect in real time from

the panel or from the Left Footswitch.

3 Control the Rotary Speaker effect from

the panel or from the Left Footswitch.

You can control Rotary Speaker on/off not only from

the panel but also the Left Footswitch, if the

Footswitch has been properly assigned. See page 176

for details.

Rotary Speaker

Select “Rotary Speaker” here.

Select an effect type other than [OFF].

ROTARY SPEAKER display

Using Voice Link

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Using Voice Link

You can register the current Voice with the current

settings (except for Volume and Brilliance) on the Voice

Condition display to the Voice Link category as a Voice.

1 Make the desired settings on the Voice

Condition display.

Here, set the FEET to “4'.”

2 At the left top on the display, press the

[LINK] button.

3 Press the [REGISTER] button on the

display.

The settings will be registered, then the Voice Link

indication (chain link icon) appears at right of the

Voice name on the display.

This Voice Link indication in the Voice name will be

shown also on the Voice Display, enabling you to

confirm which Voice Section uses Voice Link.

NOTE

When the same Voice has already been registered to Voice

Link, the [REGISTER] button in step 3 is grayed out and

cannot be used. If this occurs, press the [RENAME]

button, assign a different name to the current Voice, then

page 50. If you want to overwrite the current Voice with the

same Voice name to Voice Link, see page 49.

1 Press a User button in the desired Voice

Section.

Registering a Voice with the

settings on the Voice Condition

display to Voice Link

Selecting a Voice registered to

Voice Link

This chain link icon appears when the corresponding

Voice is registered as a Voice Link.

User buttons

Using Voice Link

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

2 Press the Voice Link Category from the

Voice Categories at the right top on the

display, then press the desired Voice

name, for example “Strings 2” here.

If you change the settings on the Voice Condition display

of the Voice in Voice Link, storing to the Registration

Memory will apply the changed new settings to all

Registrations which use the same Voice in Voice Link.

1 Select a Voice in Voice Link, call up the

Voice Condition display, then make the

desired settings.

2 Store the panel settings to a

Registration Memory button by

following the instructions on page 93.

NOTE

• When you save the Song or Unit next time, the settings of the

Voice Condition display will be applied to all the Units.

• When you want to change the Voice Condition settings of the

Voice already registered to Voice Link without affecting the sound

of another Voice Section and another Registration Memory

number, you should release the Voice from Voice Link (see next

topic), then register the settings to Voice Link with a different Voice

name (page 50).

When you want to change the Voice Condition settings of

the Voice already registered to Voice Link without

affecting the sound of another Voice Section and another

Registration Memory number, you should release the

Voice from Voice Link, then register the settings to Voice

Link with a different Voice name by following the

instructions on page 50.

1 From the Voice Link Category display,

select the Voice to be released from

Voice Link.

2 Press the [LINK] button on the display.

3 Press the [OK] button.

The current Voice is now released from Voice Link.

Editing the Voice registered to

Voice Link

Voice Categories Voice Link

Releasing the current Voice

settings from Voice Link

Using Voice Link

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

This section covers how to register the current Voice to

Voice Link with a different Voice name.

1 After pressing the [LINK] button on the

display, press the [RENAME] button on

the dialog window.

2 Change the Voice name, then press the

[OK] button.

Reference page

• Changing the Song Name (page 114)

3 Press the [REGISTER] button on the

dialog window.

The settings will be registered, then the Voice Link

indication appears at right of the Voice name on the

display.

Since there is a limit to the number of Voices that can be

registered to Voice Link, you may want to delete

unnecessary Voices from Voice Link if the amount of

registered Voices comes close to 80.

The delete operation can be executed in any Voice

Section.

1 From the Voice menu in the Voice Link

category, select a Voice to be deleted.

2 Press the [DELETE] button on the

display.

Registering a Voice to Voice Link

with a different Voice name

Deleting a Voice from Voice Link

Using Voice Link

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

3 Press the [OK] button on the dialog

window.

The selected Voice is now deleted from Voice Link.

When you press the Registration Number button

containing data using a Voice registered to Voice Link,

the corresponding Voice and its settings on the Voice

Condition display will be called up from its original Voice

Category (not from Voice Link). This means that the

Voice will sound the same as when the Voice settings

were stored to the Registration Memory, regardless of

changes made in the operation here.

Effect List

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Effect List

REVERB

HALL 1 HALL 2 HALL 3 HALL M HALL L

XG HALL 1 XG HALL 2 ROOM 1 ROOM 2 ROOM 3

ROOM 4 ROOM S ROOM M ROOM L XG ROOM 1

XG ROOM 2 XG ROOM 3 STAGE 1 STAGE 2 XG STAGE 1

XG STAGE 2 PLATE 1 PLATE 2 XG PLATE GM PLATE

WHITE ROOM ATMO HALL ACOSTIC ROOM DRUMS ROOM PERC ROOM

TUNNEL CANYON BASEMENT

DELAY

DELAY LCR XG DLY LCR DELAY LR ECHO CROSS DELAY1

CROSS DELAY2 TEMPO DELAY1 TEMPO DELAY2 TEMPO ECHO TEMPO CROSS1

TEMPO CROSS2 TEMPO CROSS3 TEMPO CROSS4

ER/KARAOKE

ER 1 ER 2 GATE REVERB1 GATE REVERB2 REVERS GATE

KARAOKE 1 KARAOKE 2 KARAOKE 3

CHORUS

CHORUS 1 CHORUS 2 XG CHORUS 1 XG CHORUS 2 XG CHORUS 3

XG CHORUS 4 GM CHORUS 1 GM CHORUS 2 GM CHORUS 3 GM CHORUS 4

FB CHORUS CHORUS FAST CHORUS LITE AMB CHORUS CELESTE 1

CELESTE 2 CELESTE 3 CELESTE 4 AMB CELESTE SYMPHONIC

XG SYMPHONIC AMB SYMPHO ENS DETUNE 1 ENS DETUNE 2

FLANGER

FLANGER 1 FLANGER 2 XG FLANGER 1 XG FLANGER 2 XG FLANGER 3

GM FLANGER V_FLANGER TEMP FLANGER DYNA FLANGER VIN FLANGER1

VIN FLANGER2 AMB FLANGER

PHASER

PHASER 1 PHASER 2 PHASER 3 EP PHASER 1 EP PHASER 2

EP PHASER 3 TEMP PHASER1 TEMP PHASER2 DYNA PHASER VIN PHASER 1

VIN PHASER 2 VIN PHSR ST1 VIN PHSR ST2 VIN PHSR ST3 VIN PHSR ST4

TREMOLO/AUTO PAN

TREMOLO 1 TREMOLO 2 XG TREMOLO EP TREMOLO GT TREMOLO 1

GT TREMOLO 2 ORG TREMOLO VIBE VIBRATE T_TREMOLO AUTO PAN

XG AT PAN 1 XG AT PAN 2 EP AUTO PAN T_AUTO PAN 1 T_AUTO PAN 2

ROTARY SPEAKER

XG ROTARY SP ROTARY SP 1 ROTARY SP 2 ROTARY SP 3 ROTARY SP 4

ROTARY SP 5 2WAY ROT SP DUAL ROTSP 1 DUAL ROTSP 2 DUAL ROT BRT

DUAL ROT WRM DIST+ROT SP ODRV+ROT SP AMP+ROT SP DIST+2ROT SP

ODRV+2ROT SP AMP+2ROT SP

DISTORTION

DIST HARD 1 DIST HARD 2 DIST SOFT 1 DIST SOFT 2 ST DIST HARD

ST DIST SOFT OVERDRIVE ST OVERDRIVE XG DIST XG ST DIST

V_DIST HARD V_DIST SOFT COMP+DIST XG CMP+DIST V_DIST WARM

V_DIST CLS H V_DIST CLS S V_DIST METAL V_DIST CRUNC V_DIST BLUES

V_DIST EDGY V_DIST SOLID V_DIST CLN 1 V_DIST CLN 2 V_DIST TWIN

V_DIST ROCA V_DST JZ CLN V_DST FUSION

Effect List

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

NOTE

Damper Resonance (DAMPER RESO) can be applied only when Sustain is turned on. For information on turning Sustain on, see

page 46.

DISTORTION+

DIST+DELAY ODRV+DELAY XG DIST+DLY XG ODRV+DLY CMP+DIST+DLY

CMP+ODRV+DLY XG CMP+DT+DL XG CMP+OD+DL V_DIST H+DLY V_DIST S+DLY

DIST+T DLY ODRV+T DLY CMP+DST+TDLY CMP+OD+TDLY1 CMP+OD+TDLY2

CMP+OD+TDLY3 CMP+OD+TDLY4 CMP+OD+TDLY5 CMP+OD+TDLY6 VDST H+TDLY1

VDST H+TDLY2 VDST S+TDLY1 VDST S+TDLY2

AMP SIMULATOR

AMP SIM XG AMP SIM ST AMP SIM 1 ST AMP SIM 2 ST AMP SIM 3

ST AMP SIM 4 ST AMP SIM 5 XG ST AMP ST AMP SOLID ST AMP CRUNC

ST AMP BLUES ST AMP CLEAN ST AMP HARP SML ST DIST SML ST OVRDR

SML ST VINTG SML ST HEAVY B CMB CLASC B CMB TOPBST B CMB CUSTOM

B CMB HEAVY B LGND BLUES B LGND HVY1 B LGND HVY2 B LGND CLEAN

B LGND D CLN US CMB TWIN USCMB RCH CL USCMB THN CL USCMB CRUNCH

JZ CMB BASIC JZ CMB WARM US HI GN DTY US HI GN RIF US HIGN BURN

US HIGN SOLO B LD DIRTY B LD DRIVE B LD GAINER B LD HARD

WAH

AUTO WAH XG AUTO WAH V_AUTO WAH TOUCH WAH 1 TOUCH WAH 2

TOUCH WAH 3 V_TOUCH WAH AT WAH+DIST XG AT WH+DST AT WH+DST HD

AT WH+DS T H V AT W H+ DST LT AT WAH +O DRV XG AT WAH +O D AT WH+OD HD

AT WH+OD HV AT WH+OD LT TC WAH+DIST XG TC WH+DST TC WH+DST HD

TC WH+DST HV TC WH+DST LT TC WAH+ODRV XG TC WAH+OD TC WAH+OD HD

TC WAH+OD HV TC WAH+OD LT CLAVI TC WAH EP TOUCH WAH WAH+DST+TDLY

WAH+OD+TDLY1 WAH+OD+TDLY2 WAH+DIST+DLY XG WH+DST+DL WAH+ODRV+DLY

XG WH+OD+DLY TEMPO AT WAH T_A.WH+DST T_A.WH+DSTHD T_A.WH+DSTHV

T_A.WH+DSTLT T_A.WH+ODRV T_A.WH+OD HD T_A.WH+OD HV T_A.WH+OD LT

DYNAMIC

M BAND COMP COMPRESSOR COMP MED COMP HEAVY COMP MELODY

COMP BASS V_COMPRESSOR NOISE GATE

EQ/ENHANCER

ST 2BAND EQ ST 3BAND EQ XG 3BAND EQ EQ DISCO EQ TEL

HM ENHANCER XG HM ENHNCE

PITCH CHANGE

PITCH CHANGE XG PCH CHG 1 XG PCH CHG 2

MISCELLANEOUS

AMBIENCE IMPULSE EXP RESONATOR VOICE CANCEL TALKING MOD

LO-FI DYNA FILTER DYNA RINGMOD RING MOD ISOLATOR

LOOP FX1 LOOP FX2 LO-FI DRUM1 LO-FI DRUM2 LO-FI DRUM3

LO-FI DRUM4 DAMPER RESO

THRU

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

This Electone features more than 600 different real rhythms featuring actual drum and percussion sampled

sounds. Automatic Accompaniment functions are used with the rhythms, providing appropriate and

completely automatic accompaniment to match the style of the selected rhythm. Moreover, the Electone has a

Keyboard Percussion feature that allows you to play drum and percussion sounds from the Upper, Lower

keyboard and Pedalboard.

Selecting Rhythms with

the Rhythm Buttons

You can instantly select a rhythm from more than 600

rhythms with the ten rhythm buttons on the front panel.

In the explanation below, 16Beat 1 in the POPS category

is selected as an example.

1 Press one of the Rhythm buttons in the

RHYTHM section on the front panel (for

example, the [POPS] button).

The relevant Rhythm Menu is displayed.

2 Select the desired rhythm name from

the Rhythm menu.

The Rhythm menu contains many Pops rhythms,

more than can fit on the display page. To change the

display pages, press the appropriate number buttons

in the display.

The color of the selected rhythm name changes to

orange, indicating that it has been selected.

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Selecting a rhythm

Rhythm buttons

Selecting Rhythms with the Rhythm Buttons

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as

desired by pressing the buttons on the panel. Using the

Fill Ins and Break patterns let you add dynamic interest

and “spice” to your performance.

To start/stop the rhythm:

START

The rhythm begins as soon as the [START] button is

pressed.

To stop the rhythm, press the button again.

SYNCHRO START

The [SYNCHRO START] button puts the rhythm in

“standby.” The rhythm starts when you press a note on

the Lower keyboard or Pedalboard.

When the A.B.C. mode is set to OFF, pressing the

[SYNCHRO START] button again stops the rhythm.

When the A.B.C. mode is set to something other than

OFF, releasing the key from the Lower keyboard stops the

rhythm.

When the A.B.C. mode is set to Custom A.B.C., releasing

the keys both from the Lower Keyboard and the

Pedalboard stops the rhythm.

Reference page

• Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.)

(page 64)

INTRO

Pressing one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons

automatically adds a short introduction before starting

the actual (Main) rhythm.

First press one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons, then press

the [START] or [SYNCHRO START] button to actually

start the rhythm.

Rhythm structure

Each rhythm is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a

rhythmic variation of the basic rhythm, you can use them to

add “spice” to your performance and mix up the beats while

you are playing. You can freely change the section while the

rhythm is played back.

INTRO

This is used for the beginning of the Song. There are three

Intro sections that can be selected with the INTRO [1] – [3]

buttons. When the Intro finishes playing, the rhythm

automatically shifts to the Main section.

MAIN

This is used for playing the main part of the Song. There are

four Main sections that can be selected with the MAIN/FILL

IN [A] – [D] buttons. The rhythm pattern of several

measures repeats indefinitely.

FILL IN

This is designed for use as a temporary and regular

rhythmic pattern to spice up a repeating rhythm. There are

four Fill In sections that can be played by pressing the

selected (lit) MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons as desired.

When one measure pattern of a Fill In finishes playing, the

rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section.

BREAK

This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the

rhythm pattern. The Break section is selected by pressing

the [BREAK] button. When the one-measure Break pattern

finishes playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main

section.

ENDING

This is used for the ending of the Song. There are three

Ending sections that can be selected with the ENDING [1] –

[3] buttons. When the ending is finished, the rhythm

automatically stops.

Selected Intro section’s lamp is lit

Selected Main section’s lamp is lit

Selected Fill In section’s lamp flashes

The lamp is lit when the Break section is selected

Selected Ending section’s lamp is lit

Operating the rhythm from the

panel

Selecting Rhythms with the Rhythm Buttons

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

While the introduction is playing, the BAR/BEAT display

shows the countdown to the first measure of the pattern.

For example, if there is a four-measure lead-in for a

pattern in 4/4 time, the display at right appears:

NOTE

When an Intro or Ending pattern is playing, the Lower Keyboard

cannot be played.

ENDING

Pressing one of the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons

automatically adds an ending phrase before stopping the

rhythm.

When you press the Ending button while rhythm is

playing back, the rhythm will automatically stop after the

ending phrase is played. You can have the ending

gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the

ENDING button once again, while the ending is playing.

NOTE

Pressing the ENDING [1] button during playback of the Main

section will first call up the Fill In pattern, then the Ending 1

pattern.

To switch the rhythm sections:

You can change the rhythm section of the Main phrase by

pressing the desired MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] button.

The selected section’s lamp (above the button) is lit.

To use the Fill In patterns:

As you play the Electone along with the rhythm,

occasionally press the selected MAIN/FILL button as

desired. A Fill In pattern of one measure will be played

and the selected Fill In section’s lamp (above the button)

flashes.

NOTE

You can record the currently selected section to Registration

Memory. However, you cannot record the on/off status of the

Auto Fill In function.

When you use the Auto Fill In function, Fill Ins will be

played automatically. The Auto Fill In function is set in

the Rhythm Condition display.

Pressing the selected Rhythm button on the panel again

(or pressing the rhythm name of the selected rhythm in

the display) calls up the Rhythm Condition display.

When Auto Fill is set to ON in the left side of the display,

the Fill In pattern is automatically played whenever you

switch the Main sections.

To use the Break patterns:

As you play the Electone along with the rhythm,

occasionally press the [BREAK] button.

Moreover, you can start/stop the rhythm and switch the

sections by using the Footswitch. See page 175 for details.

Selecting Rhythms with the Rhythm Buttons

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

There are two ways to set the rhythm volume: using the

VOLUME buttons on the panel and using the volume

slider in the display. The volume buttons let you make

coarse adjustments to the volume while the slider gives

you fine control.

Using VOLUME buttons on the panel

(coarse):

Press one of the VOLUME buttons of the rhythm on the

panel to set the desired level.

The buttons have five volume settings, from a minimum

of 0, or no sound, to a maximum of full volume.

Using VOLUME slider in the display

(fine):

Pressing the same rhythm button on the panel again (or

pressing the rhythm name of the selected rhythm in the

display) calls up the Rhythm Condition display.

To set the volume, touch the PERCUSSION VOLUME

slider in the display or use the Data Control dial. The

control range is from 0 (no sound) to 24 (full volume).

NOTE

Depending on the volume value (set by the slider), two adjacent

VOLUME lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating an

intermediate position.

Use the TEMPO buttons (as shown below) to decrease or

increase the tempo.

TEMPO display shows the current tempo. Displayed

values are given in beats per minute.

The tempo range is 40 to 240 beats per minute.

When the rhythm begins playing, the TEMPO indicator

changes function to a BAR/BEAT indicator.

On the BAR/BEAT indicator, the number on the left

indicates the current bar or measure and the one on the

right indicates the number of the beat in each bar.

You can also see the Tempo and Bar/Beat indications in

the Voice Display. In the Voice Display, both Tempo and

Bar/Beat can be seen in one display.

Reference page

• Voice Display (page 17)

Changing the rhythm volume Adjusting the tempo

Decreasing the tempo Increasing the tempo

TEMPO Indicator

BAR/BEAT Indicator

Bar (measure) Beat

Selecting Rhythms from the User Buttons

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Each rhythm has its original (preset) tempo. Press

[PRESET TEMPO] button in the display or

simultaneously press both TEMPO buttons on the panel

to restore the tempo to the original setting.

You can adjust the amount of reverb applied to the

rhythms and the percussion sounds used in the rhythms

in the Rhythm Condition display.

To adjust the amount of reverb, touch the slider in the

display or use the Data Control dial.

Reference page

• Reverb (page 44)

When the panel REVERB control is set to the minimum,

the setting here will have no effect.

Range: 0 – 24

Selecting Rhythms from

the User Buttons

As with the Voice sections, the Rhythm section also has

User buttons (numbered 1 or 2) from which rhythms can

be selected. You can select original User rhythms that you

have created with the Rhythm Pattern Program function.

This also allows you to assign two or three rhythms from

the same category to be selected from different buttons;

one from the original Rhythm button, and the others

from the User buttons.

1 Press one of the User buttons at the

right of the Rhythm buttons.

The Rhythm Menu appears in the display.

2 Select the desired rhythm category with

the category buttons in the display.

You can also choose the “User” category to select a

User rhythm you have created.

Reference page

• Rhythm Pattern Program (page 142)

The currently selected rhythm category appears in

small letters above of the rhythm buttons in the

display. Keep in mind that the rhythm name shown

above the category name is that of the currently

assigned rhythm and is irrelevant to the rhythm

category.

3 Select a rhythm from the displayed

Rhythm Menu.

Use the number buttons in the display to call up

other rhythms in the category.

Changing the rhythm reverb

User buttons

Currently selected rhythm category

Currently selected rhythm name

Rhythm List

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Rhythm List

This list shows all available rhythms on the Electone. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this

list indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Rhythm Menu.

MARCH

WALTZ

SWING&JAZZ

1Simple March *2

Simple 6/8 March *2

Marching Band 1

Marching Band 2 *2

Marching Band 3

German March

6/8 March 1

6/8 March 2

6/8 Kids

2 OrchestralMarch+ *1

Anime Fantasy + *1

Galaxy Ship

SF March 1

SF March 2 + *1

Blockbuster

Broadway *2

Showtune + *1

Wild West

Pop Classics + *1, *2

3 French 50s

Alpine March

6/8 Organ March *3

Pub Piano

Sing-a-longPiano

Piano March *2, *3

Piano 6/8 March *2, *3

Piano Musical *2, *3

4 Baroque *3

Baroque Air *3

Baroque Concerto *3

Strings Adagio *3

Strings Concerto *3

ClassicalSerenad *3

Choral Symphony *3

Romantic Ballet *2, *3

Brass Band Hymn+ *1, *3

1Waltz *2

Simple Waltz *3

Orchestral Waltz

Vienna Waltz 1

Vienna Waltz 2

Vienna Waltz 3

Gentle Waltz 1

Gentle Waltz 2

Classic Waltz

Slow Waltz

2 Jazz Waltz 1

Jazz Waltz 2

Jazz Waltz 3

Jazz Waltz 4

Jazz Waltz Med

Jazz Waltz Fast

Modern Waltz

Pop Waltz

Country Waltz

3 Mariachi

Banda Vals

Snow Waltz

Vocal Waltz

Alpine Waltz

AlpenLand 3/4

Scand Hambo

Highland Waltz

Musette

Italian Mazurka

Italian Waltz

French Waltz

4 Movie Soundtrack

Choir Soundtrack

OrchestraBolero+ *1

Romantic Waltz *3

Classical Menuet *3

Green Fantasia *2, *3

Guitar Serenade *2, *3

Piano Jazz Waltz *2, *3

1 Simple Big Band *2

Simple ComboJazz *2

Simple Swing

Big Band 1

Big Band 2

Big Band 3

Big Band 4

Big Band 5

Big Band 6

Big Band 7

2 Orch Big Band 1

Orch Big Band 2

Big Band Jazz

Big Band Fast

Classic Big Band

30s Big Band

Modern Big Band

Mod BigBand Shfl

2 Big Band Bop

Movie Panther

Jungle Drum

3 Medium Jazz 1

Medium Jazz 2

Acoustic Jazz 1

Acoustic Jazz 2

Fast Jazz

Combo Swing

Cool Combo

Light Swing

InstrumentalJazz

Manhattan Swing

Jazz Club

4Bebop

Five-Four

Trad Piano Jazz

Piano Trio

Jazz Ballad 1

Jazz Ballad 2

Midnight Swing

Slow Jazz

Moonlight 1

Moonlight 2

Dreamy Ballad

5 Winter Song 1

Winter Song 2

ChristmasShuffle

ChristmasBallad+ *1

Movie Swing 1

Movie Swing 2

Guitar Swing

Afro Cuban 1

Afro Cuban 2

Afro Cuban 3

6 Foxtrot 1

Foxtrot 2

Slowfox 1

Slowfox 2

Dixieland 1

Dixieland 2

Dixieland Jazz 1

Dixieland Jazz 2 *3

Ragtime 1

Ragtime 2

Charleston

Quickstep

7 Orchestra Swing

Jazz Singers

Tap Dance Swing

*1 Cannot be selected for creating a Rhythm Pattern Program.

*2 Contains a Section with no Auto Bass part. Such a Section cannot produce the bass sound even if A.B.C. is turned on.

*3 Contains a Section with no Drum part. When playing such a Section, make sure to turn Accompaniment on.

Rhythm List

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

POPS

R&B

LATIN

7Organ Groove

Piano Swing *2, *3

Piano JazzBallad *2, *3

Piano Stride *2, *3

1 Simple 8Beat Pop *2

Simple 3/4 Pop *2

Simple Shffl Pop *2

8Beat Light 1

8Beat Light 2

8Beat Light 3

8Beat Light 4

Simple Shuffle 1

Simple Shuffle 2

Simple Shuffle 3

2 16Beat 1

16Beat 2

16Beat 3

16Beat 4

British 16Beat 1

British 16Beat 2

Guitar Pop

Classic 16Beat

16Beat Shuffle 1

16Beat Shuffle 2

Fusion Shuffle 1

Fusion Shuffle 2

3 Folk Rock 1 *2

Folk Rock 2

SingerSongWriter

Easy Pop

Chart Guitar Pop *2

60s 8Beat

80s Boy Band

Surfin' 8Beat

Heart Beat

Finger Pickin'

4Jazz Pop

Eurovision Pop

British Pop

Pop Shuffle

Kool Shuffle

Unplugged 1 *2

Unplugged 2

Unplugged 3

5 JPN Pop Shuffle

JPN Idol Hits

JPN 70s Anime + *1

JPN Soundtrack

Cute Pop

The 3rd Funk

Sunset DECA

US 70s TV Theme

UK Soul Pop

6 Asian Pops

8Beat Adria

Scand Shuffle

Sing Along

6 Jersey Pop

60s Vintage Pop

60s Chart Swing

Bubblegum Pop

Tijuana

7 70s 8Beat

70s Country Pop

70s ChartCountry *2

Country Brothers

Euro Pop Organ

Euro Fox

Euro Pop

Piano 8Beat *2, *3

1 Simple Funk *2

Simpl R&B Ballad *2

Simple R&B Shffl *2

Soul 1

Soul 2

16Beat Soul 1

16Beat Soul 2

Soul Brothers

Frankly Soul

Live Soul Band + *1

70s Chart Soul

2 Soul Swing

6/8 Soul

Amazing Gospel 1

Amazing Gospel 2

Gospel Brothers

Gospel Sisters

Hollywood Gospel

Gospel Party

New Gospel

Gospel Shuffle

3 Gospel Funk 1

Gospel Funk 2

Funk Beat 1

Funk Beat 2

Jazz Funk

Kool Funk + *1

Let's Funk

Motor City 1

Motor City 2

Detroit Pop 1

Detroit Pop 2

4 Blues Rock

Blueberry Blues+ *1

Cool Blues

Slow Blues

Blues Shuffle 1 *2

Blues Shuffle 2+ *1

6/8 Blues

Lovely Shuffle

Modern Shuffle + *1

Cool R&B

70s Scat Legend

5 Modern R&B 1

5 Modern R&B 2 + *1

Soul R&B

New R&B

Worship Medium

Worship Fast + *1

Worshp Power Bld *2

Piano Blues 1 *2, *3

Piano Blues 2 *2, *3

1 Simple BossaNova *2

Simple Samba *2

Simple Mambo *2

Simple Rumba *2

Bossa Nova 1

Bossa Nova 2

Bossa Nova 3

Bossa Nova 4

Pop Bossa 1

Pop Bossa 2

Bossa Brazil

Lounge Bossa

2Samba

Big Band Samba

Light Samba 1

Light Samba 2

Pop Samba 1

Pop Samba 2

Jazz Samba

3Mambo 1

Mambo 2

Big Band Mambo

Rumba

Pop Rumba

Fast Rumba

Rumba Flamenco

Cha Cha Cha

Big Band Cha Cha

Pop Cha Cha 1

Pop Cha Cha 2

4 Salsa 1

Salsa 2

Salsa 3

Montuno

Calypso

Guaguanco

Danzon

Guajira

Cuban Bolero

Bomba

Pop Latin *2

5 Beguine 1

Beguine 2

Tango 1

Tango 2

Tango 3

Italian Tango

Tango Orchestra

Tango Milonga

Rhythm List

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

WORLD MUSIC

BALLAD

ROCK

6 Guitar Rumba 1 *3

Guitar Rumba 2

Piano Rumba *2, *3

Piano Cha Cha *2, *3

1 Bolero

Flamenco

Pop Flamenco *2

Pasodoble

Tarantella

Sirtaki

Scand Schottis

Hawaiian

Mexican Dance *3

Enka

2 Polka 1

Polka 2

Banda Polka *3

Orchestral Polka

Zither Polka

Italian Polka

Scottish Polka

Ober Polka

Party Polka

Euro Polka

Polka Pop + *1

3 Irish Dance

Irish Hymn *2

Celtic Dance

Celtic Dance 3/4

Celtic Christmas

Scottish Reel

4 Reggae

Happy Reggae

Sheriff Reggae 1

Sheriff Reggae 2

Shuffle Reggae

Caribbean

Zouk

Hully Gully

5 Hoedown 1 *3

Hoedown 2

Bluegrass 1

Bluegrass 2

Modern Bluegrass

Country Band

Country Shuffle

Country 2/4

Pickin' Swing

6 ChinaPopBallad 1 *2

ChinaPopBallad 2

China Dance

China Trad 1

China Trad 2 *2

Kung Fu

Ethereal Voices *2, *3

1 Simple 8BtBallad *2

SimpleRockBallad *2

8Beat Ballad

Acoustic 8Bt Bld *2

8Beat Modern

16Beat Ballad 1

16Beat Ballad 2

16Beat Ballad 3

16Beat Ballad 4

2 6/8 Ballad

6/8 Slow Rock 1

6/8 Slow Rock 2

6/8 Slow Rock 3

6/8 Orchestral 1

6/8 Orchestral 2

Schlager 6/8

Moonlight 6/8

Euro Slow Rock

Acoustic Ballad

Big Rock Ballad

90s Rock Ballad

3 Power Ballad

Easy Ballad

Romantic Ballad

Love Song

Epic Ballad + *1

Dramatic Ballad *3

Animation Ballad

Secret Service

70s Cool Ballad

80s SmoothBallad

90s Cool Ballad

4 Pop Evergreen

VocalPopBallad + *1, *2

70s Pop Duo 1

70s Pop Duo 2

70s Glam Piano

Movie Ballad 1

Movie Ballad 2

80s Movie Ballad

BigScreenClassic

5 Chart Ballad

Analog Ballad

Pop Ballad

Modern PopBallad *2

New R&B Ballad

Slow&Easy 1

Slow&Easy 2

Chillout *2

Country Rock Bld

Easy Country

6 JPN Romantic Bld

JPN FolkPopDuo

JPN Dance Ballad *2

JPN R&B Ballad

JPN TVSoundtrack *2

On Broadway *2, *3

Coudy Bay + *1, *3

Night Walk + *1, *2, *3

6 Organ Ballad 1

Organ Ballad 2

7 Guitar Ballad 1

Guitar Ballad 2

Guitar Ballad 3

Pop Gtr Ballad

Piano Ballad

ClassicPianoBld *3

ElecPiano Ballad

Pop Piano Ballad *2

Piano8BeatBallad *2, *3

Piano Slow Rock *2, *3

PianoOrchBallad *3

1 Simple Rock *2

Simple Shfl Rock *2

Hard Rock 1

Hard Rock 2

Hard Rock 3 + *1

Tears Rock 1

Tears Rock 2

British Rock *2

Soft Rock

2 Power Rock

Stadium Rock + *1

Contemp Rock + *1

Standard Rock

Acoustic Rock

Brit Rock Pop + *1

German Rock

Funk Pop Rock

Chart Rock Shfl+ *1

ChartPianoShfl + *1

Beach Rock

Surf Rock

3 60s Rock 1

60s Rock 2

60s Rock 3 + *1

60s Rock 4 + *1

70s Rock + *1

80s Power Rock+ *1

80s Synth Rock+ *1

80s Pop Rock + *1

80s Guitar Pop+ *1

00s Boy Band

4 Rock Shuffle 1

Rock Shuffle 2

Rock Shuffle 3 + *1

70s RockShuffle+ *1

Rock&Roll 1

Rock&Roll 2

Rock&Roll 3 + *1

6/8 Rock

60s Rock&Roll + *1

Rock&RollShuffle *3

Jive

Skiffle

5 Boogie Woogie 1

Rhythm List

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

DANCE

METRONOME

5 Boogie Woogie 2

Swingin' Boogie

Oldies Rock&Roll

Croco Twist + *1

Southern Rock

Cowboy Rock

Scand Bugg

Country Rock 1

Country Rock 2

Country Blues

New Country *2

6 Country Straits+ *1

Country Strum

Irish Rock

60s Rising Pop *2

Alp Rock + *1

Caribbean Rock 1

Caribbean Rock 2

Disco Fox Rock + *1, *2

JPN Pop Rock 1

JPN Pop Rock 2

JPN Band Rock 1

JPN Band Rock 2

7 JPN Light Rock 1

JPN Light Rock 2

JPN Rock Duo + *1

JPN Idol Rock

JPN Kids Hero

Dragon Rock

Miracle Rock *2

Pretty Cute

Happy Pop

1 Simple DancePop+ *1, *2

Simple Disco *2

Ibiza 1

Ibiza 2

Ibiza 3 *3

Trance Pop

Euro Trance 1

Euro Trance 2 *2

6/8 Trance 1

6/8 Trance 2

2 Club Dance 1 *2

Club Dance 2 + *1, *2

Club Dance 3

Global DJ's

Dancefloor *2

Techno Party

Dream Dance

80s Dance

Club House

Swing House

Funky House

3 Dirty Pop

Mallorca Party + *1, *2

Party Arena

Apres Ski Hit

3 Disco Rock + *1, *2

Disco Fox

Mallorca Disco + *1, *2

Disco Palace

Disco Philly 1

Disco Philly 2

Disco Teens 1 *2

Disco Teens 2

4 Disco Funk 1

Disco Funk 2

Disco Chocolate

Dance Pop

US Disco

Saturday Night + *1

Disco Fever

90s Disco

70s Disco 1

70s Disco 2

70s Disco 3

5Trip Hop *2

Chart Pop 1

Chart Pop 2

Ground Beat

Synth Pop

Synth Pop Duo + *1

US Pop

UK Pop

Turkish Eurobeat *2

Oriental Pop

6 Pop Beat 1

Pop Beat 2

Funky Dance

Dancehall

Garage 1

Garage 2 + *1

Electronica + *1

Latin DJ's

Club Latin

Latin Disco 1

Latin Disco 2

7 US Hip Hop 1

US Hip Hop 2 + *1, *2

Euro Hip Hop 1

Euro Hip Hop 2 + *1

Hip Hop Pop

Hip Hop Light

Hip Hop Groove

Classic Hip Hop

Pop R&B

8 JPN Idol Pop 1 + *1

JPN Idol Pop 2

JPN Idol Pop 3

JPN Dance Pop 1

JPN Dance Pop 2

Cute Techno

Dance Police

1 Metronome 2/4 + *1, *2

Metronome 3/4 + *1, *2

Metronome 4/4 + *1, *2

Metronome 6/8 + *1, *2

Metronome 9/8 + *1, *2

Metronome 12/8 + *1, *2

Metronome 5/4 + *1, *2

Metronome 7/4 + *1, *2

Metronome 8/4 + *1, *2

2 Click 2/4 + *1, *2

Click 3/4 + *1, *2

Click 4/4 + *1, *2

Click 6/8 + *1, *2

Click 9/8 + *1, *2

Click 12/8 + *1, *2

Click 5/4 + *1, *2

Click 7/4 + *1, *2

Click 8/4 + *1, *2

3 Cowbell 2/4 + *1, *2

Cowbell 3/4 + *1, *2

Cowbell 4/4 + *1, *2

Cowbell 6/8 + *1, *2

Cowbell 9/8 + *1, *2

Cowbell 12/8 + *1, *2

Cowbell 5/4 + *1, *2

Cowbell 7/4 + *1, *2

Cowbell 8/4 + *1, *2

4 WoodBlock 2/4 + *1, *2

WoodBlock 3/4 + *1, *2

WoodBlock 4/4 + *1, *2

WoodBlock 6/8 + *1, *2

WoodBlock 9/8 + *1, *2

WoodBlock 12/8 + *1, *2

WoodBlock 5/4 + *1, *2

WoodBlock 7/4 + *1, *2

WoodBlock 8/4 + *1, *2

Accompaniment

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Accompaniment

The Accompaniment function provides arpeggiated

chords and other instrumental embellishments when

rhythms are used.

Accompaniment controls are selected from the Rhythm

Menu and Rhythm Condition display.

1 Press any one of the RHYTHM buttons

once.

At the bottom of the display, there are seven part

buttons, such as Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, and so on.

These parts, with the exception of Main Drum and

Add Drum, are Accompaniment parts.

2 Turn the desired parts on.

The Accompaniment consists of five parts, Chord 1,

Chord 2, Pad, Phrase 1, and Phrase 2, and each of

them can be set to on or off by pressing

corresponding button in the display.

If you turn all the parts off, the Accompaniment

does not sound.

CHORD 1/CHORD 2:

These are the rhythmic chord backing parts.

PAD:

This part features sustained chords and commonly

uses lush sounds such as strings and organ.

PHRASE 1/PHRASE 2:

These parts are used for various embellishments and

riffs that enhance the Song, such as brass section

accents and chord arpeggios.

Not all parts contain accompaniment data. Some

parts may be empty depending on the selected

rhythm and rhythm section.

3 Adjust the volume and amount of reverb

applied to the Accompaniment.

Pressing the same rhythm button on the panel again

calls up the Rhythm Condition display.

The two sliders at the right side of the display can

control the Accompaniment volume and reverb.

Touch the slider in the display or use the Data

Control dial to adjust the volume/reverb.

Accompaniment parts

Main Drum and Add Drum contains drum and

percussion rhythm patterns.

When you turn both Main Drum and Add Drum off,

the drum and percussion do not sound. Generally,

Main Drum contains the main part of the rhythm

and Add drum has additional percussion sounds,

such as tambourine.

Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.)

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Automatic Accompaniment

– Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.)

The Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) function works with the

Rhythm section of the Electone to automatically produce

bass accompaniment as you play. It adds an entirely new

dimension to your performance by effectively putting a

full backing band at your disposal. One of three different

modes (Single Finger, Fingered Chord, Custom A.B.C.) is

used for producing Automatic Accompaniment patterns.

Before using the A.B.C. function, turn Pedal Poly off. If

Pedal Poly is set to on, the bass pattern of the A.B.C. will

not sound.

Reference page

• POLY (page 42)

To set the A.B.C. function:

Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button.

The A.B.C./M.O.C. display appears. The A.B.C. section is

at the left half of this display.

A.B.C. MODE

OFF:

Cancels the Auto Bass Chord function.

SINGLE FINGER:

The Single Finger mode provides the fastest and

easiest means to obtain many different chord/bass

combinations. You can produce major, minor, 7th,

and minor 7th chords by simply using one, or at

most, two or three fingers to play the chords. The

chord produced will sound in the same octave

regardless of where it is played on the Lower

keyboard.

Key of C

Major chords:

Press the root of the chord (the note

that corresponds to the chord’s name).

Minor chords:

Simultaneously press the root and any

one black key to the left of it.

7th chords:

Simultaneously press the root and any

one white key to the left of it.

Minor 7th chords:

Simultaneously press the root as well

as any black key and any white key to

the left of it.

Playing single finger chords without the use of the

rhythm lets you add full continuous chords to your

performance.

FINGERED CHORD:

The Fingered Chord mode automatically produces

bass accompaniment for chords played in the Lower

keyboard. It allows you to use a wider range of chord

types than in the Single Finger mode. In the

Fingered Chord mode, you play full chords while the

Auto Bass Chord function automatically selects the

appropriate bass pattern. If you play only one or two

notes in the Lower keyboard, the appropriate chord

will sound based on the previously played chord.

A.B.C./M.O.C. display

Cm7

Melody On Chord (M.O.C.)

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Key of C

NOTE

When playing certain chords (aug, dim7, sus4, 6, and m6),

make sure to play the root of the chord as the lowest note

in that chord.

Playing fingered chords without the use of the

rhythm lets you add full continuous chords to your

performance.

CUSTOM A.B.C.:

The Custom A.B.C. mode is a slight variation on the

Fingered Chord mode. It allows you to determine

what bass notes will be played in the

accompaniment by playing a note on the Pedalboard

along with the chords you play in the Lower

keyboard.

MEMORY

LOWER:

When this is set to on, the Lower keyboard Voices

and chord accompaniment keep playing even after

you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard,

while the rhythm plays.

PEDAL:

When this is set to on, the Pedalboard Voices and

bass accompaniment keep playing even after you

release your foot from the Pedalboard, while the

rhythm plays.

(In the Single Finger and Fingered modes:) When

this is set to on, the bass accompaniment of the

Pedalboard Voices keeps playing even after you

release your fingers from the Lower keyboard.

When you start the rhythm with [SYNCHRO START]

button, set the Lower/Pedal Memory to on. When

Memory is off, releasing your fingers from the Lower

keyboard stops the rhythm.

Melody On Chord (M.O.C.)

The Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) feature automatically

adds a harmony part to the melodies you play on the

Upper keyboard. The harmony is derived from the

chords you play on the Lower keyboard — or from the

chords that are played for you, if you use Automatic

Accompaniment. Melody On Chord has three different

modes, each providing a different set of harmonics to

accompany the melody played. Melody On Chord can

also be controlled with the Foot Pedal (sold separately).

To set the M.O.C. function:

Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button.

The A.B.C./M.O.C. display appears. The M.O.C. section

is at the right half of this display.

M.O.C. MODE

OFF:

Cancels the Melody On Chord function.

Mode 1:

Produces harmonies of up to two notes in a range

close to the melody played.

C Cm C7

Cm7 Cmaj7

Caug

Cm maj7

Cdim Cdim7

Csus4

Cm7-5C7sus4

C6 Cm6 Cadd9

A.B.C./M.O.C. display

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Mode 2:

Produces harmonies of up to three notes in a range

close to the melody played.

Mode 3:

Produces harmonies of up to four notes in a range

relatively distant from the melody played.

F.PEDAL

On/off switch for Foot Pedal control over Melody On

Chord operation. To use the Melody On Chord function

with Foot Pedal control, first switch the Foot Pedal

setting to ON, then select one of the three modes

(described above). When the control is on, pressing the

Foot Pedal activates the Melody On Chord function.

Reference page

• Controlling Melody On Chord (with Foot Pedal); (page 177)

Melody On Chord can be heard only when the Upper

Keyboard Voice section’s volume is set to the appropriate

value. Melody On Chord does not apply to the Lead

Voic es .

Keyboard Percussion

The Keyboard Percussion function features many types of

drum and percussion sounds, playable from the

keyboards and Pedalboard.

Keyboard Percussion has two different modes, Preset and

User. Preset Keyboard Percussion lets you play the preset

drum kit sounds from the keyboards (assigned

beforehand to the keys), while the User Keyboard

Percussion lets you freely assign the drum sounds to any

key or pedal you wish.

1 Turn off the Upper, Lower and/or Pedal

Voices by setting each Voice’s volume

to MIN.

NOTE

In the Voice Display, each Voice section can be muted

(page 16).

2 Turn on the Keyboard Percussion

function by pressing the KEYBOARD

PERCUSSION [1] or [2] button.

The Keyboard Percussion (K.B.P.) display appears.

Pressing the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button

calls up the Preset 1 kit on the Upper/Lower

keyboards, and pressing the [2] button calls up the

Preset 2 kit on the Pedalboard.

NOTE

Two Keyboard Percussion sets, [1] and [2], can be played

at the same time by setting both buttons to on.

Using the Preset Keyboard

Percussion

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

3 Press the [ASSIGN] button at the top

right in the display to call up the

ASSIGN Page.

4 Press the [KIT CHANGE] button at the

center of the display to call up the

Keyboard Percussion Kit List.

Press the kit name you want to use from the 38

Keyboard Percussion types. For details of percussion

assignments for each kit, see the Preset Keyboard

Percussion List on page 68.

5 Adjust the volume and amount of reverb

applied to the Keyboard Percussion.

Two sliders in the K.B.P. display determine the

reverb and volume settings. To adjust the volume

and amount of reverb, touch the slider in the display

or use the Data Control dial.

The settings here determine the reverb/volume for

the entire Keyboard Percussion setup, not for each

percussion instrument. You can, however, adjust

each percussion instrument’s reverb/volume

(page 81).

6 Play some notes on the keyboards and/

or Pedalboard.

The message “Are you sure you want to reset the

setup data to the default values?” appears when you

change the kit. Select [OK] to clear detailed settings

(made in the SETUP Page) and call up the selected kit

on the panel. Select [CANCEL] to call up the selected

kit without erasing the detailed settings.

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

: Indicates the keys of the Electone keyboard.

* Standard Kit 2, Hit Kit, Room Kit, Rock Kit, Electro Kit, Analog Kit, Dance Kit, Jazz Kit, Brush Kit, Symphony Kit, Live!Studio Kit,

Live!Power Kit 1, Live!Power Kit 2 and Live!Rock Kit have the same sound assignments as Standard Kit 1.

Preset Keyboard Percussion List

EL Kit Standard Kit 1*

Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)

- Bass Drum Heavy - Kick

- SD Brush Roll Surdo Mute Side Stick

- Snare Drum Heavy Surdo Open Snare

Claves SD Brush Shot 1 Hi Q Hand Clap

- SD Reverb 1 Whip Slap Snare Tight

- Snare Drum Light Scratch H Floor Tom L

Synth Tom 3 To m 3 Scratch L Hi-Hat Closed

Concert BD Snare Drum Rim 1 Finger Snap Floor Tom H

Synth Tom 2 To m 2 Click Noise Hi-Hat Pedal

Bass Drum Heavy Hi-Hat Closed Metronome Click Low Tom

Synth Tom 1 To m 1 Metronome Bell Hi-Hat Open

Bass Drum Light Hi-Hat Open Seq Click L Mid Tom L

- Snare Drum Heavy Ride Cymbal 1 - Seq Click H Mid Tom H

- SD Brush Roll Synth Tom 3 - Brush Tap Crash Cymbal 1

- Snare Drum Heavy Crash Cymbal 1 - Brush Swirl High Tom

- SD Brush Shot 1 Synth Tom 2 - Brush Slap Ride Cymbal 1

- SD Reverb 1 Orchestra Cymbal - Brush Tap Swirl Chinese Cymbal

- Snare Drum Light - - Snare Roll Ride Cymbal Cup

- To m 3 Synth Tom 1 - Castanet Tambourine

- Snare Drum Rim 1 - - Snare Soft Splash Cymbal

- To m 2 - Sticks

- Hi-Hat Closed - Kick Soft

- To m 1 - Open Rim Shot

- Hi-Hat Open - Kick Tight

- Ride Cymbal 1 Bongo H Kick

- Orch Snare Drum Bongo L Side Stick

- Crash Cymbal 1 Conga H Mute Snare

- Snare Drum Roll Conga H Open Hand Clap

- Orchestra Cymbal Conga L Snare Tight

- Orch Cymbal Roll Timbale H Floor Tom L

- Triangle Mute Timbale L Hi-Hat Closed

- Tambourine Agogo H Floor Tom H

- Triangle Open Agogo L Hi-Hat Pedal

- Castanet Cabasa Low Tom

- Cowbell 1 Maracas Hi-Hat Open

- Timbale 1 Low Samba Whistle H Mid Tom L

- Timbale 1 High Samba Whistle L Mid Tom H

- Wood Block Low Guiro Short Crash Cymbal 1

- Conga Low Guiro Long High Tom

- Wood Block High Claves Ride Cymbal 1

- Conga High Wood Block H Chinese Cymbal

- Bongo Low Wood Block L Ride Cymbal Cup

- Agogo Low Cuica Mute Tam b ou ri n e

- Bongo High Cuica Open Splash Cymbal

- Agogo High Triangle Mute Cowbell

- Cuica Low Triangle Open Crash Cymbal 2

- Hand Claps Shaker Vibraslap

- Cuica High Jingle Bells Ride Cymbal 2

- Shaker Bell Tree -

- -

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Live!AcousticKit Live!Real Drums

Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)

- Kick Open Aco - Kick Real 2

Surdo Mute Stick Acoustic Surdo Mute Stick Real

Surdo Open Snare Acoustic Surdo Open Snare Real 1

Hi Q Hand Clap Power Hi Q Clap Power

Whip Slap Snare Rough Aco Whip Slap Snare Real 2

Scratch H Tom Acoustic 1 Scratch H To m R e al 1

Scratch L Hi-HatClosedAco Scratch L Hi-HatClosedReal

Finger Snap Tom Acoustic 2 Finger Snap To m R e al 2

Click Noise Hi-HatPedal Aco Click Noise Hi-Hat PedalReal

Metronome Click Tom Acoustic 3 Metronome Click To m Re al 3

Metronome Bell Hi-Hat Open Aco Metronome Bell Hi-Hat Open Real

Seq Click L Tom Acoustic 4 Seq Click L Tom R ea l 4

- Seq Click H Tom Acoustic 5 - Seq Click H Tom R e al 5

- Brush Tap CrashCymbalAco 1 - Brush Tap CrashCymbalReal1

- Brush Swirl Tom Acoustic 6 - Brush Tap Swirl To m R e al 6

- Brush Slap RideCymbal Aco 1 - Brush Slap RideCymbalReal 1

- Brush Tap Swirl China Cymbal Aco - Brush Tap Swirl ChinaCymbal Real

- Snare Roll Aco RideCymbalCupAco - Snare Roll Rock RideCym Cup Real

- Castanet Tambourine - Castanet Tambourine

- Snare Soft Aco SplashCymbal Aco - Snare Tight SplashCymbalReal

- Sticks - Sticks

- Kick Soft Aco - Kick Genuine

- Rim Acoustic - Rim Real

- Kick Mute Aco - Kick Real 1

Bongo H Kick Open Aco Bongo H Kick Real 2

Bongo L Stick Acoustic Bongo L Stick Real

Conga H Mute Snare Acoustic Conga H Mute Snare Real 1

Conga H Open Hand Clap Power Conga H Open Clap Power

Conga L Snare Rough Aco Conga L Snare Real 2

Timbale H Tom Acoustic 1 Timbale H Tom R e a l 1

Timbale L Hi-HatClosedAco Timbale L Hi-HatClosedReal

Agogo H Tom Acoustic 2 Agogo H Tom R e a l 2

Agogo L Hi-HatPedal Aco Agogo L Hi-Hat PedalReal

Cabasa Tom Acoustic 3 Cabasa To m R e al 3

Maracas Hi-Hat Open Aco Maracas Hi-Hat Open Real

Samba Whistle H Tom Acoustic 4 Samba Whistle H To m R e al 4

Samba Whistle L Tom Acoustic 5 Samba Whistle L To m Re al 5

Guiro Short CrashCymbalAco 1 Guiro Short CrashCymbalReal1

Guiro Long Tom Acoustic 6 Guiro Long Tom R e a l 6

Claves RideCymbal Aco 1 Claves RideCymbalReal 1

Wood Block H China Cymbal Aco Wood Block H ChinaCymbal Real

Wood Block L RideCymbalCupAco Wood Block L RideCym Cup Real

Cuica Mute Tambourine Cuica Mute Ta mb ou ri ne

Cuica Open SplashCymbal Aco Cuica Open SplashCymbalReal

Tri angle M u t e Cowbell Triangle Mute Cowbell

Triangle Open CrashCymbalAco 2 Triangle Open CrashCymbalReal2

Shaker Vibraslap Shaker Vibraslap

Jingle Bells RideCymbal Aco 2 Jingle Bells RideCymbalReal 2

Wind Chime - Wind Chime -

- -

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Live!RealBrushes Analog T8 Kit

Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)

- KickJazzAmbience - Kick T8 1

Surdo Mute Stick Brush Surdo Mute Snare T8 Rim

Surdo Open Vintage Slap 4 Surdo Open Snare T8 2

Hi Q Clap Power Hi Q Clap T9

Whip Slap Vintage Slap 5 Whip Slap Snare T8 1

Scratch H TomRealBrushes 1 Scratch H Tom T8 1

Scratch L Hi-Hat Closed RB Scratch L Hi-Hat Closed T8

Finger Snap TomRealBrushes 2 Snare Hammer Tom T8 2

Click Noise Hi-Hat Pedal RB Kick Zap Hard Hi-Hat Pedal T8

Metronome Click TomRealBrushes 3 Snare Garg L Tom T8 3

Metronome Bell Hi-Hat Open RB Kick Tek Power Hi-Hat Open T8

Vintage Tip TomRealBrushes 4 Kick Slimy Tom T8 4

- Vintage Swirl 1 TomRealBrushes 5 - Kick T8 4 Tom T8 6

- Vintage Slap 1 CrashCymbal RB 1 - Snare Analog CR Crash Cymbal T8

- Vintage Swirl 2 TomRealBrushes 6 - Snare T8 7 Tom T8 7

- Vintage Slap 2 Ride Cymbal RB - SnareClap Analog Ride Cymbal T9

- Vintage TapSwirl ChinaCymbal RB - Snare T8 6 China Cymbal 2

- VintageSlapSwirl Ride Cup RB 1 - To m T 8 5 RideCymbal Cup 2

- Vintage Swirl 3 Tambourine - Snare T8 5 Tambourine RX5

- Vintage Slap 3 Splash Cymbal RB - Kick T8 3 Splash Cymbal

- Sticks - Snare T8 4

- Kick Soft L - Kick T8 2

- Open Rim Shot RB - Snare T8 3

- Kick Soft H - T8 Kick Bass

Bongo H KickJazzAmbience Conga T8 5 Kick T8 1

Bongo L Stick Brush Conga T8 4 Snare T8 Rim

Conga H Mute Vintage Slap 4 Conga T8 3 Snare T8 2

Conga H Open Clap Power Conga T8 2 Clap T9

Conga L Vintage Slap 5 Conga T8 1 Snare T8 1

Timbale H TomRealBrushes 1 Timbale H Tom T 8 1

Timbale L Hi-Hat Closed RB Timbale L Hi-Hat Closed T8

Agogo H TomRealBrushes 2 Glass H To m T 8 2

Agogo L Hi-Hat Pedal RB Glass L Hi-Hat Pedal T8

Cabasa TomRealBrushes 3 Cabasa Tom T 8 3

Maracas Hi-Hat Open RB Maracas T8 Hi-Hat Open T8

Samba Whistle H TomRealBrushes 4 Fx Gun 2 Tom T 8 4

Samba Whistle L TomRealBrushes 5 Fx Gun 1 Tom T 8 6

Guiro Short CrashCymbal RB 1 Analog Shaker H Crash Cymbal T8

Guiro Long TomRealBrushes 6 Analog Shaker L To m T 8 7

Claves Ride Cymbal RB Claves T8 Ride Cymbal T9

Wood Block H ChinaCymbal RB Hi Q 1 China Cymbal 2

Wood Block L Ride Cup RB 1 Hi Q 2 RideCymbal Cup 2

Cuica Mute Tambourine Scratch H 2 Tambourine RX5

Cuica Open Splash Cymbal RB Scratch L 2 Splash Cymbal

Tri angle M u t e Cowbell Triangle Mute Cowbell T8

Triangle Open CrashCymbal RB 2 Triangle Open Crash Cymbal 4

Shaker Vibraslap Analog Shaker Vibraslap

Jingle Bells Ride Cup RB 2 Sleigh Bells Ride Cymbal 3

Wind Chime - Wind Chime -

- Snare Hip 1

- Snare Hip 2

- Snare Hip Gate

- Snare Break 1

- Kick Blip

- Snare Fx 1

- Kick Fx Hammer

- -

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Analog T9 Kit House Kit

Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)

- Kick T9 3 - Kick T9 5

Surdo Mute Snare T9 Rim W Kick Snare T9 Rim

Surdo Open Snare T9 1 Disco Fx Snare T9 1

Hi Q Clap T9 WhiteNoiseDown 1 Clap T9

Whip Slap Snare T9 2 PinkNoise Down 1 Snare T9 2

Scratch H To m T 9 1 WhiteNoiseDown 2 Tom T9 1

Scratch L Hi-Hat Closed T9 PinkNoise Down 2 Hi-Hat Closed T8

Snare Drum&Bass1 Tom T 9 2 White Noise Up 2 Tom T9 2

Kick Break 2 Hi-Hat Pedal T9 White Noise Up 1 Hi-Hat Pedal T9

Snare Distortion To m T 9 3 Pink Noise Up Tom T9 3

Kick Tek Power Hi-Hat Open T9 WhiteNoiseUp Rel Hi-Hat Open T9

KickDistortionRM Tom T 9 4 PinkNoise Up Rel Tom T9 4

- Kick T9 2 To m T 9 5 - Kick T9 4 Tom T9 5

- Snare Analog CR Crash Cymbal T9 - Snare T8 Rim Crash Cymbal T9

- Snare T9 5 To m T 9 6 - Snare T8 5 Tom T9 6

- Clap Analog Sm Ride Cymbal T9 - Hand Clap Ride Cymbal T9

- Snare T9 Gate 1 China Cymbal 2 - Snare Garg L Crash Cymbal 4

- Snare Rock Roll RideCymbal Cup 2 - Snare Roll RideCymbal Cup 2

- Snare T9 3 Tambourine RX5 - Snare T9 3 Tambourine Hit

- Snare T9 4 Splash Cymbal 2 - Snare T8 1 Splash Cymbal 2

- Snare T9 Gate 2 - Snare T9 5

- Kick T9 4 - Kick T9 1

- Snare T9 6 - Snare T9 Gate

- Kick T9 1 - Kick T9 2

Conga T8 5 Kick T9 3 Bongo H Open 1 F Kick T9 5

Conga T8 4 Snare T9 Rim Bongo L Open 3 F Snare T9 Rim

Conga Tip Snare T9 1 Conga H Tip Snare T9 1

Conga Open Slap Clap T9 Conga H SlapOpen Clap T9

Conga Open Snare T9 2 Conga H Open 2 Snare T9 2

Timbale H To m T 9 1 Timbale H To m T 9 1

Timbale L Hi-Hat Closed T9 Timbale L Hi-Hat Closed T8

Analog Click To m T9 2 Agogo H To m T9 2

Conga T8 1 Hi-Hat Pedal T9 Agogo L Hi-Hat Pedal T9

Cabasa To m T 9 3 Cabasa Tom T9 3

Maracas Slur 2 Hi-Hat Open T9 Maracas Slur 2 Hi-Hat Open T9

Fx Gun 2 To m T 9 4 Vox Drum L Tom T 9 4

Fx Gun 1 To m T 9 5 Vox Drum H Tom T 9 5

Scratch H 3 Crash Cymbal T9 Guiro Short Crash Cymbal T9

Scratch Down Tom T9 6 Guiro Long Tom T9 6

Hi Q 3 Ride Cymbal T9 Claves Ride Cymbal T9

Hi Q 1 China Cymbal 2 Wood Block H Crash Cymbal 4

Hi Q 2 RideCymbal Cup 2 Wood Block L RideCymbal Cup 2

Scratch H 2 Tambourine RX5 Cuica H Tambourine Hit

Scratch L 2 Splash Cymbal 2 Cuica L Splash Cymbal 2

Tri angle M u t e Cowbell 1 Triangle Mute Cowbell 1

Triangle Open Crash Cymbal 4 Triangle Open Crash Cymbal 1

Analog Shaker Cowbell T8 Analog Shaker Cowbell T8

Sleigh Bells Ride Cymbal 3 Sleigh Bells Ride Cymbal 3

Wind Chime - Wind Chime -

Snare Piccolo Snare Break Roll

Snare T8 7 Noise Burst

SnareRckRollDist Vox Bell

Snare Brush Mute Snare R&B 1

Kick Blip Hard Vox Alk

Snare Jungle 1 Udu High

Kick Sustain Filter Kick

- -

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

HipHop Kit Drum Machine

Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)

- Kick Analog CR - Kick T9 4

Surdo Mute SnareAnalogSmRim Surdo Mute Snare T9 Rim

Surdo Open Snare HipHop 1 Surdo Open Snare T9 1

Hi Q Snare Clappy Hi Q Clap T9

Whip Slap Snare HipHop 2 Whip Slap Snare T9 4

Scratch H Floor Tom L Scratch H Tom T9 1

Scratch L Hi-HatClosed Hip Scratch L Hi-Hat Closed T9

Hi-HatClosedT8 2 Low Tom Snare Drum&Bass1 Tom T9 2

To m T 8 3 Hi-Hat Pedal Hip Kick Break 2 Hi-Hat Pedal T9

Hi-Hat Open T8 2 Mid Tom L Snare Distortion Tom T9 3

To m T 8 6 Hi-Hat Open Hip Kick Tek Power Hi-Hat Open T9

Crash T8 High Tom KickDistortionRM Tom T9 4

- Triangle Mute Ride Cymbal 3 - BassDrumHardLong Tom T9 5

- Triangle Open Crash Cymbal 3 - BassDrumTekPower Crash Cymbal T9

- Wind Chime Shaker 2 - Bass Drum Dist 5 Conga T8 1

- TambourineLight2 ScratchBDForward - Bass Drum Dist 3 Ride Cymbal T9

- TambourineLight1 ScratchBDReverse - Bass Drum Dist 1 Conga T8 2

- Kick HipHop 9 Kick HipHop 2 - BD Drum & Bass 1 Analog Click

- Hi-HatClosed Tek SnareHipHopRim 2 - Bass Drum Blip Claves T8 1

- Kick Gate HipHop Clap 2 - BassDrumAnalogSm Maracas T8

- Hi-HatOpen Lo-Fi - Kick T8 2

- KickGranCasaOpen - Kick T8 3

- Hi-HatReverseD&B - Kick T9 HD 3

- Kick HipHop 1 - Kick T9 2

Kick HipHop 3 Kick Analog CR Snare T8 1 Kick T9 4

SnareHipHopRim 3 SnareAnalogSmRim Snare T8 2 Snare T9 Rim

Snare HipHop 5 Snare HipHop 1 Snare T8 3 Snare T9 1

Electric Clap 1 Snare Clappy Snare Analog CR Clap T9

Handbell H Snare HipHop 2 Snare Jungle 1 Snare T9 4

Kick HipHop 4 Floor Tom L Snare Drum&Bass2 Tom T 9 1

HipHop Clap 3 Hi-HatClosed Hip Snare Hip 1 Hi-Hat Closed T9

HipHop Snap 2 Low Tom Snare R&B 1 Tom T 9 2

SnareHipHopRim 5 Hi-Hat Pedal Hip Snare R&B 2 Hi-Hat Pedal T9

HipHop flex 1 Mid Tom L Snare Hip 1 Tom T 9 3

HipHop flex 2 Hi-Hat Open Hip Snare Wood Hi-Hat Open T9

Shaker 2 High Tom Snare Timbre To m T9 4

Kick HipHop 5 Ride Cymbal 3 Hi-HatClosedT8 1 Tom T 9 5

SnareHipHopRim 4 Crash Cymbal 3 Hi-Hat Open T8 1 Crash Cymbal T9

Snare HipHop 6 Shaker 2 Hi-HatClosedT8 2 Conga T8 1

Snare HipHop 11 ScratchBDForward Hi-Hat Open T8 2 Ride Cymbal T9

Kick HipHop 10 ScratchBDReverse Hi-Hat Pedal Aco Conga T8 2

Snare HipHop 7 Kick HipHop 2 Hi-HatClosed Aco Analog Click

HipHop Clap 5 SnareHipHopRim 2 Hi-Hat Open Aco Claves T8 1

Conga H Tip HipHop Clap 2 Hi-HatClosedLoFi Maracas T8

Conga H Heel HipHop Snap 1 Hi-HatOpen Lo-Fi TambourineAna CR

Conga H Open Snare HipHop 3 Hi-HatClosed Syn Analog Shaker

Conga L Open 1 Electric Clap 2 Hi-Hat Open Syn Cowbell T8

Conga L Open 2 Kick Hip Deep Analog Shaker 1 CowbellAnalog CR

Kick HipHop 8 - Tambourine RX5 2 -

HipHop Clap 6 Tambourine 1 Hit

Snare T8 1 Electric Cowbell

Snare T8 1 H Conga T8 3

HipHop Clap 7 ElectricTriangle

To m T 8 1 Claves T8 2

Hi-HatClosedT8 2 Analog Shaker 2

To m T 8 2 Electric Clap 1

- -

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Break Kit SFX Kit 1/Live! SFX Kit 1

Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)

- Kick Break 1 - Cutting Noise 1

Surdo Mute Snare Hip Rim 1 - Cutting Noise 2

Surdo Open Snare Break 3 - -

Hi Q Snare Break 1 - String Slap

Whip Slap Snare Break 2 - -

Scratch H Tom Break 1 - -

Scratch L HHClosedRockSoft - -

Finger Snap Tom Break 2 - -

Snare Break 8 Hi-Hat PedalRock - -

Snare Break 9 Tom Break 3 - -

Hi-HatClosedBrk1 HH HalfOpen Rock - -

Hi-HatClosedBrk2 Tom Break 4 - -

- Kick Break Deep Tom Break 5 - - -

- Snare Hip Crash Cymbal 1 - - -

- Snare Lo-Fi Tom Break 6 - - -

- Snare Clappy Ride Cymbal 3 - - -

- Snare LdwH Mono China Cymbal 2 - - Flute Key Click

- Snare Rock Roll RideCymbal Cup 2 - - -

- Snare Gate 1 Tambourine 1 Hit - - -

- Snare Mid Splash Cymbal 2 - - -

- Snare Break Rim - -

- Kick Break Heavy - -

- Snare Hip Rim 4 - -

- Kick Break 2 - -

Bongo H Kick Break 1 - Cutting Noise 1

Bongo L Snare Hip Rim 1 - Cutting Noise 2

Conga H Tip Snare Break 3 - -

Conga H OpenSlap Snare Break 1 - String Slap

Conga H Open Snare Break 2 - -

Bongo 2 H Tom Break 1 - -

Bongo 2 L HHClosedRockSoft - -

Conga Open Tom Break 2 - -

Agogo L Hi-Hat PedalRock Shower -

Cabasa Tom Break 3 Thunder -

Maracas Slur HH HalfOpen Rock Wind -

Timbale H Tom Break 4 Stream -

Timbale L Tom Break 5 Bubble -

Scratch H 3 Crash Cymbal 1 Feed -

Scratch Down Tom Break 6 - -

Claves Ride Cymbal 3 - -

Wood Block H China Cymbal 2 - Flute Key Click

Wood Block L RideCymbal Cup 2 - -

Scratch H 2 Tambourine 1 Hit - -

Scratch L 2 Splash Cymbal 2 - -

Tri angle M u t e Cowbell 1 - -

Triangle Open Crash Cymbal 2 - -

Kick Break 3 Cowbell RX11 - -

Kick Break 4 Ride Cymbal 2 - -

Kick Break 5 - Dog -

Kick Break 6 Horse

Kick Break 7 Bird Tweet

Hi-HatClosedBrk3 -

Snare Break 4 -

Snare Break 5 -

Snare Break 6 Ghost

Snare Break 7 Maou

- -

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

SFX Kit 2/Live! SFX Kit 2 Noise Kit

Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)

- Phone Call - White Noise

- Door Squeak - Pink Noise

- Door Slam - WhiteNoiseDown 1

- Scratch Cut - PinkNoise Down 1

- Scratch Split - WhiteNoiseDown 2

- Wind Chime - PinkNoise Down 2

- Telephone Ring - White Noise Up 2

- - - White Noise Up 1

- - - Pink Noise Up

- - - WhiteNoiseUp Rel

- - - PinkNoise Up Rel

- - - WhiteNoiseUp LFO

- - - - - PinkNoise Up LFO

- - - - - -

- - CarEngn Ignition - - -

- - Car Tires Squeal - - -

- - Car Passing - - -

- - Car Crash - - -

- - - -

Burst Phone Call - White Noise

Roller Coaster Door Squeak - Pink Noise

Submarine Door Slam - WhiteNoiseDown 1

- Scratch Cut - PinkNoise Down 1

- Scratch Split - WhiteNoiseDown 2

- Wind Chime - PinkNoise Down 2

- Telephone Ring - White Noise Up 2

- - - White Noise Up 1

Laugh - - Pink Noise Up

Scream - - WhiteNoiseUp Rel

Punch - - PinkNoise Up Rel

Heart Beat - - WhiteNoiseUp LFO

Foot Steps - - PinkNoise Up LFO

- - - -

- CarEngn Ignition - -

- Car Tires Squeal - -

- Car Passing - -

- Car Crash - -

- Siren - -

- Tr a in - -

- Jet Plane - -

- Starship - -

Machine Gun - - -

Laser Gun -

Explosion -

Firework -

- -

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

VocalEffectsKit GospelAdLibs

Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)

- Male Ha 1 - -

- Female Ha 1 - -

- Male Ha 2 - -

- Male Ha 3 - -

- Male Bh 1 - -

- Female Bh 1 - -

- Male Kh 1 - -

- Female Kh 1 - -

- Male Ph 1 - -

- Female Ph 1 - -

- Male Th 1 - -

- Female Th 1 - -

- - Male Bh 2 - - C'mon

- - Female Bh 2 - - Hoo!

- - Male Kh 2 - - Aha!

- - Female Kh 2 - - Oh Yeah

- - Male Ph 2 - - Yayayayayah

- - Female Ph 2 - - Put Your Hands…

- - Male Th 2 - - C'mon Now

- - Female Th 2 - - Heeey

- - - -

Male Bh 3 Male Ha 1 Uhh Yeah -

Female Bh 3 Female Ha 1 Aaoh -

Male Kh 3 Male Ha 2 Come On! -

Female Kh 3 Male Ha 3 Yeah! -

Male Ph 3 Male Bh 1 Alright Now! -

Female Ph 3 Female Bh 1 One -

Male Th 3 Male Kh 1 Two -

Female Th 3 Female Kh 1 Three -

Male Bh 4 Male Ph 1 Four -

Female Bh 4 Female Ph 1 One! -

Male Kh 4 Male Th 1 Two! -

Female Kh 4 Female Th 1 Three! -

Male Ph 4 Male Bh 2 Four! C'mon

Female Ph 4 Female Bh 2 Five! Hoo!

Male Th 4 Male Kh 2 Six! Aha!

Female Th 4 Female Kh 2 Seven! Oh Yeah

- Male Ph 2 Eight! Yayayayayah

- Female Ph 2 Clap! Put Your Hands…

- Male Th 2 Gospel Clap 1 C'mon Now

- Female Th 2 Gospel Clap 2 Heeey

- Male Ha 4 - Everybody Now

- Female Ha 2 - ClapYourHands…

- Male Ha 5 - WithAllYourSoul

- Male Ha 6 - Stand Up On…

- - - -

- -

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Wonderland Kit PopLatin Kit

Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)

Laser Beam Thunder - Bongo H Open 1 f

Laser Shot Horse Cajon Low Bongo H Open 3 f

Water Phone Bass Drum Cajon Slap Bongo H Rim

Bubble Footstep Cajon Tip Bongo H Tip

Puddle Snare Claves High Bongo H Heel

Thunder Snare Roll Claves Low Bongo H Slap

Shower Footstep Hand Clap Bongo L Open 1 f

Beach Lion - Bongo L Open 3 f

Stream Footstep Finger Snap Bongo L Rim

Footstep Oxen Castanet Bongo L Tip

Door Squeak Footstep Conga H Tip Bongo L Heel

Door Slam Door Slam Conga H Heel Bongo L Slap

Bass Drum Bass Drum Big Clock - Conga H Open Timbale L

Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Footstep - Conga H Mute -

To m 2 To m 2 Starship - Conga H SlapOpen -

To m 1 To m 1 Footstep - Conga H Slap -

Snare Snare Tr ain - Conga H SlapMute -

Snare Roll Snare Roll Car Crash - Conga L Tip Paila L

Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Footstep - Conga L Heel Timbale H

Cymbal Cymbal Puddle - Conga L Open -

Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open - Conga L Mute

Ta m bo ur ine Tambourine - Conga L SlapOpen

Finger Snap Finger Snap - Conga L Slap

Castanet Castanet - Conga L Slide

Tri angle M u t e Triangle Mute Cowbell Top Bongo H Open 1 f

Wood Block L Wood Block L Cowbell 1 Bongo H Open 3 f

Triangle Open Triangle Open Cowbell 2 Bongo H Rim

Wood Block H Wood Block H Cowbell 3 Bongo H Tip

Hand Clap Hand Clap Guiro Short Bongo H Heel

Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Guiro Long Bongo H Slap

Bell Tree Bell Tree Metal Guiro Short Bongo L Open 1 f

Alarm Bell Alarm Bell Metal Guiro Long Bongo L Open 3 f

Train Tr a in Tambourine Bongo L Rim

Horn 1 Horn 1 Tambourim Open Bongo L Tip

Horn 2 Horn 2 Tambourim Mute Bongo L Heel

Siren Siren Tambourim Tip Bongo L Slap

CarEngn Ignition CarEngn Ignition Maracas Timbale L

Car Crash Car Crash Shaker -

Helicopter Helicopter Cabasa -

Starship Starship Cuica Mute -

Sheep Sheep Cuica Open -

Goat Goat Cowbell High 1 Paila L

Oxen Oxen Cowbell High 2 Timbale H

Whinny Whinny Shekere -

Horse Horse Shekere Tone -

Lion Lion Triangle Mute -

Dog Dog Triangle Open -

Cat Cat - Paila H

Hen Hen Wind Chime -

Owl -

Insects -

Frog -

Twe e t 1 -

Twe e t 2 -

Cuckoo Clock -

Big Clock -

Bell -

Telephone -

Camera -

Gnaw -

Applause -

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Arabic Kit Turkish Kit

Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)

- Kick Soft - Tef Dum Mute

- Side Stick Asma Davul L Tef C ym b a l

- Snare Soft Asma Davul R Tef Cymbal Mute

- Arabic Hand Clap Asma Davul Side Tef Tremolo

- Snare Drum Asma Davul Both Tef S hak e 1

- Floor Tom L KoltukDavul Flam Tef S ha k e 2

- Hi-Hat Closed KoltukDavul Teke Tef Tek Flam

- Floor Tom H Koltuk Davul Tek Tef Full Open

- Hi-Hat Pedal Koltuk Davul Dum Tef Teke OpShort

- Low Tom Bendir Teke Flam Tef Tek Op Short

- Hi-Hat Open Bendir Teke Dead Tef Tek Open

- Mid Tom L Bendir Tek Dead Te f Du m Op en

- Nakarazan Dom Mid Tom H - Bendir Teke Hollo FingerDead

- Cabasa Crash Cymbal 1 - Bendir Tek Hollo Slap

- Nakarazan Edge High Tom - Bendir Slap Hollo Dum

- Hager Dom Ride Cymbal 1 - Bendir Dum Kasik

- Hager Edge Crash Cymbal 2 - Zil Right Close Kasik Flam

- Bongo H Duhulla Dom - Zil Right Open BDarbuka TekDead

- Bongo L Tambourine - Zil Left Close BDarbuka TekFlam

- Conga H Mute Duhulla Tak - Zil Left Open BassDarbuka Teke

- Conga H Open - Tef Teke Flam

- Conga L - Tef Tek Mute

- Zagrouda H - Tef Teke Damped

- Zagrouda L - TefTekMuteMedium

Katem Dom Kick Soft BassDarbukaSlap2 Tef Dum Mute

Katem Tak Side Stick Bass Darbuka Dum Tef C ymb al

Katem Sak Snare Soft DarbukaRollClose Tef Cymbal Mute

Katem Tak Arabic Hand Clap Darbuka RollOpen Tef Trem o lo

Doff Tak Snare Drum DarbukaTekeFlamD Tef Shake 1

Ta b l a D o m Floor Tom L Darbuka Tek Dead Tef Shake 2

Tabla Tak 1 Hi-Hat Closed DarbukaTekDamped Tef Te k F l am

Ta b l a T ik Floor Tom H Darbuka TekeFlam Tef Full Open

Tabla Tak 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Darbuka Teke Tef Teke OpShort

Tabla Sak Low Tom DarbukaTekeFin 1 Tef Tek Op Short

Tabla Roll Edge Hi-Hat Open DarbukaTekeFin 2 Tef Tek O pe n

Tabla Flam Mid Tom L Darbuka Tek 1 Te f D u m Op en

Sagat 1 Mid Tom H DarbukaTekeFin 3 Hollo FingerDead

Tabel Dom Crash Cymbal 1 DarbukaTekeFin 4 Hollo Slap

Sagat 3 High Tom Darbuka Tek 2 Hollo Dum

Ta b e l Ta k Ride Cymbal 1 Darbuka Slap Med Kasik

Sagat 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Darbuka Slap Kasik Flam

Rik Dom Duhulla Dom Darbuka Dum BDarbuka TekDead

Rik Tak 2 Tambourine Bongo Tek Roll BDarbuka TekFlam

Rik Finger 1 Duhulla Tak Bongo Flam BassDarbuka Teke

Rik Tak 1 Cowbell Bongo Tek Flam BDarbukaTekeFin1

Rik Finger 2 Duhulla Sak Bongo Tek BDarbukaTekeFin2

Rik BrassTremolo Claves Bongo Slap Bass Darbuka Tek

Rik Sak Doff Dom Bongo Flam Hi BassDarbukaSlap1

Rik Tik - Bongo Dum -

- -

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

China Kit OrchestraPerc

Preset 1 (UK)

Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)

- Luo High 1 - Snare Ensemble

- Gong Batter Symphonic Gong 1 Sus Cym 1 Roll S

- Jin Luo Symphonic Gong L Sus Cymbal 1

- Luo High 2 Symphonic Gong 2 Sus Cym 2 Roll L

- Luo Mid-Low Timpani E Sus Cymbal 2

- Luo Timpani F Concert Tom 5

- Jin Luo Low Timpani F# OrchCymbal 1 ckd

- Da Cha 1 Timpani G Concert Tom 4

- Da Cha Effect Timpani G# Orch Cymbal 1

- Zhongcha Timpani A Concert Tom 3

- Xiaocha Effect Timpani A# Orch Cymbal 2

Da Cha 2 Xiaocha Timpani B Concert Tom 2

- Da Gu mp Mang Luo Low - Timpani C Concert Tom 1

- Da Gu Rim Mang Luo Mid - Timpani C# Finger Cymbal

- Da Gu f Qing - Timpani D Gong

- Da Gu Hand Finger Bell - Timpani D# Ride Cymbal Tip

- Da Gu Roll Luo Big - Timpani High E China Cymbal

- Pai Gu 4 Muyu Low - Gran Cassa Hard Ride Cymbal Cup

- Pai Gu 4 High Muyu Mid-Low - Gran Cassa Soft Tambourine

- Pai Gu 3 Muyu Mid - Gran Cassa Hit Splash Cymbal

- Pai Gu 3 High - Gran Cassa Cresc

- Pai Gu 2 - ConcertSnareDrum

- Pai Gu 2 High - Snare Roll

- Pai Gu 1 - Snare Drum Light

Ban Luo High 1 Bongo H Stick Snare Ensemble

Bangu Roll Gong Batter Bongo L Stick Sus Cym 1 Roll S

ChineseOperaVo 1 Jin Luo Conga H Stick Sus Cymbal 1

ChineseOperaVo 2 Luo High 2 Conga L Stick Sus Cym 2 Roll L

ChineseOperaVo 3 Luo Mid-Low Whip Sus Cymbal 2

Yunluo F Luo Rotating Tom 5 Concert Tom 5

Yunluo F# Jin Luo Low Tubular Bell L OrchCymbal 1 ckd

Yunluo G Da Cha 1 Rotating Tom 4 Concert Tom 4

Yunluo G# Da Cha Effect Tubular Bell M Orch Cymbal 1

Yunluo A Zhongcha Rotating Tom 3 Concert Tom 3

Yunluo A# Xiaocha Effect Tubular Bell H Orch Cymbal 2

Yunluo B Xiaocha Rotating Tom 2 Concert Tom 2

Yunluo C Mang Luo Low Rotating Tom 1 Concert Tom 1

Yunluo C# Mang Luo Mid Temple Block H Finger Cymbal

Yunluo D Qing Temple Block L Gong

Yunluo D# Finger Bell Claves Ride Cymbal Tip

Yunluo E Luo Big Wood Block H China Cymbal

Yunluo High F Muyu Low Wood Block L Ride Cymbal Cup

Yunluo High F# Muyu Mid-Low Anveil Ta m bo ur i ne

Yunluo High G Muyu Mid Triangle Roll Splash Cymbal

Yunluo High G# Muyu High Triangle Mute Cowbell

Yunluo High A Nanbangzi Roll Triangle Open Jingle Ring

Yunluo High A# Nanbangzi Bell Tree Castanet Roll

Yunluo High B Bangu Sleigh Bells Table Castanet

Yunluo High C - Wind Chime -

- -

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

You can create your own original Keyboard Percussion

kit by assigning specific drum/percussion sounds to the

notes on the keyboard. To do this, assign your desired Kit

(pages 83 – 92) to a User Keyboard Percussion (any of

User 1 – 40), then assign each desired drum/percussion

sound to any key or pedal. The created User Keyboard

Percussion kit can be called up via the KEYBOARD

PERCUSSION [1] or [2] button. In the instructions

below, drum sounds are assigned to User 1 and called up

with the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button.

NOTE

By default, the same data as the Preset 1 – 2 of the EL Kit is

stored to User Keyboard Percussion 1 and 2.

1 Turn on the Keyboard Percussion

function by pressing the KEYBOARD

PERCUSSION [1] button.

The K.B.P. display appears.

2 Press [USER 1] on the display.

This procedure assigns User 1 to the KEYBOARD

PERCUSSION [1] button.

This lets you call up the User 1 settings the next time

you press the [1] button.

3 Press the [ASSIGN] button at the right

top on the display to call up the ASSIGN

page.

4 Press the [KIT CHANGE] button at the

center on the display to call up the Kit

list of the Keyboard Percussion, then

select the desired kit.

5 Select the desired drum instrument that

you wish to assign to a key.

Select the desired drum instrument category with

the category buttons in the display. The drum

instrument menu of the selected category appears.

Reference page

• Kit Assign List (page 83)

Creating a User Keyboard

Percussion Kit

The message “Are you sure you want to reset the

setup data to the default values and clear the

assignments?” appears when you change the kit.

Select [OK] to clear all assignments and detailed

settings (made in the SETUP Page) and call up the

selected kit on the panel. Select [CANCEL] to call up

the selected kit without erasing the assignments and

detailed settings.

Drum Instrument Category

Drum Instrument Menu

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

6 Assign an instrument to a particular key

or pedal by simultaneously holding

down the desired instrument name in

the display and pressing the key (or

pedal) to which the instrument is to be

assigned.

When the assignment is complete, the key name and

instrument name is displayed at the top of the

display. The assignments are saved to the User

memory selected in step 2 (in this example, User 1).

7 Repeat the operation steps above as

necessary to construct your own User

Keyboard Percussion set.

8 From the Menu page of Keyboard

Percussion, select the User number

which you wish to use for your

performance.

When you select “User 5” on the K.B.P. [1] page for

example, pressing the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION

[1] button will call up the User 5 of the Keyboard

Percussion.

NOTE

The User Keyboard Percussion data cannot be stored to

Registration Memory; only the on/off status of the [1]/[2]

buttons and which Keyboard Percussion kit (from Preset 1

– 2 and User 1 – 40) is selected can be stored there. When

you want to save the User Keyboard Percussion data

together with the current Registration Memory data,

execute the Save operation to the USB flash drive

(page 116). All 40 User Keyboard Percussion kits can be

saved for each Unit separately.

To erase one instrument:

Simultaneously hold down the [CLEAR] button in the

display (ASSIGN Page) and press the key (or pedal)

corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase.

NOTICE

The Keyboard Percussion setting you have created is

automatically saved when you switch to another display.

While data is being saved, the square at the top left of the

display turns light blue for a few seconds. Do not turn the

power off while the Keyboard Percussion settings are being

saved.

To erase all instruments:

You can clear all assignments using the [CLEAR] button

in the display (ASSIGN Page).

1 Press, then release the [CLEAR] button.

The following display appears, prompting

confirmation of the operation.

2 Press [CLEAR] in the display to erase all

data. When [CLEAR] is selected, a

“Completed” message momentarily

appears on the display.

Press [CANCEL] in the display to abort the

operation.

The key to which the instrument is to be assigned

Instrument Name

Hold down the Instrument

name…

Press the key.

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

You can copy the Preset Keyboard Percussion to one of

the User locations, or copy from one User location to

another. In the instructions below, Preset 1 is copied to

User 1.

1 Press the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1]

button to copy Preset 1.

To copy Preset 1, select the [1] button; to copy Preset

2, select the [2] button.

To copy either User location, select button [1] or [2].

2 Within the Menu buttons, select the

User location as the destination — for

example, User 1.

3 Press the [COPY FROM] button in the

display.

A list appears, letting you select the copy source

location.

4 Select the copy source (Preset 1 here)

from the list.

A message appears, prompting confirmation of the

operation.

5 Press the [COPY] button in the display

to copy Preset 1. When [COPY] is

selected, a “Completed” message

momentarily appears in the display.

Press the [CANCEL] button in the display to abort

the operation.

You can independently adjust the settings of pan, pitch,

reverb and volume for each instrument. The settings here

are system settings that cannot be memorized to

Registration memory.

1 Turn off the volume of the relevant

keyboard (the keyboard to which the

instrument to be changed is assigned).

2 Press the [SETUP] button at the top

right of the K.B.P. display to call up the

SETUP Page.

3 Press the appropriate key (the key to

which the instrument to be changed is

assigned).

The selected instrument’s name is shown on the

display and you can change its settings.

Copying the Keyboard Percussion

settings

Detailed settings for each

percussion instrument

The name of the

selected instrument

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

PAN

Determines the position of the currently selected

instrument in the stereo image. Seven pan positions are

available.

PITCH COARSE

Adjusts the pitch of the currently selected instrument by

100 cents.

Range: -64 – +63

PITCH FINE

Adjusts the pitch of the currently selected instrument by

one cent, allowing more detailed tuning of the instrument

than PITCH COARSE ( ).

Range: -64 – +63

REVERB

Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently

selected instrument.

Range: 0 – 24

VOLUME

Determines the volume of the currently selected

instrument.

Range: 0 – 24

RESET

Initializes settings such as pan, pitch, and reverb to their

default values.

Pressing the [EXECUTE] button calls up the following

display, prompting confirmation of the operation.

Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display to restore

(initialize) the default settings.

When [EXECUTE] is selected, a “Complete” message

momentarily appears on the display.

Press the [CANCEL] button in the display to abort the

operation.

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

CYMBAL

• Crash Cymbal 1

• Crash Cymbal 2

• Crash Cym Mute

• Ride Cymbal 1

• Ride Cymbal 2

• Ride Cymbal Cup

• Orchestra Cymbal

• Orch Cymbal Roll

• Orch Cymbal Mute

•Cymbal March

• Cym Brush Shot

•Tam-Tam

HI-HAT

• Hi-Hat Open

• Hi-Hat Closed

• Hi-Hat Pedal 1

• Hi-Hat Pedal 2

• Analog HH Open

• Analog HH Closed

SNARE DRUM

• Snare Drum Light

• Snare Drum Heavy

• Snare Drum Rim 1

• Snare Drum Rim 2

• SD Accent 1

• SD Accent 2

•SD Reverb 1

•SD Reverb 2

• Synth Snare Drum

• Orch Snare Drum

• Snare Drum Roll

• Analog SD

SNARE BRUSH

• SD Brush Shot 1

• SD Brush Shot 2

• SD Brush Roll

TOM

•Tom 1

•Tom 2

•Tom 3

•Tom 4

• Tom Brush Shot 1

• Tom Brush Shot 2

• Tom Brush Shot 3

• Tom Brush Shot 4

• Synth Tom 1

• Synth Tom 2

• Synth Tom 3

BASS DRUM

• Bass Drum Light

• Bass Drum Heavy

• Bass Drum Attack

• Synth Bass Drum

• Bass Drum March

• Concert BD

• Analog BD Short

• Analog BD Long

CONGA/BONGO

• Conga High

•Conga Low

•Conga Slap

•Conga Muff

•Conga Slide

•Bongo High

•Bongo Low

•Bongo Slap

• Bongo Mute

CUICA/SURDO

• Cuica High

• Cuica Middle

• Cuica Low

•Tamborim Open

• Tamborim Mute

• Surdo Open

• Surdo Mute

•Surdo Rim

•Surdo Muff

TIMBALES/COWBELL

• Timbale 1 High

• Timbale 1 Low

• Timbale 2 High

• Timbale 2 Low

• Timbale 3 High

• Timbale 3 Low

• Timbale 4 High

• Timbale 4 Low

•Cowbell 1

•Cowbell 2

•Cowbell 3

•Cowbell 4

PERCUSSION 1

•Cabasa

• Shaker

• Maracas High

• Maracas Low

•Guiro Short

• Guiro Long

• Wood Block High

• Wood Block Mid

• Wood Block Low

•Claves

• Castanet

• Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

• Agogo High

• Agogo Low

• Triangle Open

•Triangle Mute

• Wind Chime Down

• Wind Chime Up

• Tambourine

•Pandeiro

•Bells

• Hand Claps

• Finger Snap

• Scratch

• Noise Percussion

PERCUSSION 3

• Kotsuzumi 1

• Kotsuzumi 2

• Kotsuzumi 3

• Kotsuzumi 4

• Ohtsuzumi 1

• Ohtsuzumi 2

• Taiko 1

• Taiko 2

• Ohdaiko 1

• Ohdaiko 2

• Kakegoe 1

• Kakegoe 2

• Kakegoe 3

CYMBAL

•Crash Cymbal 1

•Crash Cymbal 2

• Splash Cymbal

• Chinese Cymbal

• Ride Cymbal 1

• Ride Cymbal 2

• Ride Cymbal Cup

• Hi-Hat Open

• Hi-Hat Closed

• Hi-Hat Pedal

SNARE DRUM

•Snare

•Snare Tight

• Snare Soft

• Snare Roll

• Side Stick

• Open Rim Shot

•Brush Tap

•Brush Slap

•Brush Swirl

• Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

• Floor Tom L

• Floor Tom H

• Low Tom

• Mid Tom L

• Mid Tom H

•High Tom

BASS DRUM

•Kick

• Kick Tight

• Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1

• Conga H Open

•Conga L

• Conga H Mute

•Bongo H

•Bongo L

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

•Cowbell

•Claves

• Guiro Long

•Guiro Short

• Maracas

• Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

•Surdo Mute

• Surdo Open

• Cuica Mute

• Cuica Open

•Cabasa

• Shaker

• Agogo H

• Agogo L

• Samba Whistle H

• Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

• Tambourine

• Castanet

• Jingle Bells

• Bell Tree

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

• Sticks

• Whip Slap

• Finger Snap

•Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

• Click Noise

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

•Seq Click L

•Seq Click H

• Metronome Click

• Metronome Bell

CYMBAL

•Crash Cymbal 1

•Crash Cymbal 2

• Splash Cymbal

• Chinese Cymbal

• Ride Cymbal 1

• Ride Cymbal 2

• Ride Cymbal Cup

• Hi-Hat Open

• Hi-Hat Closed

• Hi-Hat Pedal

SNARE DRUM

• Snare Short

• Snare Tight H

• Snare Soft 2

• Snare Roll

• Side Stick Light

• Open Rim Shot H

•Brush Tap

•Brush Slap

• Brush Swirl

• Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

•Floor Tom L

•Floor Tom H

•Low Tom

• Mid Tom L

• Mid Tom H

•High Tom

BASS DRUM

• Kick Short

•Kick Tight

• Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1

•Conga H Open

•Conga L

• Conga H Mute

•Bongo H

•Bongo L

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

•Cowbell

•Claves

• Guiro Long

• Guiro Short

• Maracas

• Vibraslap

Kit Assign list

EL Kit Standard Kit 1

Standard Kit 2

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

PERCUSSION 2

• Surdo Mute

•Surdo Open

• Cuica Mute

• Cuica Open

• Cabasa

• Shaker

• Agogo H

• Agogo L

• Samba Whistle H

• Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

•Tambourine

• Castanet

• Jingle Bells

•Bell Tree

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

• Sticks

• Whip Slap

• Finger Snap

• Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

• Click Noise

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

• Seq Click L

• Seq Click H

• Metronome Click

• Metronome Bell

CYMBAL

• Crash Cymbal 1

• Crash Cymbal 2

• Splash Cymbal

• Chinese Cymbal

• Ride Cymbal 1

• Ride Cymbal 2

• Ride Cymbal Cup

• Hi-Hat Open 2

• Hi-Hat Closed 2

• Hi-Hat Pedal 2

SNARE DRUM

•Snare Ambient

• Snare Tight 2

• Snare Electro

•Snare Roll

• Stick Ambient

• Snare Pitched

•Brush Tap

•Brush Slap

• Brush Swirl

• Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

•Hybrid Tom 1

•Hybrid Tom 2

•Hybrid Tom 3

•Hybrid Tom 4

•Hybrid Tom 5

•Hybrid Tom 6

BASS DRUM

• Kick Tight H

•Kick Wet

• Kick Tight L

PERCUSSION 1

• Conga H Open

•Conga L

• Conga H Mute

•Bongo H

•Bongo L

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

•Cowbell

•Claves

• Guiro Long

•Guiro Short

• Maracas

• Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

• Surdo Mute

• Surdo Open

• Cuica Mute

• Cuica Open

•Cabasa

• Shaker

•Agogo H

•Agogo L

• Samba Whistle H

• Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

• Tambourine Light

• Castanet

• Jingle Bells

• Bell Tree

• Triangle Open

•Triangle Mute

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

• Sticks

• Whip Slap

• Finger Snap

• Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

• Click Noise

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

• Seq Click L

• Seq Click H

• Metronome Click

• Metronome Bell

CYMBAL

•Crash Cymbal 1

•Crash Cymbal 2

• Splash Cymbal

• Chinese Cymbal

•Ride Cymbal 1

•Ride Cymbal 2

•Ride Cymbal Cup

• Hi-Hat Open

• Hi-Hat Closed

• Hi-Hat Pedal

SNARE DRUM

•Snare Snappy

• Snare Tight Snap

•Snare Soft

•Snare Roll

•Side Stick

• Open Rim Shot

•Brush Tap

• Brush Slap

•Brush Swirl

• Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

• Tom Room 1

• Tom Room 2

• Tom Room 3

• Tom Room 4

• Tom Room 5

• Tom Room 6

BASS DRUM

•Kick

• Kick Tight

• Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1

• Conga H Open

•Conga L

• Conga H Mute

•Bongo H

•Bongo L

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

•Cowbell

•Claves

• Guiro Long

•Guiro Short

• Maracas

• Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

•Surdo Mute

• Surdo Open

• Cuica Mute

• Cuica Open

•Cabasa

• Shaker

• Agogo H

• Agogo L

• Samba Whistle H

• Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

• Tambourine

• Castanet

• Jingle Bells

• Bell Tree

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

•Sticks

• Whip Slap

• Finger Snap

•Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

• Click Noise

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

• Seq Click L

• Seq Click H

• Metronome Click

• Metronome Bell

CYMBAL

•Crash Cymbal 1

•Crash Cymbal 2

• Splash Cymbal

• Chinese Cymbal

• Ride Cymbal 1

• Ride Cymbal 2

• Ride Cymbal Cup

• Hi-Hat Open

• Hi-Hat Closed

• Hi-Hat Pedal

SNARE DRUM

• Snare Rock

• Snare Rock Tight

• Snare Noisy

• Snare Roll

• Side Stick

• Open Rim Shot

•Brush Tap

•Brush Slap

• Brush Swirl

• Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

•Tom Rock 1

•Tom Rock 2

•Tom Rock 3

•Tom Rock 4

•Tom Rock 5

•Tom Rock 6

BASS DRUM

• Kick Gate

•Kick 2

• Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1

•Conga H Open

•Conga L

• Conga H Mute

•Bongo H

•Bongo L

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

•Cowbell

•Claves

• Guiro Long

• Guiro Short

• Maracas

• Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

•Surdo Mute

•Surdo Open

• Cuica Mute

• Cuica Open

•Cabasa

• Shaker

•Agogo H

•Agogo L

• Samba Whistle H

• Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

• Tambourine

• Castanet

• Jingle Bells

• Bell Tree

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

• Sticks

• Whip Slap

• Finger Snap

•Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

• Click Noise

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

•Seq Click L

•Seq Click H

• Metronome Click

• Metronome Bell

Hit Kit

Room Kit

Rock Kit

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

CYMBAL

• Crash Cymbal 1

• Crash Cymbal 2

• Splash Cymbal

• Chinese Cymbal

• Ride Cymbal 1

• Ride Cymbal 2

• Ride Cymbal Cup

• Hi-Hat Open

• Hi-Hat Closed

• Hi-Hat Pedal

SNARE DRUM

• Snare Noisy 2

• Snare Noisy 3

• Snare Snap Elec

•Snare Roll

• Side Stick

• Open Rim Shot

•Brush Tap

•Brush Slap

• Brush Swirl

• Reverse Cymbal

TOM

• Tom Electro 1

• Tom Electro 2

• Tom Electro 3

• Tom Electro 4

• Tom Electro 5

• Tom Electro 6

BASS DRUM

• Kick Gate Heavy

• Kick Gate

•Kick 3

PERCUSSION 1

• Conga H Open

•Conga L

• Conga H Mute

•Bongo H

•Bongo L

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

•Cowbell

•Claves

• Guiro Long

•Guiro Short

• Maracas

• Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

• Surdo Mute

•Surdo Open

• Scratch H 2

• Scratch L 2

• Cabasa

• Shaker

• Agogo H

• Agogo L

• Samba Whistle H

• Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

•Tambourine

•Hi Q 2

• Jingle Bells

•Bell Tree

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

• Sticks

• Whip Slap

• Finger Snap

• Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

• Click Noise

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

• Seq Click L

• Seq Click H

• Metronome Click

• Metronome Bell

CYMBAL

• Crash Analog

•Crash Cymbal 2

• Splash Cymbal

• Chinese Cymbal

•Ride Cymbal 1

•Ride Cymbal 2

•Ride Cymbal Cup

• Hat Open Analog

• Hat Close Analog

• Hat Close Anlg 2

SNARE DRUM

• Snare Analog

• Snare Analog 2

• Snare Noisy 4

•Snare Roll

• Side Stick Anlg

• Open Rim Shot

•Brush Tap

• Brush Slap

•Brush Swirl

• Reverse Cymbal

TOM

• Tom Analog 1

• Tom Analog 2

• Tom Analog 3

• Tom Analog 4

• Tom Analog 5

• Tom Analog 6

BASS DRUM

• Kick Analog

• Kick Anlg Short

•Kick 3

PERCUSSION 1

• Conga Analog M

• Conga Analog L

• Conga Analog H

•Bongo H

•Bongo L

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

• Cowbell Analog

• Claves 2

• Guiro Long

•Guiro Short

• Maracas 2

• Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

• Surdo Mute

• Surdo Open

• Scratch H 2

• Scratch L 2

•Cabasa

• Shaker

•Agogo H

•Agogo L

• Samba Whistle H

• Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

• Tambourine

•Hi Q 2

• Jingle Bells

• Bell Tree

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

•Sticks

• Whip Slap

• Finger Snap

•Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

• Click Noise

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

• Seq Click L

• Seq Click H

• Metronome Click

• Metronome Bell

CYMBAL

• Crash Analog

•Crash Cymbal 2

• Splash Cymbal

• Chinese Cymbal

• Ride Cymbal 1

• Ride Analog

• Ride Cymbal Cup

• Hi-Hat Open 3

• Hi-Hat Closed 3

• Hat Close Anlg 3

SNARE DRUM

•Snare Clap

•Snare Dry

• Snare Techno

• Reverse Dance 2

• Side Stick Anlg

• Rim Gate

• Snare Analog 3

• Snare Analog 4

• Vinyl Noise

• Reverse Cymbal

TOM

• Tom Dance 1

• Tom Dance 2

• Tom Dance 3

• Tom Dance 4

• Tom Dance 5

• Tom Dance 6

BASS DRUM

• Kick Techno

• Kick Techno L

• Kick Techno Q

PERCUSSION 1

• Conga Analog M

• Conga Analog L

• Conga Analog H

• Bongo Analog H

• Bongo Analog L

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

• Cowbell Dance

• Claves 2

• Guiro Long

•Guiro Short

• Maracas 2

• Vibraslap Analog

PERCUSSION 2

• Kick Dance 1

• Kick Dance 2

• Dance Breath 1

• Dance Breath 2

•Cabasa

• Shaker

•Agogo H

•Agogo L

• Samba Whistle H

• Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

• Tambourine Anlg

•Hi Q 2

• Jingle Bells

• Bell Tree

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

• Dance Perc 3

• Dance Perc 4

• Snare Dance 1

• Whip Slap

• Finger Snap

• Dance Clap

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

• Click Noise

• Scratch Dance 1

• Scratch Dance 2

• Dance Perc 2

• Hi Q Dance 1

• Dance Perc 1

• Reverse Dance 1

CYMBAL

•Crash Cymbal 1

•Crash Cymbal 2

• Splash Cymbal

• Chinese Cymbal

• Ride Cymbal 1

• Ride Cymbal 2

• Ride Cymbal Cup

• Hi-Hat Open

• Hi-Hat Closed

• Hi-Hat Pedal

SNARE DRUM

• Snare Jazz L

• Snare Jazz M

• Snare Jazz H

• Snare Roll

• Side Stick Light

• Open Rim Shot

•Brush Tap

•Brush Slap

• Brush Swirl

• Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

•Floor Tom L

•Floor Tom H

•Low Tom

• Mid Tom L

• Mid Tom H

•High Tom

BASS DRUM

• Kick Jazz

•Kick Tight

• Kick Soft

Electro Kit

Analog Kit

Dance Kit

Jazz Kit

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

PERCUSSION 1

• Conga H Open

•Conga L

• Conga H Mute

•Bongo H

•Bongo L

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

•Cowbell

•Claves

• Guiro Long

•Guiro Short

• Maracas

• Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

• Surdo Mute

•Surdo Open

• Cuica Mute

• Cuica Open

• Cabasa

• Shaker

• Agogo H

• Agogo L

• Samba Whistle H

• Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

•Tambourine

• Castanet

• Jingle Bells

•Bell Tree

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

• Sticks

• Whip Slap

• Finger Snap

• Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

• Click Noise

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

• Seq Click L

• Seq Click H

• Metronome Click

• Metronome Bell

CYMBAL

• Crash Cymbal 1

• Crash Cymbal 2

• Splash Cymbal

• Chinese Cymbal

• Ride Cymbal 1

• Ride Cymbal 2

• Ride Cymbal Cup

• Hi-Hat Open

• Hi-Hat Closed

• Hi-Hat Pedal

SNARE DRUM

•Brush Slap 3

•Brush Tap 2

•Brush Slap 2

•Snare Roll

• Side Stick Light

• Open Rim Shot

•Brush Tap

•Brush Slap

• Brush Swirl

• Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

• Tom Brush 1

• Tom Brush 2

• Tom Brush 3

• Tom Brush 4

• Tom Brush 5

• Tom Brush 6

BASS DRUM

• Kick Jazz

• Kick Tight

• Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1

• Conga H Open

•Conga L

• Conga H Mute

•Bongo H

•Bongo L

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

•Cowbell

•Claves

• Guiro Long

•Guiro Short

• Maracas

• Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

• Surdo Mute

• Surdo Open

• Cuica Mute

• Cuica Open

•Cabasa

• Shaker

•Agogo H

•Agogo L

• Samba Whistle H

• Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

• Tambourine

• Castanet

• Jingle Bells

• Bell Tree

• Triangle Open

•Triangle Mute

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

• Sticks

• Whip Slap

• Finger Snap

• Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

• Click Noise

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

• Seq Click L

• Seq Click H

• Metronome Click

• Metronome Bell

CYMBAL

• Hand Cymbal

• Hand Cymbal 2

• Splash Cymbal

• Chinese Cymbal

• Hand Cymbal S

• Hand Cymbal 2 S

•Ride Cymbal Cup

• Hi-Hat Open

• Hi-Hat Closed

• Hi-Hat Pedal

SNARE DRUM

• Band Snare

• Band Snare 2

• Snare Soft

• Snare Roll

• Side Stick

• Open Rim Shot

•Brush Tap

•Brush Slap

•Brush Swirl

• Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

• Floor Tom L

• Floor Tom H

• Low Tom

• Mid Tom L

• Mid Tom H

•High Tom

BASS DRUM

• Gran Cassa Mute

•Gran Cassa

• Kick Soft 2

PERCUSSION 1

• Conga H Open

•Conga L

• Conga H Mute

•Bongo H

•Bongo L

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

•Cowbell

•Claves

• Guiro Long

•Guiro Short

• Maracas

• Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

•Surdo Mute

• Surdo Open

• Cuica Mute

• Cuica Open

•Cabasa

• Shaker

• Agogo H

• Agogo L

• Samba Whistle H

• Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

• Tambourine

• Castanet

• Jingle Bells

• Bell Tree

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

•Sticks

• Whip Slap

• Finger Snap

•Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

• Click Noise

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

• Seq Click L

• Seq Click H

• Metronome Click

• Metronome Bell

CYMBAL

•Crash Cymbal 1

•Crash Cymbal 2

• Splash Cymbal

• Chinese Cymbal

• Ride Cymbal 1

• Ride Cymbal 2

• Ride Cymbal Cup

• Hi-Hat Open

• Hi-Hat Closed

• Hi-Hat Pedal

SNARE DRUM

• Snare Studio M

• Snare Studio L

• Snare Studio 2

• Snare Roll

• Side Stick

• Open Rim Shot

•Brush Tap

•Brush Slap

• Brush Swirl

• Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

•Floor Tom L

•Floor Tom H

•Low Tom

• Mid Tom L

• Mid Tom H

•High Tom

BASS DRUM

• Kick Studio

• Kick Ambience L

• Kick Ambience H

PERCUSSION 1

•Conga H Open

•Conga L

• Conga H Mute

•Bongo H

•Bongo L

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

•Cowbell

•Claves

• Guiro Long

• Guiro Short

• Maracas

• Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

•Surdo Mute

•Surdo Open

• Cuica Mute

• Cuica Open

•Cabasa

• Shaker

•Agogo H

•Agogo L

• Samba Whistle H

• Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

• Tambourine

• Castanet

• Jingle Bells

• Bell Tree

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

• Sticks

• Whip Slap

Brush Kit

Symphony Kit

Live!StudioKit

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

• Finger Snap

• Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

• Click Noise

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

• Seq Click L

• Seq Click H

• Metronome Click

• Metronome Bell

CYMBAL

• CrashCymbalAco 1

• CrashCymbalAco 2

• SplashCymbal Aco

• China Cymbal Aco

• RideCymbal Aco 1

• RideCymbal Aco 2

• RideCymbalCupAco

• Hi-Hat Open Aco

• Hi-HatClosedAco

• Hi-HatPedal Aco

SNARE DRUM

• Snare Acoustic

• Snare Rough Aco

• Snare Soft Aco

• Snare Roll Aco

• Stick Acoustic

• Rim Acoustic

•Brush Tap

•Brush Slap

• Brush Swirl

• Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

• Tom Acoustic 1

• Tom Acoustic 2

• Tom Acoustic 3

• Tom Acoustic 4

• Tom Acoustic 5

• Tom Acoustic 6

BASS DRUM

• Kick Mute Aco

•Kick Open Aco

• Kick Soft Aco

PERCUSSION 1

• Conga H Open

•Conga L

• Conga H Mute

•Bongo H

•Bongo L

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

•Cowbell

•Claves

• Guiro Long

•Guiro Short

• Maracas

• Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

• Surdo Mute

•Surdo Open

• Cuica Mute

• Cuica Open

• Cabasa

• Shaker

• Agogo H

• Agogo L

• Samba Whistle H

• Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

• Tambourine

• Castanet

• Jingle Bells

• Wind Chime

• Triangle Open

•Triangle Mute

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

• Sticks

• Whip Slap

• Finger Snap

• Hand Clap Power

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

• Click Noise

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

• Seq Click L

• Seq Click H

• Metronome Click

• Metronome Bell

CYMBAL

• CrashCymbalAco 1

• CrashCymbalAco 2

• SplashCymbal Aco

• China Cymbal Aco

• RideCymbal Aco 1

• RideCymbal Aco 2

• RideCymbalCupAco

• Hi-HatOpen Power

• Hi-HatClosePower

• Hi-HatPedalPower

SNARE DRUM

•Snare Power 1

• Snare Rough 1

•SnareSoftPower 1

•Snare Roll

• Side Stick Power

• Open Rim Power 1

•Brush Tap

• Brush Slap

•Brush Swirl

• Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

•Tom Power 1

•Tom Power 2

•Tom Power 3

•Tom Power 4

•Tom Power 5

•Tom Power 6

BASS DRUM

• Kick Power Mute

• Kick Power Open

• Kick Ambient+

PERCUSSION 1

• Conga H Open

•Conga L

• Conga H Mute

•Bongo H

•Bongo L

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

•Cowbell

•Claves

• Guiro Long

•Guiro Short

• Maracas

• Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

•Surdo Mute

• Surdo Open

• Cuica Mute

• Cuica Open

•Cabasa

• Shaker

• Agogo H

• Agogo L

• Samba Whistle H

• Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

• Tambourine

• Castanet

• Jingle Bells

•Wind Chime

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

•Sticks

• Whip Slap

• Finger Snap

• Hand Clap Power

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

• Click Noise

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

• Seq Click L

• Seq Click H

• Metronome Click

• Metronome Bell

CYMBAL

• CrashCymbalAco 1

• CrashCymbalAco 2

• SplashCymbal Aco

• China Cymbal Aco

• RideCymbal Aco 1

• RideCymbal Aco 2

• RideCymbalCupAco

• Hi-HatOpen Power

• HH Closed PW Eg

• Hi-HatPedalPower

SNARE DRUM

•Snare Power 2

• Snare Rough 2

• SnareSoftPower 2

• Snare Roll

• Side Stick Power

• Open Rim Power 2

•Brush Tap

•Brush Slap

•Brush Swirl

• Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

•Tom Power 1

•Tom Power 2

•Tom Power 3

•Tom Power 4

•Tom Power 5

•Tom Power 6

BASS DRUM

• Kick Power Mute

• Kick Power Open

• Kick Ambient+

PERCUSSION 1

•Conga H Open

•Conga L

• Conga H Mute

•Bongo H

•Bongo L

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

•Cowbell

•Claves

• Guiro Long

• Guiro Short

• Maracas

• Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

•Surdo Mute

•Surdo Open

• Cuica Mute

• Cuica Open

•Cabasa

• Shaker

•Agogo H

•Agogo L

• Samba Whistle H

• Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

• Tambourine

• Castanet

• Jingle Bells

•Wind Chime

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

• Sticks

• Whip Slap

• Finger Snap

• Hand Clap Power

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

• Click Noise

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

•Seq Click L

•Seq Click H

• Metronome Click

• Metronome Bell

CYMBAL

• CrashCymbalAco 1

• CrashCymbalAco 2

• SplashCymbal Aco

• China Cymbal Aco

• RideCymbal Aco 1

• RideCymbal Aco 2

• RideCymbalCupAco

• Hi-Hat Open Rock

• Hi-HatClosedRock

• Hi-HatPedal Rock

SNARE DRUM

• Snare Rock

• Snare Dry Rock

• Snare Soft Rock

• Snare Roll Rock

• Stick Rock

• Rim Rock

•Brush Tap

•Brush Slap

• Brush Swirl

• Brush Tap Swirl

Live!AcousticKit

Live!PowerKit1

Live!PowerKit2

Live!Rock Kit

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

TOM

• Tom Rock 1

• Tom Rock 2

• Tom Rock 3

• Tom Rock 4

• Tom Rock 5

• Tom Rock 6

BASS DRUM

• Kick Rock

• Kick Rock Heavy

• Kick Soft Rock

PERCUSSION 1

• Conga H Open

•Conga L

• Conga H Mute

•Bongo H

•Bongo L

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

•Cowbell

•Claves

• Guiro Long

•Guiro Short

• Maracas

• Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

• Surdo Mute

•Surdo Open

• Cuica Mute

• Cuica Open

• Cabasa

• Shaker

• Agogo H

• Agogo L

• Samba Whistle H

• Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

•Tambourine

• Castanet

• Jingle Bells

•Wind Chime

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

• Sticks

• Whip Slap

• Finger Snap

• Hand Clap Power

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

• Click Noise

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

• Seq Click L

• Seq Click H

• Metronome Click

• Metronome Bell

CYMBAL

• CrashCymbalReal1

• CrashCymbalReal2

• SplashCymbalReal

• ChinaCymbal Real

• RideCymbalReal 1

• RideCymbalReal 2

• RideCym Cup Real

• Hi-Hat Open Real

• Hi-HatClosedReal

• Hi-Hat PedalReal

SNARE DRUM

•Snare Real 1

•Snare Real 2

•Snare Tight

• Snare Roll Rock

• Stick Real

• Rim Real

•Brush Tap

• Brush Slap

• Brush Tap Swirl

TOM

• Tom Real 1

• Tom Real 2

• Tom Real 3

• Tom Real 4

• Tom Real 5

• Tom Real 6

BASS DRUM

•Kick Real 1

•Kick Real 2

• Kick Genuine

PERCUSSION 1

• Conga H Open

•Conga L

• Conga H Mute

•Bongo H

•Bongo L

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

•Cowbell

•Claves

• Guiro Long

•Guiro Short

• Maracas

• Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

• Surdo Mute

• Surdo Open

• Cuica Mute

• Cuica Open

•Cabasa

• Shaker

•Agogo H

•Agogo L

• Samba Whistle H

• Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

• Tambourine

• Castanet

• Jingle Bells

• Wind Chime

• Triangle Open

•Triangle Mute

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

• Sticks

• Whip Slap

• Finger Snap

• Clap Power

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

• Click Noise

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

• Seq Click L

• Seq Click H

• Metronome Click

• Metronome Bell

CYMBAL

• CrashCymbal RB 1

• CrashCymbal RB 2

• Splash Cymbal RB

• ChinaCymbal RB

• Ride Cymbal RB

• Ride Cup RB 1

• Ride Cup RB 2

• Hi-Hat Open RB

• Hi-Hat Closed RB

• Hi-Hat Pedal RB

SNARE DRUM

• Vintage Slap 1

• Vintage Slap 2

• Vintage Slap 3

• Vintage Slap 4

• Vintage Slap 5

• VintageSlapSwirl

• Vintage Swirl 1

• Vintage Swirl 2

• Vintage Swirl 3

• Vintage TapSwirl

• Vintage Tip

• Stick Brush

• Open Rim Shot RB

TOM

• TomRealBrushes 1

• TomRealBrushes 2

• TomRealBrushes 3

• TomRealBrushes 4

• TomRealBrushes 5

• TomRealBrushes 6

BASS DRUM

• KickJazzAmbience

• Kick Soft H

• Kick Soft L

PERCUSSION 1

• Conga H Open

•Conga L

• Conga H Mute

•Bongo H

•Bongo L

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

•Cowbell

•Claves

• Guiro Long

•Guiro Short

• Maracas

• Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

•Surdo Mute

• Surdo Open

• Cuica Mute

• Cuica Open

•Cabasa

• Shaker

• Agogo H

• Agogo L

• Samba Whistle H

• Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

• Tambourine

• Jingle Bells

•Wind Chime

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

• Sticks

• Whip Slap

• Finger Snap

• Clap Power

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

• Click Noise

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

• Metronome Bell

• Metronome Click

CYMBAL

• Crash Cymbal T8

•Crash Cymbal 4

• Splash Cymbal

• China Cymbal 2

• Ride Cymbal T9

• Ride Cymbal 3

• RideCymbal Cup 2

• Hi-Hat Open T8

• Hi-Hat Closed T8

• Hi-Hat Pedal T8

SNARE DRUM 1

• Snare T8 1

• Snare T8 2

• Snare T8 3

• Snare T8 4

• Snare T8 5

• Snare T8 6

• Snare T8 7

• Snare T8 Rim

• Snare Analog CR

• SnareClap Analog

• Snare Break 1

•Snare Garg L

• Snare Fx 1

• Snare Hammer

SNARE DRUM 2

•Snare Hip 1

•Snare Hip 2

• Snare Hip Gate

TOM

• Tom T8 1

• Tom T8 2

• Tom T8 3

• Tom T8 4

• Tom T8 5

• Tom T8 6

• Tom T8 7

BASS DRUM

• Kick T8 1

• Kick T8 2

• Kick T8 3

• Kick T8 4

• T8 Kick Bass

•Kick Slimy

•Kick Blip

•Kick Tek Power

• Kick Fx Hammer

•Kick Zap Hard

PERCUSSION 1

• Conga T8 1

• Conga T8 2

• Conga T8 3

• Conga T8 4

• Conga T8 5

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

Live!Real Drums

Live!RealBrushes

Analog T8 Kit

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

• Cowbell T8

• Claves T8

• Glass H

• Glass L

• Maracas T8

• Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

• Surdo Mute

•Surdo Open

• Cabasa

• Analog Shaker

• Analog Shaker H

• Analog Shaker L

PERCUSSION 3

• Tambourine RX5

• Sleigh Bells

•Wind Chime

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

•Clap T9

• Whip Slap

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

•Hi Q 1

•Hi Q 2

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

• Scratch H 2

• Scratch L 2

• Fx Gun 1

• Fx Gun 2

CYMBAL

• Crash Cymbal T9

• Splash Cymbal 2

• Crash Cymbal 4

• China Cymbal 2

• Ride Cymbal T9

• Ride Cymbal 3

• RideCymbal Cup 2

• Hi-Hat Open T9

• Hi-Hat Closed T9

• Hi-Hat Pedal T9

SNARE DRUM 1

• Snare T9 1

• Snare T9 2

• Snare T9 3

• Snare T9 4

• Snare T9 5

• Snare T9 6

• Snare T8 7

• Snare T9 Gate 1

• Snare T9 Gate 2

• Snare T9 Rim

SNARE DRUM 2

• Snare Drum&Bass1

• Snare Jungle 1

• Snare Distortion

• Snare Analog CR

• Snare Brush Mute

• SnareRckRollDist

• Snare Piccolo

• Snare Rock Roll

TOM

• Tom T9 1

• Tom T9 2

• Tom T9 3

• Tom T9 4

• Tom T9 5

• Tom T9 6

BASS DRUM

• Kick T9 1

• Kick T9 2

• Kick T9 3

• Kick T9 4

• Kick Tek Power

• Kick Sustain

• Kick Blip Hard

• KickDistortionRM

• Kick Break 2

PERCUSSION 1

• Conga T8 1

• Conga T8 4

• Conga T8 5

• Conga Open

• Conga Open Slap

•Conga Tip

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

•Cowbell 1

•Cowbell T8

• Maracas Slur 2

PERCUSSION 2

• Surdo Mute

• Surdo Open

•Cabasa

• Analog Shaker

PERCUSSION 3

• Tambourine RX5

• Sleigh Bells

• Wind Chime

• Triangle Open

•Triangle Mute

•Clap T9

• Clap Analog Sm

• Analog Click

• Whip Slap

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

•Hi Q 1

•Hi Q 2

•Hi Q 3

• Scratch H

• Scratch H 2

• Scratch H 3

• Scratch L

• Scratch L 2

• Scratch Down

•Fx Gun 1

•Fx Gun 2

CYMBAL

• Crash Cymbal T9

•Crash Cymbal 1

•Crash Cymbal 4

• Splash Cymbal 2

• Ride Cymbal T9

•Ride Cymbal 3

• RideCymbal Cup 2

• Hi-Hat Open T9

• Hi-Hat Closed T8

• Hi-Hat Pedal T9

SNARE DRUM

•Snare T9 1

•Snare T9 2

•Snare T9 3

•Snare T9 5

• Snare T9 Gate

•Snare T9 Rim

•Snare T8 1

•Snare T8 5

•Snare T8 Rim

•Snare Garg L

• Snare R&B 1

• Snare Roll

• Snare Break Roll

TOM

• Tom T9 1

• Tom T9 2

• Tom T9 3

• Tom T9 4

• Tom T9 5

• Tom T9 6

BASS DRUM

• Kick T9 1

• Kick T9 2

• Kick T9 4

• Kick T9 5

•W Kick

• Filter Kick

NOISE

• PinkNoise Down 1

• PinkNoise Down 2

• Pink Noise Up

• PinkNoise Up Rel

• WhiteNoiseDown 1

• WhiteNoiseDown 2

• White Noise Up 1

• White Noise Up 2

• WhiteNoiseUp Rel

• Noise Burst

• Disco Fx

PERCUSSION 1

• Conga H Open 2

• Conga H SlapOpen

• Conga H Tip

• Bongo H Open 1 F

• Bongo L Open 3 F

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

• Cowbell 1

• Cowbell T8

•Claves

• Guiro Long

•Guiro Short

• Maracas Slur 2

PERCUSSION 2

• Cuica H

• Cuica L

•Cabasa

• Agogo H

• Agogo L

• Analog Shaker

• Udu High

PERCUSSION 3

• Tambourine Hit

• Sleigh Bells

•Wind Chime

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

•Clap T9

•Hand Clap

•Vox Drum H

•Vox Drum L

•Vox Alk

• Vox Bell

CYMBAL

•Crash T8

•Crash Cymbal 3

• Ride Cymbal 3

• Hi-Hat Open Hip

• Hi-Hat Open T8 2

• Hi-HatOpen Lo-Fi

• Hi-HatClosed Hip

• Hi-HatClosedT8 2

• Hi-HatClosed Tek

• Hi-Hat Pedal Hip

• Hi-HatReverseD&B

SNARE DRUM

•Snare HipHop 1

•Snare HipHop 2

•Snare HipHop 3

•Snare HipHop 5

•Snare HipHop 6

•Snare HipHop 7

• Snare HipHop 11

• Snare T8 1

• Snare T8 1 H

• Snare Clappy

• SnareAnalogSmRim

• SnareHipHopRim 2

• SnareHipHopRim 3

• SnareHipHopRim 4

• SnareHipHopRim 5

TOM

•Floor Tom L

•Low Tom

• Mid Tom L

•High Tom

• Tom T8 1

• Tom T8 2

• Tom T8 3

• Tom T8 6

BASS DRUM

•Kick HipHop 1

•Kick HipHop 2

•Kick HipHop 3

•Kick HipHop 4

•Kick HipHop 5

•Kick HipHop 8

•Kick HipHop 9

• Kick HipHop 10

• Kick Hip Deep

• Kick Analog CR

• Kick Gate

• KickGranCasaOpen

PERCUSSION 1

•Conga H Open

•Conga H Heel

• Conga H Tip

• Conga L Open 1

• Conga L Open 2

PERCUSSION 2

•Surdo Mute

•Surdo Open

• Shaker 2

• HipHop flex 1

• HipHop flex 2

• HipHop Snap 1

• HipHop Snap 2

PERCUSSION 3

• TambourineLight1

• TambourineLight2

•Handbell H

•Wind Chime

Analog T9 Kit

House Kit

HipHop Kit

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

• Whip Slap

• HipHop Clap 2

• HipHop Clap 3

• HipHop Clap 5

• HipHop Clap 6

• HipHop Clap 7

• Electric Clap 1

• Electric Clap 2

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

• ScratchBDForward

• ScratchBDReverse

CYMBAL

• Crash Cymbal T9

• Ride Cymbal T9

• Hi-Hat Open T8 1

• Hi-Hat Open T8 2

• Hi-Hat Open T9

• Hi-Hat Open Aco

• Hi-HatOpen Lo-Fi

• Hi-Hat Open Syn

• Hi-HatClosedT8 1

• Hi-HatClosedT8 2

• Hi-Hat Closed T9

• Hi-HatClosed Aco

• Hi-HatClosedLoFi

• Hi-HatClosed Syn

• Hi-Hat Pedal T9

• Hi-Hat Pedal Aco

SNARE DRUM

• Snare T8 1

• Snare T8 2

• Snare T8 3

• Snare T9 1

• Snare T9 4

• Snare T9 Rim

• Snare R&B 1

• Snare R&B 2

•Snare Hip 1

• Snare Timbre

•Snare Wood

• Snare Drum&Bass1

• Snare Drum&Bass2

• Snare Jungle 1

• Snare Analog CR

• Snare Distortion

TOM

• Tom T9 1

• Tom T9 2

• Tom T9 3

• Tom T9 4

• Tom T9 5

BASS DRUM

• Kick T8 2

• Kick T8 3

• Kick T9 2

• Kick T9 4

• Kick T9 HD 3

• Kick Tek Power

• Kick Break 2

• KickDistortionRM

• BD Drum & Bass 1

• Bass Drum Dist 1

• Bass Drum Dist 3

• Bass Drum Dist 5

• BassDrumTekPower

• BassDrumHardLong

• Bass Drum Blip

• BassDrumAnalogSm

PERCUSSION 1

• Conga T8 1

• Conga T8 2

• Conga T8 3

•Cowbell T8

• CowbellAnalog CR

• Claves T8 1

• Claves T8 2

• Maracas T8

PERCUSSION 2

• Surdo Mute

• Surdo Open

• Analog Shaker

• Analog Shaker 1

• Analog Shaker 2

PERCUSSION 3

• Tambourine RX5 2

• Tambourine 1 Hit

• TambourineAna CR

• ElectricTriangle

• Electric Cowbell

•Clap T9

• Whip Slap

• Electric Clap 1

PERCUSSION 4

•Hi Q

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

• Analog Click

CYMBAL

•Crash Cymbal 1

•Crash Cymbal 2

• Splash Cymbal 2

• China Cymbal 2

•Ride Cymbal 2

•Ride Cymbal 3

• RideCymbal Cup 2

• Hi-HatClosedBrk1

• Hi-HatClosedBrk2

• Hi-HatClosedBrk3

• HH HalfOpen Rock

• HHClosedRockSoft

• Hi-Hat PedalRock

SNARE DRUM 1

• Snare Break 1

• Snare Break 2

• Snare Break 3

• Snare Break 4

• Snare Break 5

• Snare Break 6

• Snare Break 7

• Snare Break 8

• Snare Break 9

• Snare Break Rim

SNARE DRUM 2

• Snare Gate 1

•Snare Clappy

•Snare Hip

• Snare Hip Rim 1

• Snare Hip Rim 4

• Snare LdwH Mono

•Snare Lo-Fi

•Snare Mid

• Snare Rock Roll

TOM

• Tom Break 1

• Tom Break 2

• Tom Break 3

• Tom Break 4

• Tom Break 5

• Tom Break 6

BASS DRUM

• Kick Break 1

• Kick Break 2

• Kick Break 3

• Kick Break 4

• Kick Break 5

• Kick Break 6

• Kick Break 7

• Kick Break Deep

• Kick Break Heavy

PERCUSSION 1

• Conga H Open

• Conga H OpenSlap

• Conga H Tip

•Conga Open

•Bongo H

•Bongo L

•Bongo 2 H

•Bongo 2 L

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

• Cowbell 1

• Cowbell RX11

•Claves

• Maracas Slur

PERCUSSION 2

•Surdo Mute

• Surdo Open

•Cabasa

• Agogo L

• Scratch H

• Scratch L

• Scratch H 2

• Scratch L 2

• Scratch H 3

• Scratch Down

PERCUSSION 3

• Tambourine 1 Hit

•Hi Q

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

• Whip Slap

• Finger Snap

SFX

• Cutting Noise 1

• Cutting Noise 2

• String Slap

• Flute Key Click

•Shower

• Thunder

•Wind

•Stream

•Bubble

• Feed

• Ghost

• Maou

•Dog

• Horse

•Bird Tweet

SFX 1

• Phone Call

• Telephone Ring

•Wind Chime

• Door Squeak

• Door Slam

• Scratch Cut

• Scratch Split

•Laugh

•Scream

• Punch

• Heart Beat

•Foot Steps

SFX 2

• CarEngn Ignition

• Car Tires Squeal

• Car Passing

• Car Crash

•Siren

•Train

• Jet Plane

•Starship

• Burst

• Roller Coaster

• Submarine

• Machine Gun

• Laser Gun

• Explosion

•Firework

SFX

• Cutting Noise 1

• Cutting Noise 2

• String Slap

• Flute Key Click

•Shower 2

• Thunder 2

•Wind 2

•Stream 2

• Bubble 2

•Feed

• Ghost

•Maou

•Dog

• Horse

•Bird Tweet

SFX 1

• Phone Call

• Telephone Ring 2

•Wind Chime

• Door Squeak 2

• Door Slam 2

• Scratch Cut

• Scratch Split

•Laugh

•Scream 2

• Punch 2

• Heart Beat

• Foot Steps 2

SFX 2

• CarEngn Ignition

• Car Tires Squeal

• Car Passing

• Car Crash

• Siren 2

Drum Machine

Break Kit

SFX Kit 1

SFX Kit 2

Live! SFX Kit 1

Live! SFX Kit 2

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

•Train 2

• Jet Plane 2

•Starship

• Burst

• Roller Coaster

• Submarine

• Machine Gun 2

• Laser Gun

• Explosion 2

•Firework

NOISE

• White Noise

• WhiteNoiseDown 1

• WhiteNoiseDown 2

• White Noise Up 1

• White Noise Up 2

• WhiteNoiseUp Rel

• WhiteNoiseUp LFO

• Pink Noise

• PinkNoise Down 1

• PinkNoise Down 2

• Pink Noise Up

• PinkNoise Up Rel

• PinkNoise Up LFO

FEMALE 1

• Female Bh 1

• Female Bh 2

• Female Bh 3

• Female Bh 4

• Female Ha 1

• Female Ha 2

• Female Kh 1

• Female Kh 2

• Female Kh 3

• Female Kh 4

• Female Ph 1

• Female Ph 2

• Female Ph 3

• Female Ph 4

FEMALE 2

• Female Th 1

• Female Th 2

• Female Th 3

• Female Th 4

MALE 1

• Male Bh 1

• Male Bh 2

• Male Bh 3

• Male Bh 4

• Male Ha 1

• Male Ha 2

• Male Ha 3

• Male Ha 4

• Male Ha 5

• Male Ha 6

• Male Kh 1

• Male Kh 2

• Male Kh 3

• Male Kh 4

MALE 2

• Male Ph 1

• Male Ph 2

• Male Ph 3

• Male Ph 4

• Male Th 1

• Male Th 2

• Male Th 3

• Male Th 4

GOSPELADLIBS 1

•Aaoh

•Aha!

• Heeey

•Hoo!

•Oh Yeah

• Uhh Yeah

• Yayayayayah

• Yeah!

•C'mon

• C'mon Now

•Come On!

• Alright Now!

•Everybody Now

• Put Your Hands…

• Stand Up On…

• WithAllYourSoul

GOSPELADLIBS 2

•One

•Two

•Three

• Four

•One!

•Two!

•Three!

• Four!

•Five!

•Six!

• Seven!

•Eight!

•Clap!

• ClapYourHands…

• Gospel Clap 1

• Gospel Clap 2

• Laser Beam

• Laser Shot

• Water Phone

• Bubble

• Puddle

NATURE

• Thunder

•Shower

• Beach

• Stream

DAILY

• Footstep

• Door Squeak

•Door Slam

• Alarm Bell

• Cuckoo Clock

• Big Clock

•Bell

• Telephone

•Camera

•Gnaw

•Applause

VEHICLE

•Train

•Horn 1

•Horn 2

•Siren

• CarEngn Ignition

•Car Crash

• Helicopter

• Starship

ANIMAL

• Sheep

•Goat

•Oxen

• Whinny

• Horse

•Lion

•Dog

•Cat

•Hen

• Owl

• Insects

•Frog

•Tweet 1

•Tweet 2

PERCUSSION 1

•Cymbal

•Snare

• Snare Roll

• Hi-Hat Open

• Hi-Hat Closed

•Tom 1

•Tom 2

• Bass Drum

•Gran Cassa

PERCUSSION 2

• Tambourine

• Castanet

• Jingle Bells

• Bell Tree

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

• Finger Snap

•Hand Clap

CONGA

• Conga H Tip

• Conga H Heel

• Conga H Open

• Conga H Mute

• Conga H SlapOpen

• Conga H Slap

• Conga H SlapMute

• Conga L Tip

• Conga L Heel

• Conga L Open

• Conga L Mute

• Conga L SlapOpen

• Conga L Slap

• Conga L Slide

BONGO

• Bongo H Open 1 f

• Bongo H Open 3 f

• Bongo H Rim

• Bongo H Tip

• Bongo H Heel

• Bongo H Slap

• Bongo L Open 1 f

• Bongo L Open 3 f

•Bongo L Rim

• Bongo L Tip

• Bongo L Heel

• Bongo L Slap

PERCUSSION 1

• Timbale H

• Timbale L

•Paila H

•Paila L

• Cowbell Top

• Cowbell 1

• Cowbell 2

• Cowbell 3

• Cowbell High 1

• Cowbell High 2

• Claves High

• Claves Low

• Guiro Long

• Guiro Short

• Metal Guiro Long

• Metal Guiro Short

PERCUSSION 2

• Maracas

• Cuica Open

• Cuica Mute

•Cabasa

• Shaker

• Tambourine

• Tambourim Tip

• Tambourim Open

• Tambourim Mute

• Castanet

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

•Wind Chime

PERCUSSION 3

•Hand Clap

• Finger Snap

• Shekere

• Shekere Tone

• Cajon Low

• Cajon Slap

• Cajon Tip

ARABIC 1

• Nakarazan Dom

• Nakarazan Edge

•Hager Dom

• Hager Edge

• Zagrouda H

• Zagrouda L

• Arabic Hand Clap

• Duhulla Dom

• Duhulla Tak

• Duhulla Sak

•Doff Dom

•Doff Tak

ARABIC 2

• Katem Dom

• Katem Tak

• Katem Sak

• Tabla Dom

• Tabla Tak 1

• Tabla Tak 2

• Tabla Sak

• Tabla Tik

• Tabla Roll Edge

• Tabla Flam

•Tabel Dom

•Tabel Tak

ARABIC 3

•Sagat 1

•Sagat 2

•Sagat 3

Noise Kit

VocalEffectsKit

GospelAdLibs

Wonderland Kit

Pop Latin Kit

Arabic Kit

Keyboard Percussion

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

• Rik Dom

• Rik Tak 1

• Rik Tak 2

• Rik Sak

• Rik Tik

• Rik Finger 1

• Rik Finger 2

• Rik BrassTremolo

CYMBAL/SNARE DRUM

• Crash Cymbal 1

• Crash Cymbal 2

• Ride Cymbal 1

• Hi-Hat Open

• Hi-Hat Closed

• Hi-Hat Pedal

• Snare Drum

•Snare Soft

• Side Stick

TOM/BASS DRUM

• Floor Tom L

• Floor Tom H

•Low Tom

• Mid Tom L

• Mid Tom H

•High Tom

• Kick Soft

PERCUSSION

• Conga H Open

•Conga L

• Conga H Mute

•Bongo H

•Bongo L

•Cowbell

•Claves

• Cabasa

•Tambourine

CYMBAL

• Zil Right Open

• Zil Right Close

• Zil Left Open

• Zil Left Close

BONGO

•Bongo Tek

• Bongo Tek Roll

• Bongo Tek Flam

•Bongo Dum

• Bongo Slap

• Bongo Flam

• Bongo Flam Hi

DAVUL

• Asma Davul L

• Asma Davul R

• Asma Davul Side

• Asma Davul Both

• KoltukDavul Teke

• Koltuk Davul Tek

• Koltuk Davul Dum

• KoltukDavul Flam

DARABUKA 1

• Darbuka Tek 1

• Darbuka Tek 2

• Darbuka Tek Dead

• DarbukaTekDamped

• DarbukaTekeFin 1

• DarbukaTekeFin 2

• DarbukaTekeFin 3

• DarbukaTekeFin 4

• Darbuka Teke

• DarbukaTekeFlamD

• Darbuka TekeFlam

• Darbuka Slap

• Darbuka Slap Med

• Darbuka RollOpen

• DarbukaRollClose

• Darbuka Dum

DARABUKA 2

• Bass Darbuka Tek

• BDarbuka TekDead

• BDarbuka TekFlam

• BassDarbuka Teke

• BDarbukaTekeFin1

• BDarbukaTekeFin2

• BassDarbukaSlap1

• BassDarbukaSlap2

• Bass Darbuka Dum

BENDIR

•Bendir Tek

• Bendir Tek Dead

•Bendir Teke

• Bendir Teke Flam

• Bendir Teke Dead

•Bendir Slap

•Bendir Dum

TEF

• Tef Tek Flam

• Tef Tek Open

• Tef Tek Mute

• TefTekMuteMedium

• Tef Tek Op Short

• Tef Teke Flam

• Tef Teke Damped

• Tef Teke OpShort

• Tef Dum Open

• Tef Dum Mute

• Tef Cymbal

• Tef Cymbal Mute

• Tef Shake 1

• Tef Shake 2

• Tef Full Open

• Tef Tremolo

PERCUSSION

• Hollo FingerDead

• Hollo Slap

•Hollo Dum

•Kasik

• Kasik Flam

CYMBAL

• Da Cha 1

• Da Cha 2

• Da Cha Effect

• Zhongcha

• Xiaocha

• Xiaocha Effect

• Gong Batter

• Luo Big

•Luo

• Luo Mid-Low

• Luo High 1

• Luo High 2

• Jin Luo

• Jin Luo Low

• Mang Luo Low

• Mang Luo Mid

DRUM

•Da Gu f

•Da Gu mp

•Da Gu Rim

• Da Gu Roll

• Da Gu Hand

•Pai Gu 1

• Pai Gu 2 High

•Pai Gu 2

• Pai Gu 3 High

•Pai Gu 3

• Pai Gu 4 High

•Pai Gu 4

GONG 1

• Yunluo F

• Yunluo F#

• Yunluo G

• Yunluo G#

• Yunluo A

• Yunluo A#

• Yunluo B

• Yunluo C

• Yunluo C#

• Yunluo D

• Yunluo D#

• Yunluo E

• Yunluo High F

• Yunluo High F#

• Yunluo High G

• Yunluo High G#

GONG 2

• Yunluo High A

• Yunluo High A#

• Yunluo High B

• Yunluo High C

PERCUSSION

• Muyu Low

• Muyu Mid-Low

• Muyu Mid

• Muyu High

•Ban

•Bangu

• Bangu Roll

• Nanbangzi

• Nanbangzi Roll

•Qing

• Finger Bell

• ChineseOperaVo 1

• ChineseOperaVo 2

• ChineseOperaVo 3

CYMBAL

• China Cymbal

•Finger Cymbal

•Orch Cymbal 1

• OrchCymbal 1 ckd

•Orch Cymbal 2

• Ride Cymbal Tip

• Ride Cymbal Cup

• Splash Cymbal

•Sus Cymbal 1

• Sus Cym 1 Roll S

•Sus Cymbal 2

• Sus Cym 2 Roll L

SNARE DRUM

• ConcertSnareDrum

• Snare Drum Light

• Snare Ensemble

• Snare Roll

TOM

• Concert Tom 1

• Concert Tom 2

• Concert Tom 3

• Concert Tom 4

• Concert Tom 5

• Rotating Tom 1

• Rotating Tom 2

• Rotating Tom 3

• Rotating Tom 4

• Rotating Tom 5

BASS DRUM

• Gran Cassa Hard

• Gran Cassa Soft

• Gran Cassa Hit

• Gran Cassa Cresc

GONG

•Gong

• Symphonic Gong 1

• Symphonic Gong 2

• Symphonic Gong L

TIMPANI

• Timpani E

• Timpani F

• Timpani F#

• Timpani G

• Timpani G#

• Timpani A

• Timpani A#

• Timpani B

• Timpani C

• Timpani C#

• Timpani D

• Timpani D#

• Timpani High E

PERCUSSION 1

•Conga H Stick

• Conga L Stick

• Bongo H Stick

• Bongo L Stick

•Cowbell

•Claves

• Bell Tree

• Sleigh Bells

• Tubular Bell H

• Tubular Bell M

• Tubular Bell L

•Wind Chime

• Jingle Ring

• Tambourine

• Castanet Roll

• Table Castanet

PERCUSSION 2

• Triangle Open

• Triangle Mute

• Triangle Roll

• Wood Block H

• Wood Block L

• Temple Block H

• Temple Block L

• Anveil

•Whip

Turkish Kit

China Kit

OrchestraPerc

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Registration Memory

Registration Memory allows you to store virtually all the settings you make on the panel and LCD, providing a

convenient way to instantly change all Voice settings and rhythms while you’re playing, with the simple touch

of a single button on the Registration Memory panel. The buttons are conveniently located between the Upper

and Lower keyboards for easy access while playing. Moreover, you can also recall the settings using the right

footswitch. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to a USB flash drive.

Registration Memory and Bank

This Electone lets you create up to five Registration Banks A – E, each of which consists of 1 – 16 Registration

Memories. Although preset various Registrations are stored to the Number buttons 1 – 16 of only Bank A by

default, you can replace them with your original Registrations. Your original Registrations can be stored also

to Banks B – E, up to a maximum of 80 Registrations. Executing the Initialize function (page 96) recalls the

preset Registrations of Bank A, and then resets the created Registrations of Banks B – E to their original empty

status.

Storing Registrations

Newly created Registrations you make can be stored to

the Registration Memory panel buttons. All Registrations

in Registration Memory can also be saved to a USB flash

drive for future recall.

Reference pages

• Selecting a Voice (page 25)

• Selecting a Rhythm (page 54)

• Voice Controls and Effects (page 40)

1 Create your original Registration.

While holding down the [M.] (Memory)

button in the Registration Memory

section, press the numbered button to

which you wish to save your Registration.

When saving of the Registration is started, the

numbered button flashes momentarily, until the

operation is completed.

13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D.

NOTICE

When recording Registration settings, the square at the

top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds,

indicating that the Registration is currently being saved.

Do not turn the power off while the Registration is being

saved, otherwise the data will be lost.

13 14 15 16 1 12 D.

1. While holding down the [M.] button...

2. Press desired numbered button.

Functions and settings that cannot

be memorized:

The following settings cannot be stored to a

Registration Memory number.

• Pitch (page 180)

• MIDI Control settings (page 188)

• Mic. Volume (page 185)

• Mic. Reverb (page 185)

• LCD related settings (page 16)

• Wireless LAN settings (page 189)

• Score related settings except Next Page (page 123)

The following settings common to all Registration

Memory numbers 1 – 16 and cannot be stored

individually for each number.

Reference page

• Saving Registrations and Other Data to a USB Flash Drive

(page 116)

• Transpose (page 180)

• Attack mode in Organ Flute Voices (page 38)

• Registration Shift (page 97)

• Auto Fill setting (page 56)

• Reverb type (page 45)

• User Voices (page 140)

• User rhythms (page 157)

• User Keyboard Percussion (page 79)

• Rhythm Sequences (page 168)

• Disable setting (page 94)

• Disable mode (page 95)

• Next Page setting of score setting (page 123)

Storing Registrations to Another Bank

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Storing Registrations to

Another Bank

With the default initial settings and Bank A selected, you

can store your original Registrations to Banks A and B.

Storing the Registrations to Bank B enables selection of

Bank C. Similarly, storing Registrations to Bank C enables

selection of Bank D, and so on, up to a maximum of Bank

1 At the lower right section of the Voice

Display, select the Registration Bank.

You can select the Banks from A (at top) to an empty

Bank next to the last Bank containing data. When

Banks A and B contain Registration data, for

example, you can select Banks A, B, and C (which is

empty). The on/off indication of Bank (A – E) shows

whether the selected Bank contains data or not.

2 Create your original Registration, then

store it to any of the Number buttons 1 –

16. (This corresponds to steps 1 – 2 on

page 93.)

Here, the Registration will be stored to Number

button [1] of Bank B.

NOTE

When you try to store Registrations after changing the Bank, a

confirmation dialog appears. Confirm whether or not you want to

set the current Bank as the destination.

Selecting Registrations

Select a Bank, then press the numbered button that

corresponds to the Registration you wish to select.

• You can also recall Registrations by using the right

footswitch. This function is called “Registration Shift”

(page 97).

• You can also program the Registrations to change

automatically at specific points within the Rhythm

Sequence. This function is called “Registration

Sequence” (page 170).

Using the [D.] (Disable) button:

Rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns also

change when you select different Registration

Memory buttons. Pressing the [D.] (Disable) button

allows you to keep the same rhythm, accompaniment

patterns, tempo, and so on throughout all your

Registration changes, or make your own rhythm

selections if you want to (while the [D.] button is lit).

The particular settings that do not change when the

[D.] (Disable) button is on depend on the Disable

mode setting. For details on the Disable mode, see

“Selecting Disable mode” (page 95).

NOTE

The Disable function is available even after changing the

Bank.

7 8 9 10 11 12 D.

Disable button

Saving the Registration Data to USB Flash Drive

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Registration Memory

Saving the Registration

Data to USB Flash Drive

The Registration data stored to the Number buttons can

be saved to a USB flash drive connected to the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal.

Reference page

• Saving Registrations and Other Data to a Unit (page 116)

With the MDR function, up to five Banks of the

Registration Memory stored to internal memory of the

instrument can be saved to a USB flash drive as a single

Song file. Although detailed information about the MDR

is described on chapter 7, these instructions show how to

save the Registration data to a USB flash drive.

1 Insert a USB flash drive into the [USB

TO DEVICE] terminal.

2 Press the [MDR] button on the panel to

call up the MDR display.

3 Select the Song to which you want to

save the Registration data (page 110).

Selecting Disable mode:

The Disable mode enables you to select what is to be

disabled when the [D.] (Disable) button is on. There

are two Disable modes: Normal (rhythm menu,

tempo, etc. are disabled) and Tempo (only tempo is

disabled).

1 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up

the GLOBAL Page of the Utility

display.

2 Press the DISABLE MODE

[NORMAL] or [TEMPO] button.

NORMAL

When the Electone is set to the Normal mode and the

[D.] (Disable) button is on, the following functions

will not change, even when you change the

Registration Memory number.

• Rhythm menu, Rhythm section, Rhythm tempo,

Rhythm volume, Rhythm reverb

• Rhythm reverb time

• Accompaniment volume, Accompaniment reverb,

On/Off status of Accompaniment parts

• A.B.C. mode, A.B.C. memory

• M.O.C. mode, Foot Pedal control for M.O.C.

• Second expression pedal control for rhythm tempo

TEMPO

When the Electone is set to the Tempo mode and the

[D.] (Disable) button is on, the rhythm tempo will

not change, even when you change the Registration

Memory number.

Disable mode

Initializing Registration Memory

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

4 Press the [UNIT EDIT] button on the

lower right side of the display to call up

the Unit Edit display.

5 Press the [SAVE] button in the display.

A message appears, indicating the Registration data

is currently being saved.

When the operation is completed, the message

closes.

Reference pages

• Recalling Recorded Registrations (page 118)

• Changing the Song Name (page 114)

The Registration data stored to Banks A – E is now saved

as a Unit to the USB flash drive.

Initializing Registration

Memory

Deleting all Registration data in Registration Memory

initializes the Registration Memory. Be careful when

using this operation, since it erases all your existing data.

In order to avoid inadvertently losing your important

data, save it to a USB flash drive.

Reference page

• Factory Set (Initializing the Electone); (page 23)

1 Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel

to call up the GLOBAL Page in the

Utility display.

2 Press the INITIALIZE [EXECUTE] button

on the right side in the display.

The message “Are you sure you want to initialize

Registration data?” appears.

Press [INITIALIZE] to actually initialize the data.

When the operation is complete, the Electone will be

restarted.

Press [CANCEL] to cancel the operation.

About Banks and Units

The Registration Memory data (16 x up to 5 Banks)

stored to internal memory of the instrument will be

handled as “Unit.” If you want to create more than 80

(=16 x 5 Banks) Registrations, create another Unit to

create more additional Registrations. The Unit can be

edited in the MDR function. See page 117.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Song

Unit 2

Unit 3

Registration Memory Bank A

Unit 1

Bank B

Bank C

Bank D

Bank E

Registration Shift

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Registration Memory

Registration Shift

The Registration Shift function allows you to change

Registrations without taking your hands from the

keyboards. By using the Right Footswitch on the

expression pedal, you can “jump” to a specified

Registration or step through the panel Registrations in

sequence, either in numeric order or in any order you

specify.

Registration Shift has three modes: Shift, Jump and User.

These are set in the Regist Shift display. You can also view

and check the Registration Shift mode in the Voice

Display.

1 Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button on the

panel.

2 Press the [RIGHT] button at the top right

of the display to call up the RIGHT Page

(REGIST SHIFT display).

OFF

Turns off the Registration Shift assignment. When you

select OFF, you cannot change Registrations by using the

Right Footswitch.

SHIFT

In the Shift mode, each press of the Right Footswitch

selects the Registration Memory presets in their

numerical order. After the last Registration is reached, the

function ‘wraps around’ to select the first preset again.

The numbered buttons light up as they are selected.

NOTE

In the Shift mode, the Right Footswitch cannot call up another

Registration Bank.

JUMP

Pressing the Right Footswitch jumps to select the

designated panel Registration.

You can set the Jump “destination” with

buttons in the display or the Data Control dial.

USER

In the User mode, each press of the Right Footswitch

selects Registrations according to the order you’ve

specified.

Setting the Registration Shift

mode in the Regist Shift display

REGIST SHIFT display

Registration number of the destination

Registration Shift

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

To set the User Registration order:

1 Select a Bank.

2 Press the desired numbered button in

the Registration Memory section.

3 Press the DATA [SET] button in the

display.

The Bank letter and Registration number appear in

the display, indicating that the Registration is

entered.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 above to set the

Registration order.

POSITION

These are cursor controls used to move the cursor

(colored orange) along the Registration row in the

display. Entered Registration numbers are shown in

boxes, while the numbers in the row above indicate the

position in the sequence (in other words, the number of

successive presses of the Right Footswitch). Up to 400

steps (Registrations) can be memorized.

Moves the cursor to the first position.

Moves the cursor one step to the left.

Moves the cursor one step to the right.

Moves the cursor five steps to the right.

DATA

These are data controls used to enter and delete

Registration numbers in the Registration row.

SET: For initially entering a Registration number to a

blank space in the Registration row, or for replacing a

number at the current cursor position.

To enter a number, press the desired Registration

Memory button (the selected button will light), then

press [SET] in the display. The entered Registration

number will appear in the Registration row. After using

SET to enter Registrations, the cursor can be moved

among the numbers.

INSERT: For inserting a Registration number just before

the current cursor position.

To perform the operation, first move the cursor to a

numbered position. Then, press the desired Registration

Memory button (the selected button will light), and press

[INSERT] in the display. The new Registration number is

inserted at the cursor position and all other numbers to

the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the

new numbers.

Registration numbers cannot be entered beyond the

Registration Shift function’s capacity of 400. If the insert

operation exceeds this capacity, a “Data Full” message

appears and the operation cannot be executed.

DELETE: For deleting a Registration number at the

current cursor position. To delete the unnecessary

number, move the cursor to a numbered position and

press [DELETE] in the display.

CLEAR: For erasing all current user Registration Shift

settings. After selecting [CLEAR], a message appears

prompting confirmation of the operation.

Select [CLEAR] to clear all data. The message “Clear all

data” momentarily appears in the display and returns to

the previous display.

Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation.

SHIFT END

Determines how to end the Registration Shift function.

STOP: Selects the last Registration and quits the

operation.

TOP: After the last preset is reached, the first preset is

called up again, starting the sequence over again from the

beginning.

NEXT UNIT: After the last preset is reached, the next

Unit in the Song is called up. This function is available

only when two or more Unit sets are saved to one Song.

Reference page

• Saving Two or More Registration Units in a Song (page 116)

NOTE

• When you play the Song using Next Unit function, always press

the [ ] (Play) button in the MDR display to start the Song and

activate these functions. The [CUSTOM] (Custom Play) button

(page 105) will not activate the Next Unit function.

• When you use the Next Unit function during Rhythm playback,

Rhythm Sequence and User Rhythm cannot be loaded.

The Shift End mark ( or ) will automatically be put

at the end of the Registrations you entered when Top or

Next Unit is selected as the Shift End.

BANK SELECT

Selects the Bank which contains the desired Registration.

Registration row

Registration Shift

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

Registration Memory

You can confirm the Registration Shift mode in the Voice

Display, Page 1.

Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on the panel to call

up the Voice Display.

The Registration Shift mode is shown at the bottom right

of the display.

Registration Shift, OFF:

The current Registration number is displayed.

Registration Shift, in “SHIFT” mode:

The current Registration number (left) and the next

number (right) are displayed.

Registration Shift, in “JUMP” mode:

The current Registration number (left) and the

destination number (right) will be displayed. You can

change the destination number even in the middle of the

performance by using the buttons in the

display or the Data Control dial.

Registration Shift, in “USER” mode:

Indicates the current position of the Registration Shift.

You can change the Registration by moving the cursor (in

orange) right/left, using the displayed buttons or the Data

Control dial. This is handy if you’ve inadvertently

advanced the shift setting in the middle of your

performance. The user Registration settings cannot be

edited here.

Moves the cursor to the first position.

Moves the cursor one step to the left and selects

the next Registration.

Moves the cursor one step to the right and selects

the previous Registration.

Moves the cursor five steps to the right and

selects the Registration.

NOTE

The Registration shift display in the Voice display cannot be

interlocked with the Registration sequence.

Confirming the Registration Shift

setting in the Voice Display

Current Registration Next Registration

Destination number can be changed.

Unifying Values/Settings of a Specific Parameter

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

100

Unifying Values/Settings

of a Specific Parameter

In the Voice Display, Page 2, you can conveniently unify

the values or settings of a specific parameter used in the

current Registration Bank at one time. This is useful

when you are changing, for example, the Voice Brilliance

setting for the Upper Keyboard and want the same setting

to be applied to all Registrations in the Bank.

1 Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on

the panel.

2 Press the [2] button at the top right of

the display to select Page 2.

3 Select the Bank, then press the

PARAMETER button (indicates the

currently selected parameter) in the

display to select the desired parameter

for changing.

The Parameter Select pop-up menu appears, letting

you select the desired parameter.

Select the parameter and part in the

Parameter Select pop-up menu.

After selecting the desired parameter, the pop-up

menu automatically closes.

The amount of the selected parameter for each

Registration is shown in the display.

NOTE

A parameter can be unified only within the current Bank.

Available parameters

•Reverb

•Rhythm Reverb

•Volume

•Panning

•Brilliance

•Sustain

Parameter

Part

Parameter value for each Registration

Selected parameter

Unifying Values/Settings of a Specific Parameter

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

101

Registration Memory

4 Select the targeted Registration

numbers and turn them on.

Press the targeted Registration in the display and

turn it on with the SETTINGS buttons: ALL ON,

ALL OFF, ON, OFF, and SELECT.

ALL ON: Selects all Registration memory numbers.

ALL OFF: Cancels all Registration memory

numbers.

ON: Sets the currently selected Registration

memory number to “ON.”

OFF: Sets the currently selected Registration

memory number to “OFF.”

SELECT: Turns on the Registration memory

numbers that contain the same Voice as the one

which is currently set in the Registration at the

cursor position.

The targeted Registration numbers are underlined.

5 Unifies the currently turned-on

parameter’s values.

You unify the relevant parameter values in each

Registration memory number or offset them. Keep

in mind that you cannot restore the original data

once you change the parameter’s value.

Unifying the currently highlighted

parameter’s value:

Pressing [SET] unifies the currently highlighted

parameter’s values to the one in the currently selected

Registration (at the cursor position). A message appears

prompting you to confirm the operation.

To continue the operation, select [UNIFY]. Select

[CANCEL] to abort the operation.

Offsetting the currently highlighted

parameter’s value:

Pressing the [+]/[-] buttons in the display or using the

Data Control dial offsets the currently highlighted

parameter’s value. If you select Pan as the parameter, the

[ ][ ] buttons are shown instead of [+]/[-].

If you change the value, and if parameter values for some

Registration memory number reach the maximum or

minimum, the following message appears.

In this case, pressing [OK] continues the operation,

ignoring those parameters at maximum or minimum

value. Pressing [CANCEL] aborts the operation.

Parameters in Registrations set to ON will be changed.

Copying Registrations

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

102

Copying Registrations

In the Voice Display, Page 3, you can copy a Registration

stored to a specific Registration Memory number to

another number on a specific section basis (Voices,

rhythm, keyboard percussion). (The function is called

Regist Section Copy.) This is useful, for example, when

you want the upper keyboard Voice in Registration

number 4 to be the same as in Registration number 1.

1 Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on

the panel to call up the Voice Display.

2 Press the [3] button at the top right of

the display to call up Page 3.

3 Press the Registration number button at

the lower left of “COPY FROM.”

To abort the operation press the [CLOSE] button.

4 Press the Voice Section button at the

lower right of “COPY FROM” to select

the Voice Section as source.

To abort the operation press the [CLOSE] button.

Registration number

Section

Copying Registrations

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

103

Registration Memory

5 In the same way, select the COPY TO

Registration number and Regist

Section.

The COPY TO Regist Section depends on the Regist

Section selected for COPY FROM.

NOTE

If you change the source Regist Section after changing the

destination Regist Section the destination may

automatically change to the section selected as the source

Regist Section.

6 Press the [EXECUTE] button in the

SECTION COPY area in the display.

The following display appears, prompting

confirmation of the operation.

7 Press the [COPY] button in the display

to copy the Registration and a message

momentarily appears in the display

indicating that the Registration has

been copied.

Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation.

To copy a Bank:

You can also copy Registration data by Bank. To do this,

select the source Bank in the COPY FROM area, select

the destination Bank in the COPY TO area, then press

the [EXECUTE] button at the right bottom in the display.

To delete the current Bank:

Press the [DELETE] button in the display.

NOTE

Data of Banks that follow the deleted Bank will be moved up to

the previous Bank respectively. For example, deleting the Bank

A will move the data of Bank B to Bank A, Bank C to Bank B,

Bank D to Bank C, and Bank E to Bank D.

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

104

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

The Music Data Recorder (MDR) is a sophisticated recording system built into the Electone that lets you

record your performances and Registration settings to a USB flash drive. Before using a USB flash drive,

carefully read “Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal” section on page 108.

Calling Up the MDR Display

Press the [MDR] button in the panel to call up the MDR

display. All operations related to the MDR, such as

recording and playing your performances, can be done in

the MDR display.

NOTE

The USB flash drives (USB 01, USB 02...) are shown in random

order in the display.

Pressing any button other than the [MDR] button while

the MDR display is open exits from the MDR display. If

you exit from the function inadvertently, simply press the

[MDR] button again to recall the MDR display.

All the instructions in this chapter are related to the MDR

display. To call up the MDR functions and the MDR

display, press the [MDR] button.

Using the MDR Display

The MDR display consists of two display pages: the

SONG Page and the TOOLS Page. In the SONG Page,

you can select a Song, then play it back or record it. The

TOOLS Page has a variety of Song utility operations, such

as copy, delete, rename, etc.

Pressing the [SONG] or [TOOLS] button at the top right

of the display switches between the SONG Page and the

TOOLS Page.

SONG Page

TOOLS Page

Using the MDR Display

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

105

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Current USB Flash Drive/Folder

Displays the currently selected USB flash drive and

folder(s). The left side of the indication (before “:/”)

shows the particular USB flash drive and the right side

shows the path with the currently selected folder name at

the end. For example, “USB 01:/Folder1/” indicates that

the folder named “Folder1” contained in the USB flash

drive is selected.

USB Flash Drive/Folder/Song List

Displays the USB flash drive, folders or Songs. Up to 120

folders can be displayed (5 folders at once).

Scroll buttons

If the USB flash drive/folder/Song list contains more than

5 USB flash drives/folders/Songs, you can scroll through

the display with these buttons.

SETTINGS

Displays/changes the settings for the currently selected

Song.

Reference page

• About the [SETTINGS] button (page 110)

Selects the higher layer folder or USB flash drive. For

example, when “USB 01:/Folder1/” (Folder1 in the USB

flash drive) is selected, pressing the [UP] button selects

“USB 01:/” (USB flash drive).

Selects the next lower (or deeper) layer folder or USB

flash drive. For example, when “USB 01:/ Folder1/”

(Folder1 in the USB flash drive) is selected, pressing the

[IN] button selects “USB 01:/Folder1/SONG/” (the

SONG folder contained in Folder1 of the USB flash

drive).

NOTE

You can execute the same operation also by pressing the

currently selected folder.

Search for the folder/Song in the selected USB flash drive.

Reference page

• Searching for a Song (page 110)

Elapsed time

Displays the elapsed time when recording/playing back a

Song (up to 59 min. 59 sec.).

Song control

Controls Song recording, playback, etc.

Reference pages

• Recording your performance (page 112)

• Playing Back a Song (page 119)

CUSTOM PLAY

Records/plays back only the performance data of the

selected Songs. Using this button does not recall the

Registration data.

SCORE

Displays the selected Song’s score.

Reference page

• Displaying the Score (page 122)

UNIT EDIT

Displays the Unit Edit display for the selected Song’s

Registration data.

Reference pages

• Saving Registrations and Other Data to a Unit (page 116)

• Recalling Recorded Registrations (page 118)

CREATE FOLDER

Creates a new folder in the USB flash drive/folder/Song

list. Up to 120 folders can exist in one USB flash drive or

within a single upper folder. Pressing this button calls up

the New Folder display in which you can enter the

desired name. Enter the name and press the [OK] button

to create a new folder. The method for entering a folder

name is the same as that of the Song name. See page 114.

CHANGE NAME

Changes the folder/Song name.

Reference page

• Changing the Song Name (page 114)

COPY

Copies the selected USB flash drive/folder/Song.

Reference page

• Song copy (page 124)

DELETE

Deletes the selected folder/Song.

Reference page

• Song delete (page 126)

CONVERT

Converts the selected Song for use on another Electone or

other instruments, or converts Songs recorded on

another Electone for use on this Electone. Songs can be

converted to XG format or EL format, and can be

converted from EL format.

Reference pages

• Converting to XG (page 127)

• Converting to EL format (page 128)

• Converting from EL format (page 129)

Using the MDR Display

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

106

INFORMATION

Displays available memory when USB flash drive is

selected and displays information such as the title and

composer when a Song is selected. The information to be

displayed depends on the Songs.

Reference pages

• Checking the remaining memory (page 129)

• About Protected Songs (page 119)

If USB flash drive cannot be found:

1 Press the (UP) button until the

button is grayed out.

The USB flash drive list will be displayed. If there are

more than five media selections, scroll through the

display with the Scroll buttons (page 105) to display

the desired USB flash drive.

If Songs cannot be found:

1 Check the current USB flash drive/folder

(page 105).

2 If the desired Song is stored in the

currently displayed folder, use the Scroll

buttons (page 105) to display the Song.

If the desired Song is stored in a

different folder, use the (UP) and

(IN) buttons to select the folder

in which the desired Song is stored.

If you are not sure of the folder in which the desired

Song is stored, search a Song by using SEARCH

function (page 110).

NOTE

If the message “Registration data will be initialized” is displayed

when you select a folder, press the [INITIALIZE] button. (The

USB flash drive is not initialized.) The message will appear when

recalling a Protected Song.

These icons are shown when you select a USB flash drive,

folder, and Song.

Song icons

Indicates a USB flash drive. This icon is displayed

in the USB flash drive/folder list.

Indicates a folder.

Indicates that write-protect or copy-protect is

effective for the USB flash drive.

Indicates that performance data is contained in

the Song.

Indicates an XG-compatible Song.

Indicates a Protected Original Song. See page 119

for details.

Indicates a Protected Edit Song. See page 119 for

details.

Using the MDR Display

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

107

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

USB flash drive contents: Folders, Songs, and Files

Folders:

A folder is a storage location in the USB flash drive, used to organize multiple Songs in groups. If you’ve saved many

Songs to a USB flash drive, it may be difficult to find the desired Song quickly. Organizing your Songs in folders, with

similar Songs grouped together (for example, according to genre or tempo), makes it easier to find the Songs you

want.

Songs:

A Song is the Electone data for a piece of music, recorded to USB flash drive. A single Song can contain a variety of

data, including the recorded performance, Registrations, and so on.

Files:

A file is an element of data in a Song. For example, a single Song consists of various files, such as Registration files

and performance files. The following files are created with the MDR (The extension will not appear in the Electone

display. They will, however, be displayed on a computer.)

In addition, one file (extension: .nam) is automatically created in each folder for organization/maintenance of the

folder contents. It does not appear on the Electone display.

Song

Song Song Song

Song 1

Song 4

Folder A

Folder B

Creating

folders

USB flash drive USB flash drive

Files in the Song

File Explanation

Extension

Performance data This file contains performance data, played on the keyboards and pedals of the Electone. .mid

Registration data This file contains Registration settings, User Voices, User rhythms, and Rhythm Sequences. .b00

XG-converted data This file contains XG Song data, for which Electone performance data is converted to XG-

compatible format.

.mid

Using the MDR Display

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

108

This instrument is equipped with the three [USB TO

DEVICE] terminals as follows:

• Two [USB TO DEVICE] terminals at the right front of

the keyboard.

• One [USB TO DEVICE] terminal at the rear side of the

instrument.

NOTE

For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to

the owner’s manual of the USB device.

Compatible USB devices

• USB flash drive

• USB wireless LAN adaptor

Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or

mouse cannot be used.

Although USB devices 1.1 to 3.0 can be used on this

instrument, the amount of time for saving to or loading

from the USB device may differ depending on the type of

data or the status of the instrument.

The instrument does not necessarily support all

commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot

guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase.

Before purchasing a USB device for use with this

instrument, please visit the following web page:

http://download.yamaha.com/

NOTE

The rating of the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal is a maximum of 5V/

500mA. Do not connect USB devices having a rating above this,

since this can cause damage to the instrument itself.

Connecting USB device

When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on the

device is appropriate and that it is connected in the

proper direction.

NOTICE

• Avoid connecting or disconnecting the USB flash drive

while executing playback/recording and file management

operations (such as Save, Copy, Delete and Format), or

when accessing the USB flash drive. Failure to observe

this may result in “freezing” of the operation of the

instrument or corruption of the USB flash drive and the

data.

• When connecting then disconnecting the USB flash drive

(and vice versa), make sure to wait more than 6 seconds

between the two operations.

• When connecting a USB cable, make sure that the length

is less than 3 meters.

NOTE

When you use a USB device other than a USB flash drive,

connect it to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal at the rear side of

the instrument.

By connecting the instrument to a USB flash drive, you

can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as

well as read data from the connected device.

Maximum number of USB flash drives

allowed

Up to three USB flash drives can be connected to the

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

Formatting USB flash drive

You should format the USB flash drive only with this

instrument (page 109). A USB flash drive formatted on

another device may not operate properly.

NOTICE

The format operation overwrites any previously existing

data. Make sure that the USB flash drive you are formatting

does not contain important data. Proceed with caution,

especially when connecting multiple USB flash drive.

Turning off the instrument

When turning off the instrument, make sure that the

instrument is NOT accessing the USB flash drive by

playback/recording or file management (such as during

Save, Copy, Delete and Format operations). Failure to do

so may corrupt the device and the data.

Precautions when using the

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal

Using USB flash drives

Formatting a USB Flash Drive

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

109

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Formatting a USB Flash

Drive

If you find that you are unable to use a new, blank USB

flash drive or an old one that has been used with other

devices, you may need to format it.

Formatting erases all the data in the USB flash drive and

makes it ready to record. The data erased by formatting

will be lost permanently. Check whether or not the USB

flash drive contains any important data you wish to keep

before executing the operation. Proceed with caution,

especially when connecting multiple USB storage media.

NOTE

Before purchasing a USB flash drive, please consult your

Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor for advice,

or see the Yamaha website:

http://download.yamaha.com/

1 Connect the USB flash drive to the [USB

TO DEVICE] terminal.

2 Press the [TOOLS] button at the top

right of the display to call up the TOOLS

Page.

3 Press the (UP) button repeatedly

if necessary until the button is grayed

out.

4 Select the desired USB flash drive you

want to format.

The indications USB 01, USB 02, etc. will be

displayed depending on the number of the

connected USB flash drives.

5 Press the [FORMAT] button in the

display.

A message appears, prompting confirmation of the

operation. Select [FORMAT] to format the USB

flash drive, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation.

NOTICE

Do not remove the USB flash drive while formatting.

Selecting a Song

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

110

Selecting a Song

In the MDR display, you can select a blank Song to which

you want to record your performance or save the

Registration settings, or you can select a desired Song for

playback.

In the MDR display, Songs in the currently selected USB

flash drives are displayed.

First call up the desired USB flash drive (and folder, if

necessary) in the display, then select the desired Song.

1 Check the currently selected USB flash

drive at the top of the display.

Confirm that the desired USB flash drive is

displayed at the top of the display.

NOTICE

Do not remove the USB flash drive while it is being

accessed by the instrument. (If you are using a USB

flash drive which has a lamp, the lamp will flash when

the instrument is accessing the USB flash drive.)

For information on selecting the desired USB flash

drive, see page 106.

2 Press desired Song button in the

display.

Referring to the Song name and icons, select the

desired Song. The selected Song button is

highlighted in orange.

Reference pages

• Changing the Song Name (page 114)

• Song icons (page 106)

Reference pages

• Playing back the selected part(s) (page 120)

• Changing the tempo (page 121)

Search for a desired Song by using the Search function.

1 Insert the USB flash drive containing

the desired folder/Song.

2 Select the USB flash drive containing

the folder/Song.

NOTE

Regardless of the current path, the Search operation will

be applied to the entire contents of the USB flash drive.

Currently selected USB flash drive/folder

Song containing data

Blank Song (containing no data)

About the [SETTINGS] button

Pressing the (SETTINGS) button calls up a

display of the currently selected Song, letting you confirm

the tempo and parts that are played when playing the Song.

When playing back the Song (by pressing the [ ] (Play)

button), only those parts that are set to “PLAY” in the

display actually play at the indicated tempo (over a range of

50% to 200% of the original tempo when recording). If the

Song contains no performance data, all parts are set to

“OFF.” Pressing the [PART SAVE] button saves each part

playback setting (the tempo is not saved).

Searching for a Song

Selecting a Song

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

111

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

3 Press the [SEARCH] button in the

display.

NOTE

Previous searched data can be shown on the display.

However, the data does not appear if you’ve turned off the

power, removed the USB flash drive or saved the Song

after performing the search operation.

4 Press the [KEYWORD] button.

5 Enter the folder/Song name for

searching.

If necessary, press the [DELETE] button so that the

previous key word can be deleted, then enter the

new key word. (See page 114 for instructions on

changing the Song name.)

NOTE

• This function does not distinguish between capital and

lowercase letters.

• When searching for XG Songs, entering the extension

“.mid” is unnecessary.

6 Press the [OK] button.

The search will begin, and the detected folder/Song

name will be shown on the display.

To cancel the Search operation, press the

[INTERRUPT] button.

7 Confirm the detected folder/Song name.

8 Press the desired folder/Song.

The display will automatically exit from the

SEARCH display and the selected folder/Song

appears.

If nothing is detected, try the search again by using

another name (see step 4 above).

Previous key word

Detected folder/

Song list

Displayed data number

Detected number

Recording

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

112

Recording

Set the desired Registrations on the Electone. Make all

the Electone settings necessary for the Song you will

record. This means entering the all Registrations you will

need for the entire performance in the Registration

Memory. Make sure also to select the Registration that

you will use at the beginning of the Song.

NOTICE

Never attempt to remove the USB flash drive or turn the

power off during recording, reading or playback.

1 Insert a USB flash drive to the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal.

2 Select a blank Song for recording your

performance.

For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.

If you want to overwrite an existing Song already

containing performance data, you will need to delete

it beforehand.

3 Press the [SONG] button at the top right

of the display to call up the SONG Page,

then select the [ ] (Record) button.

The following display appears, indicating that you

can record your performance.

NOTE

If a message appears indicating there is not enough free

space in USB flash drive, press the [CANCEL] button, then

delete any unnecessary Songs if possible or insert new

USB flash drive. To continue recording your performance

on USB flash drive that does not have enough space,

press the [CONTINUE] button.

4 Press the [ ] (Play) button.

An hourglass icon appears at the bottom left of the

display, indicating that Registration data is currently

being read.

NOTE

Regardless of the currently selected Unit number, the

recording operation will save data other than your

performance to the first Unit of the Song. This is why

pressing the [

] (Record) button will call up the dialog to

confirm whether OK or not to save data to the first Unit

when the Registration Unit other than the first Unit is

loaded. In this situation, pressing [OK] will go to the

Recording Standby mode while pressing [CANCEL] will

exit from the Recording mode.

5 After the hourglass disappears, begin

playing.

6 When you finish playing, press the

[ ] (Stop) button in the display.

The recording is finished and the LCD returns to the

MDR display. The Song to which your performance

is recorded is automatically named “SONG_XXX”

(XXX indicates Song number). You can change the

Song name as desired. (For details, see page 114.)

NOTICE

Do not remove the USB flash drive from the Electone

while data is being recorded (while the hourglass icon

or other message is shown).

If you make a mistake during recording, you can re-

record the Song from the beginning.

1 Press the [ ] (Record) button while the

Song is still running.

This automatically stops recording and returns you

to the starting point of the Song.

Recording your performance

Re-recording (Retry)

Recording

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

113

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

2 Press the [ ] (Play) or [CUSTOM PLAY]

button to begin rerecording the Song.

Re-recording starts from the beginning of the Song

and replaces the previously recorded performance

with the newly recorded performance.

NOTE

Pressing the [ ] (Stop) button cancels the re-recording

and records the previous performance. If you want to re-

record the performance only using the same Registration,

select the Song which you want to re-record and delete the

performance data only, and then record the performance.

You can also record the parts of your performance

independently. This function lets you record Keyboard

Percussion and performance control data, such as

Registration changes and expression pedal operation,

separately from the other parts of the Song.

Even Keyboard Percussion 1 and Lead Voice 1 Voices can

be recorded separately, though, the Lead Voice 2 Voices

will be included in the performance data of the Upper

Keyboard. The following instruction is an example: First,

record the chords and bass to the Song using the Lower

and Pedalboard, and then record the melody using the

Upper Keyboard.

NOTE

The Lead Voice 2 and the Keyboard Percussion 2 cannot be

recorded to each part separately.

1 Follow steps 1 – 3 on page 112 to call up

the Rec Standby display.

2 Select the parts for recording.

Each pressing of a part button switches the status:

PLAY, OFF, and REC.

PLAY: Playback the parts that have been recorded.

OFF: Recording or playback is not active.

REC: Records the part.

If you set the Upper part to “REC,” the performance

on the Upper Keyboard (including Lead Voice 1

Voices) is recorded. Setting Lead to “REC,” however,

records only the Lead Voice 1 Voices. You cannot set

both Upper and Lead to “REC” at the same time;

neither can the Lower and Keyboard Percussion

parts be recorded at the same time.

NOTE

When you record the Keyboard Percussion, make sure that

the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button is set to on.

The following setting lets you record only Lower

Keyboard and Pedalboard parts.

NOTE

You should also set the Control button to “REC,” in order to

record Registration changes and expression pedal

operation.

3 Press the [ ] (Play) button, and start

playing after the hourglass icon

disappears.

4 Press the [ ] (Stop) button when you

are finished with your performance to

stop recording.

Now you’ve recorded the first parts of your

performance.

5 Press the [ ] (Record) button to set up

recording of the next part — Upper part

in this case.

A message appears prompting confirmation of

operation. Select [OVERWRITE] to overwrite and

the Rec Standby display appears.

6 Select the parts for recording.

Set the next parts you want to record (in this case,

the Upper part) to “REC.”

Also set the part already recorded (in this case

Lower and Pedal parts) to “PLAY,” so you can hear

the previously recorded parts as you record new

ones.

7 Change the playback tempo for the

selected part.

The playback tempo can be set over a range of 50%

to 200% of the original.

The original recorded tempo is 100%; values less

than 100% result in a slower tempo while values

greater than 100% result in a faster tempo.

NOTE

Use the TEMPO [RESET] button in the display to reset the

tempo to its original value (100%).

Recording specified parts only

Changing the Song Name

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

114

8 Press the [CUSTOM PLAY] button to

start recording of the part selected in

step 6 (Upper part).

Playback of the previously recorded parts starts

immediately.

The [CUSTOM PLAY] button is used here to record

only the parts that have been selected for recording,

and plays back only those parts that have been

selected for playback. While you listen to the parts

being played back, start playing the melody on the

Upper Keyboard.

When the end of the recorded performance is

reached, playback is automatically stopped. The

length of a subsequently recorded part cannot

exceed the length of the previously recorded parts.

This lets you re-record a specific phrase or section which

you don’t want to use, either that of a specific part(s) or

all parts.

NOTE

This function is best used when the phrase to be re-recorded

has definite beginning and end points, with slight pauses before

and after.

1 Select the Song which contains the

phrase you want to change.

For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.

2 Press the [ ] (Play) button to start

playback of the Song.

3 Press the [ ] (Pause) button at the

point you want to execute punch-in

recording.

4 Press the [ ] (Record) button.

The Recording display appears, indicating that the

Music Data Recorder is ready to record.

5 Set the parts which you want to change

to “REC” status and other parts to

“PLAY.”

6 Press the [ ] (Play) button to start

punch-in recording. Play the new

phrase, as you want it to be changed.

7 Press the [ ] (Stop) button to quit the

punch-in recording as soon as you

reach the end of the phrase.

Changing the Song Name

You can name the Song, such as giving it a title or

indicating the date on which it was recorded. However,

Song names of EL-series Electones, such as the EL-900,

cannot be changed.

NOTE

When you change the name of an XG Song, the extension (.mid)

cannot be changed.

1 Select the Song whose name you want

to change.

For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.

2 Press the [TOOLS] button at the top

right of the display to call up the TOOLS

Page.

3 Press the [CHANGE NAME] button.

The following display appears.

4 Move the cursor to the desired point by

using the [ ] [ ] buttons in the display

or the Data Control dial.

Punch-in recording

Cursor

Changing the Song Name

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

115

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

5 Select the desired character type:

alphabet, upper or lowercase, or

symbol.

NOTE

If you select Japanese as the Language in the Utility

display (page 16), you can also select Japanese language

characters (hiragana and kanji, normal size katakana, half

size katakana, full size alphabet, and full size symbols).

6 Select the desired character for entry.

A Song name can contain up to 50 characters.

NOTE

An XG Song name can contain up to 46 characters.

7 After finished, select [OK] to actually

enter the name.

The LCD will return to the TOOLS Page display.

To delete an entered character:

1 Move the cursor to the character you

want to delete.

2 Press the [DELETE] button at the

bottom right in the display.

The character is deleted.

To convert into kanji (Japanese

language):

This applies only if you are using the (Kana-Kan)

button in Japanese.

1 When the input “Hiragana” characters

are shown in the reverse display

(highlighted), press the (kanji-

conversion) button once or several

times to convert to the characters into

the appropriate kanji.

• The reversed area can be changed by the [ ] [ ]

buttons in the display or the Data Control dial.

• The converted area can be cleared at once by

pressing the (cancel) button.

2 To actually enter the change, press the

[OK] button or enter the next character.

To enter the hiragana character itself

(without converting it), press the

(delete) button.

Cursor

A “name is not available” message may appear when

you press the [OK] button to finish entering the

name. If this message appears, the name is invalid

and you should enter another name.

NOTE

Songs are ordered in the following sequence: symbol,

number, alphabet, hiragana, kanji, other symbols. Names

with an asterisk (*) at the top are exceptions to this rule.

The following names cannot be used. (“xx” indicates

numbers.)

MDR_xx.EVT SONG_xxx

MDR_xx.MID MDR_xxx.TMP

MDR_xx.Bxx REG_xxx.TMP

MDR_xx.Vxx ELS_SONG.TMP

SONG.NAM SONG_xxx.C02

ELS_SONG.NAM TMP

MDR_xxx.MID TMP.E02

REG_xxx.B00

Saving Registrations and Other Data to a Unit

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

116

Saving Registrations and

Other Data to a Unit

You can also record Registration Memory data and other

created data without recording a performance, as listed

below. The data will be saved to a Unit (page 96) of the

selected Song.

• Registration Memory related data (including the

Registration Shift settings)

•User Voice data

• Keyboard Percussion data

•User Rhythm data

• Rhythm Sequence data

1 Select the destination (blank Song) to

which the created Registration Memory

data and other data will be saved.

For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.

2 Press the [UNIT EDIT] button at the

lower right section in the display to call

up the Unit Edit display.

3 Make sure that all data types you want

to load are selected, then press the

[SAVE] button, followed by the [CLOSE]

button in the display.

A message appears on the display, indicating the

data is currently being saved.

After the message disappears, press the [CLOSE]

button to return to the SONG page, then “SONG

XXX” (XXX: number) is assigned as Song name to

the destination Song.

When you want to use various Registrations exceeding

five Registration Banks (one Unit), you should save

additional Registration Units to a Song.

Reference pages

• Next Unit (page 98)

• Programming a Registration Sequence (page 170)

1 Select the destination Song which

includes Registration data.

For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.

2 Press the [UNIT EDIT] button at the right

lower section in the display to call up

the Unit Edit display.

At the left side in the display, the Registration Unit

list of the current Song is shown, such as “UNIT 1”

and “UNIT 2.”

3 Press the blank button at the lowest

position of the Registration Unit list.

4 Press the [SAVE] button.

This operation will add a new Unit next to the

lowest Unit.

NOTE

The above operation will simply create a new Unit which

will not be called up via Song playback, etc. To call up the

newly created Unit, set the order of the Registration Unit

(page 117), then make the Next Unit settings of

Registration Shift (page 97) and Registration Sequence

(page 170). Note that changing the Unit via the Next Unit

may result in no sound from the Electone for a few

seconds when User Voice data differ between the current

Unit and the next Unit.

This operation lets you replace just the Registration Unit

without changing the performance data in already

recorded Song data.

1 Select a Song containing the

performance data.

For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.

2 Press the [UNIT EDIT] button in the

display to call up the Unit Edit display.

The Registration Unit list is shown.

3 Select the Registration Unit you wish to

overwrite.

Creating two or more

Registration Units in a Song

Overwriting Registration data to

a Unit

Saving Registrations and Other Data to a Unit

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

117

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

4 Press the [SAVE] button.

A message appears, prompting confirmation of

overwriting the Registration Unit. Press

[OVERWRITE] to overwrite (replace), or press

[CANCEL] to abort the operation.

NOTE

Also with the following operations, only Registrations and other

data (excepting performance data) can be recorded.

1. Select the desired Song number to which you want to record.

2. Press the [ ] (Record) button to set recording to standby.

3. Press the [ ] (Play) button, then press the [ ] (Stop) button

without playing the keyboard.

To call up another Registration Unit from the

Registration Shift (page 97) and Registration Sequence

(page 170) as the Next Unit, you should change the order

of the Registration Units as desired on the Unit Edit

display.

NOTE

The first Unit (located at the top) will be called up first after Song

playback starts.

1 From the SONG page, select a Song

which contains two or more

Registration Units.

For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.

2 Press the [UNIT EDIT] button in the

display to call up the Unit Edit display.

3 Change the order of the Registration

Units.

From the Registration Unit list at the left end in the

display, select the desired Unit then use the MOVE

buttons to move the order of the selected Unit.

Registration Unit list

Lists the Registration Units included in the current Song.

When the current Song contains five or more

Registration Units, the scroll button can be used

to scroll through the Registration Unit list. The selected

Unit is highlighted in orange.

MOVE buttons

Moves the Registration Unit selected at up or down

one by one.

DATA TO BE LOADED

When loading the Registration Unit selected at , use

these buttons to select only the desired data. For more

information, see page 118.

LOAD

Loads the Registration Unit selected at according to

the settings of .

SAVE

Saves the Registration Memory data to the Registration

Unit selected at .

COPY

Creates the copy of the Registration Unit selected at ,

and then locates the copied Unit at the bottom of the

Registration Unit list ( ).

DELETE

Deletes the Registration Unit selected at .

4 Press the [CLOSE] button at the top

right in the display to close the Unit Edit

display.

Changing the order of the

Registration Units

Recalling Recorded Registrations

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

118

Recalling Recorded

Registrations

Registrations (and bulk data) recorded to Song numbers

can be easily loaded back to the Electone by the following

procedure. The MDR independently recalls the following

five types of data:

•REGIST

•USER VOICE

•K.B.P.

• USER RHYTHM

•SEQUENCE

You can select and recall the desired data independently.

1 Insert the USB flash drive and select the

Song you want to load back to the

Electone.

For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.

2 Press [UNIT EDIT] button in the display

to call up the Unit Edit display.

3 Select the Unit you want to load to the

Electone.

4 Using the five “DATA TO BE LOADED”

buttons, select the desired data you

want to load.

NOTE

When you load the Registration data by using the Next

Unit function, all data will be loaded no matter which

buttons you select here.

5 Press the [LOAD] button.

A message appears, prompting confirmation of the

operation. Press the [LOAD] button to load the

Registration data.

Press [CANCEL] to cancel the operation.

NOTE

If you load a Registration while a rhythm is playing,

sequence data and User rhythms in the Registration data

cannot be loaded.

6 Exit from the Unit Edit display by

pressing the [CLOSE] button at the top

right of the display.

When you select the Protected Song, the buttons

(DATA TO BE LOADED) may be unavailable

(grayed out). For example, combining a part of one

Protected Song with another Protected Song is not

allowed.

Playing Back a Song

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

119

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Playing Back a Song

This section describes how to play back a Song recorded

with the MDR and the commercially available Song data

which can be played back with the MDR

1 Select the Song to be played back.

For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.

2 Press the [ ] (Play) button in the

display to start playback.

When the Song contains only the Registration

data (without performance data):

Depending on the Song, no note icon is shown by

the file name, indicating that only Registration data

is included and there is no performance data.

Starting playback of such a Song will load only

Registration data (an hourglass icon appears), and

then return operation to the SONG page.

When a Song contains both Registration data

and performance data:

Starting playback of such a Song will load only

Registration data (an hourglass icon appears), and

then begin actual playback of the performance data.

When the Song contains only the

performance data:

Starting playback of such a Song will start playback

of the performance data immediately.

Reference page

• Changing the order of the Registration Units (page 117)

3 When you want to stop playback, press

the [ ] (Stop) button on the display.

Although playback will stop automatically as soon as

playback position reaches to the end of the Song

data, you can stop playback at the middle of the

performance data by pressing the [ ] (Stop) button

on the display.

NOTE

• When two or more Units are included in the current Song,

starting playback will load the Registration Unit shown at

the top in the Unit Edit display.

• Registration data is generally not included in most Song

data, such as commercially available XG Songs created

on instruments other than the Electone.

About Protected Songs

If you buy or download Song data, it may be

protected so that you cannot delete or copy, in order

to prevent accidental erasure or protect copyright.

These are called Protected Songs. Protected Songs

can be saved to a USB flash drive confirmed by

Yamaha. A Protected Song can be played back in the

same way as Songs you’ve created, but it cannot be

converted to XG format or EL format. It is not

possible to edit the Registration data in the Protected

Song, nor can the performance data be overwritten. If

you want to edit a Protected Song, first copy it within

one USB flash drive/folder, then edit the copy. (You

cannot copy to another USB flash drive/folder.) The

copied Song (called “Protected Edit Song”) is

available only when the original Song (called

“Protected Original Song”) exists in the same folder.

Be careful not to delete the Protected Original Song.

NOTICE

When you want to edit a Protected Song, first initialize

the Registration Memory, then select the desired Song.

If you have not initialized the Registration first, the

edited Song may not be saved.

NOTICE

To move the Protected Song in a USB flash drive with a

computer, you’ll need to use the Musicsoft Downloader

application. If you move the Song without Musicsoft

Downloader, the Song cannot be played back. Musicsoft

Downloader can be obtained at the following Internet

address: http://download.yamaha.com/

Folder

Protected

Original Song

Protected

Edit Song

Copy

You cannot edit

this Song

You can edit this Song,

only when it is in the folder

that contains a Protected

Original Song.

Playing Back a Song

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

120

You can also play back selected parts of your recorded

performance, while other parts are temporarily turned

off. This function is especially useful for playing a single

part, such as the melody, over previously recorded

accompaniment parts.

To play back the selected part(s):

During playback or in the Settings display, press each part

button to turn the part you want to playback to “PLAY”

and the part you want to mute to “OFF.” Each pressing of

a part button switches the status between PLAY and OFF.

Pressing the [PART SAVE] button saves each part’s

playback status.

Reference page

• About the [SETTINGS] button (page 110)

To play back the selected part(s) of XG-

compatible Song data:

Press the Part [XG] button while XG-compatible Song

data is being played back.

The following XG PART SETUP display appears.

Reference page

• Converting to XG (page 127)

Press the appropriate channel buttons (e.g., the [CH1]

button) to set each channel to playback or mute. Each

pressing of a button switches the status: PLAY and OFF.

Set a part to [PLAY] if you want it to play back and [OFF]

if you do not.

The [ALL] button enables you to switch all channels to

PLAY/OFF at once.

To set each channel’s volume use the sliders. Each

channel’s volume can be adjusted between 0 and 100.

The [ALL] slider adjusts the overall volume.

Fast forward and Rewind:

During playback, press the [ ] (Fast forward) button

or [ ] (Rewind) button and hold it down until the

time reaches the desired position.

Even when the button is released, playback is paused. To

resume playback from the point you’ve advanced or

reversed to, press the [ ] (Play) button or [CUSTOM

PLAY] button.

Pause:

If you want to temporarily stop playback of the Song or

Songs, press the [ ](Pause) button.

To resume playback from the point at which the Song was

paused, press the [ ](Play) button or [CUSTOM PLAY]

button.

Custom Play

If you want to play back a Song without resetting the

Registrations, press the [CUSTOM PLAY] button

instead of the [ ] (Play) button. This displays the

Song time and starts playback immediately.

When you play a Song using the Next Unit function,

always press the [ ] (Play) button to start the Song,

not the [CUSTOM PLAY] button.

Playing back the selected part(s)

Fast forward, Rewind and Pause

Playing Back a Song

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

121

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

You can change the tempo of the Song as the Song is

playing in the MDR display, either while the Song is

stopped or while it is playing.

NOTE

Only for Song data (recording of your performance) indicated

with the e mark can the tempo be changed during playback.

To change the tempo:

Use the TEMPO buttons in the display or the

Data Control dial to change the tempo. (The TEMPO

buttons on the panel cannot be used to change the tempo

for the Music Data Recorder.) The range is 50 – 200%.

The original recorded tempo is 100% and values less than

100% indicate slower tempo; values greater than 100%

indicate faster tempo.

To reset the changed tempo:

Use the TEMPO [RESET] button in the display to reset

the tempo to its original value (100%).

This feature allows you to repeatedly play back either all

Songs in a folder or only one specific Song.

1 Select the Song you wish to play back.

If you wish to play back all Songs in a folder, select

the first Song that will be played back. For details on

selecting a Song, see page 110.

2 Press the [SONG] button at the top right

of the display to call up the SONG Page.

3 Press the (SETTINGS) button on

the panel to call up the Settings display.

4 Press the REPEAT button to select the

repeat mode.

Each press of the button switches among the modes.

Changing the tempo Repeat playback

REPEAT button

Displaying the Score

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

122

SINGLE

Repeats the currently selected Song indefinitely.

ALL

Repeats all Songs in the currently selected folder in

order.

RANDOM

Repeats all Songs in the currently selected folder

randomly.

OFF

Cancels repeat playback.

5 Exit from the Settings display by

pressing the (FINISH) button at

the top right of the display.

6 Press the [ ] (Play) button in the SONG

Page to begin playback.

Displaying the Score

The MDR display can display music notation (score) of

the performance data recorded to USB flash drive. You

can change the size and the number of staffs to be

displayed.

While a Song is being played back, the cursor moves

according to the performance and the pages are

automatically turned.

1 Select the Song containing performance

data.

For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.

2 Press the [SCORE] button in the display.

The currently selected Song score will be displayed.

NOTE

Scores for Protected Songs cannot be displayed,

excepting those Songs that specifically allow score

display.

3 Press the [ ] (Play) button in the

display to start playing back the Song.

As the Song plays back, the cursor moves

accordingly and the page is automatically turned at

the appropriate point.

In this condition, pressing the [ ] (Record) button

in the display lets you record a Song and have the

score displayed for you.

Displaying the Score

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

123

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

The score size can be adjusted by pressing the [SIZE

CHANGE] button in the display. Each press of the

[SIZE CHANGE] button alternates the score size in

the following sequence: normal, large, extra large,

small, normal, and so on.

Please note that the size cannot be changed while a

Song is being recorded.

NOTE

The score size setting cannot be stored to a Registration

Memory.

4 You can manually turn score “pages” by

first stopping playback of the Song by

using the [ ] (Stop) or [ ](Pause)

button, and then pressing the PAGE [ ]

or [ ] buttons in the display.

Pressing these buttons moves to the previous or next

page. The PAGE [ ] button can be assigned to the

left foot switch (page 123).

5 To exit the score, press the [SCORE

OFF] button in the display.

The Score Settings display lets you choose the contents to

be displayed. In this display, you can also assign the Next

Page function to the left foot switch:

1 Display the score.

2 Press the [SET UP] button in the display

to call up the SCORE SETTINGS display.

NOTE

Please note that the score settings cannot be changed

while the Song is being recorded. The [SET UP] button is

disabled during recording.

3 Change the score settings.

To set whether a specific part is displayed or not in

the score, press the appropriate [ON] or [OFF]

buttons of each part. Please note that at least one of

the upper keyboard, lower keyboard or pedalboard

will be set to [ON].

Available settings for notes and how they will be

displayed (NOTE) include [A, B, C] (conventional

C-D-E indications), [FIXED DO] (solfeggio),

[MOVABLE DO] (relative solfeggio) and [OFF].

For the CH SETTINGS, the upper keyboard, lower

keyboard and pedalboard can be assigned to the

channels with the [] and [] buttons. You can

Changing the score contents

and settings

Other Functions (Tools)

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

124

also use the Data Control dial to select channels

after pressing the [] or [] button.

Selecting [AUTO] automatically assigns parts to the

channels according to the Song data.

To set the QUANTIZE value use the [] and []

buttons. You can also use the Data Control dial to

select channels after pressing the [] or [] button.

The shorter the selected note value, the more

precisely the score is displayed.

Setting the NEXT PAGE L. Foot SW [ON] lets you

turn the score to the next page with the left foot

switch. You can also turn the score to the next page

with the PAGE [ ] button in the display. If rhythm,

glide and/or rotary speaker are assigned to the left

foot switch and set on, both the assigned functions

and the Next Page function work.

NOTE

• The score display settings cannot be stored to a

Registration Memory. However, the ON/OFF setting of

turning pages using the left foot switch can be saved to

the Unit as Registration data common to all the

Registration Memory numbers.

• Setting the NOTE to [MOVABLE DO] displays each key

note as “Do.”

Reference page

• About Quantize (page 151)

4 Exit from the SCORE SETTINGS display

by pressing the [CLOSE] button at the

top right of the display.

Other Functions (Tools)

The TOOLS Page in the MDR display has many

functions, such as Song copy, Song delete, etc.

This function lets you copy a folder/Song. You can copy

and exchange the data even between two different USB

flash drives. (For Songs created on EL-series instruments,

such as the EL-900, one-by-one copy cannot be

executed.) Make sure to check the remaining memory of

the destination media in advance.

NOTE

• If the folder already contains 120 XG Songs the Songs can not be

copied, or if the folder already contains 120 folders the folder can

not be copied.

• A Song having a name/path that is too long may not be copied to

the root directory, even if the amount of folders/XG Songs has not

reached the maximum capacity.

• The Copy operation is automatically stopped if there is an

unrecognizable file in MDR

Song copy

Moving a Protected Song

A Protected Song can be copied within a folder, but it

cannot be copied to another folder or USB flash

drive. If you specify another folder or USB flash drive

as the copy destination, a message appears prompting

moving of the Song — but not copying. When the

[MOVE] button is pressed, the Protected Original

Song and all Protected Edit Songs which come from

the same Protected Original Song will be moved

together. This effectively “moves” a Protected Song,

but does not “copy” it.

If you copy a folder which contains both Non-

protected Songs and Protected Songs, the copy

operation will be automatically executed for only

Non-protected Songs, and Protected Song will be

moved (not copied).

NOTE

If you copy a Protected Song to the same folder as the

source Song, the copied Song will be the Protected Edit

Song.

Other Functions (Tools)

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

125

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

To copy a Song:

You can copy Song data within the USB flash drive, and

also to another USB flash drive.

Connect the USB flash drive containing the Song and (if

necessary) a USB flash drive for the copy destination to

the [USB TO DEVICE] terminals, then follow the

instructions below.

NOTICE

Insert the USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal

firmly. If the USB flash drive is not inserted firmly, the data

may be lost.

1 Select the folder/Song/USB flash drive

to be copied.

For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.

2 Press the [TOOLS] button at the top

right of the display to call up the TOOLS

Page.

3 Press the [COPY] button in the display

to call up the COPY TO display.

4 (If necessary) Change the destination.

For details on changing the destination, see

page 110.

5 Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute

the copy.

The folder/Song name in the destination is the same

as the one of the source Song. If you copy a folder/

Song to a folder that contains a Song whose name is

the same as the source Song, the copied name will be

“source Song name_XXX” (XXX indicates Song

number). If you want to change the folder/Song

name, see page 114.

If you copy an XG-compatible Song to another

folder or USB flash drive that contains a Song with

the same name as the source Song, a message

appears prompting confirmation of overwriting the

Song. Selecting [OVERWRITE] overwrites the XG-

compatible Song in the destination.

NOTICE

• Never attempt to eject the USB flash drive or turn the

power off during copying (or moving a Protected

Song). Data may be lost.

• Removing the USB flash drive during operation may

result in loss of the data. Never attempt to remove

the USB flash drive unless the “Eject the source

media” message appears.

NOTE

• While the copy operation is in progress, the approximate

time of copying appears on the display; keep in mind that

the actual time necessary may differ.

• If the USB flash drive copy is executed, the folder name

“#MEDIA” will be created in the destination folder.

• If the message “The source folder hierarchy is too deep”

is displayed, copy each folder in the folder, one by one

manually.

• If the “Path name is too long” message is displayed,

change the hierarchy or rename the folder name to make

it shorter.

• The copy operation will automatically be stopped if an

unrecognizable file is detected in the folder.

How to cancel the folder copy operation

If you want to cancel the folder copy operation while

the copy operation is in progress, press the

[CANCEL] button.

Keep in mind, however, that cancelling the operation

may take a long time, since the operation is stopped

only after all files in the current folder are copied.

If you cancel the operation, make sure to check which

files have been properly copied and which have not.

Other Functions (Tools)

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

126

Instructions when only one [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal is available:

It is recommended that you use connect both USB flash

drives (source and destination) to the [USB TO DEVICE]

terminals. However, if there are not enough terminals

available, you can copy a Song by following the procedure

below.

Folder copy cannot be executed with this procedure.

1 Follow steps 1 – 3 on page 125.

2 Press the (UP) button several

times until the Media List is displayed.

3 Select “MEMORY” as the destination.

4 Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute

the Song Copy.

The Song to be copied is copied to the internal

memory of the Electone. The message “Eject the

source media” will appear on the display.

NOTE

If you want to abort the operation, press the [CANCEL]

button.

NOTICE

Never attempt to turn the power off during copying of a

Protected Song. Data may be lost.

5 Eject the source USB flash drive.

After ejecting the source USB flash drive, the

message “Insert the destination media” will appear

on the display.

6 Insert the destination USB flash drive to

which you want to copy.

7 Select the destination.

For details on specifying the destination, see

page 110.

8 Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute

Song Copy. Select [CLOSE] or

[CANCEL] to abort the operation.

The Song is copied with the same name as the

source Song. If you copy a Song to a folder that

contains a Song whose name is the same as the

source Song, the copied Song name will be “source

Song name_XXX” (XXX indicates Song number).

If you copy an XG-compatible Song to another

folder or USB flash drive that contains a Song with

the same name as the source Song, a message

appears prompting confirmation of overwriting the

Song. Selecting [OVERWRITE] overwrites the XG-

compatible Song in the destination.

If you want to change the Song name, see page 114.

NOTE

By pressing the [CANCEL] button, you can cancel the

operation which is being executed, then return the

Protected Song to the original USB flash drive. For details,

follow the on-screen instructions.

You can delete the data of one Song. You can specify for

deletion only Registration data, only the performance

data, or both (entire Song). Also, only the Songs created

on this Electone and XG-compatible Songs can be

deleted. Songs created on the EL series instruments such

as the EL-900 cannot be deleted.

1 Select the Song to be deleted.

For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.

2 Press the [TOOLS] button at the top

right of the display to call up the TOOLS

Page.

When moving a data-heavy Protected

Song:

When the Song being moved contains a large amount

of data, the move operation cannot be completed in a

single pass. In such a case, repeat steps 6 to 8 by

following the on-screen instructions.

Song delete

Other Functions (Tools)

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

127

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

3 Press the [DELETE] button in the

display.

A message appears, prompting confirmation of the

operation.

Confirm that the Song to be deleted is shown in the

display. If you want to change the Song, press the

[CANCEL] button and select the desired Song.

4 Press the button of the specific data you

want to delete (“DELETE ALL,”

“DELETE REGIST” or “DELETE

PERFORMANCE”). The selected data

will be deleted.

• DELETE ALL: Deletes the entire Song.

• DELETE REGIST: Deletes only Registration

data in the Song.

• DELETE PERFORMANCE: Deletes only

performance data in the Song.

Pressing [CANCEL] aborts the operation.

When deleting folders, Songs with only

registration, Songs with only

performance data, Protected Songs or

XG-compatible Songs:

Select [DELETE] to actually delete the data, or select

[CANCEL] to abort the operation.

Song data recorded on this Electone can be converted to

XG-compatible data which can be played back by XG-

compatible devices. Before executing the conversion,

confirm that the USB flash drive contains enough

amount of available memory.

NOTE

• The converted XG Song data may sound differently from the

original data.

• Protected Songs cannot be converted.

1 Select a Song to be converted to XG.

For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.

2 Press the [TOOLS] button at the top

right of the display to call up the TOOLS

Page.

3 Press the [CONVERT] button.

A “Which do you want to select?” message appears.

Converting to XG

Other Functions (Tools)

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

128

4 Press the [CONVERT TO XG] button.

The following display appears.

5 (If necessary) Change the destination

for saving the converted Song.

For details on changing the destination, see

page 110.

6 Press the [EXECUTE] button.

A message appears indicating that the converted

data is being checked and the MDR starts playback

of the selected Song. When playback is finished, the

display returns to the previous display.

NOTE

Any playing of the keyboard or pressing of the panel

controls during the confirmation of the conversion will be

recorded to the converted XG-compatible Song.

Song data recorded via the ELS-01 series, ELS-02 series

and this Electone can be converted to EL series-

compatible data. The converted data in the USB flash

drive can be played back by EL-series instruments to

which the MDR-5 has already been installed. After

creating the folders named “F01” – “F99” on the root

directory in the USB flash drive, execute the instructions

below.

NOTE

Protected Songs cannot be converted.

Reference page

• About Protected Songs (page 119)

1 Select the Song to be converted to EL-

series format.

For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.

2 In the TOOLS Page, press the

[CONVERT] button.

A “Which do you want to select?” message appears.

3 Press the [CONVERT TO EL] button.

After the dialog appears, select the destination of the

converted data from F01 – F99.

4 Press the [EXECUTE] button in the

display.

Converting to EL format

Other Functions (Tools)

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

129

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

If Song data created on an EL-series instrument, such as

the EL-900, is saved in the USB flash drive, you can

convert the Song data to data compatible with this

Electone.

1 Select the Song you want to convert.

For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.

2 In the TOOLS Page, press the

[CONVERT] button.

A message appears confirming if you want to

convert from the Song data for EL series to data

which is compatible with this Electone.

3 Press the [CONVERT FROM EL] button

in the display, then specify the

destination for the converted Song.

4 Press the [EXECUTE] button in the

display to start conversion.

When a USB flash drive is selected on the TOOLS Page,

pressing the [INFORMATION] button will indicate the

remaining memory in the USB flash drive. When a Song

is selected on the TOOLS Page, pressing the

[INFORMATION] button will indicate the data capacity,

amount of the Bank, Song title, composer of the Song,

etc. The indicated items differ depending on the Song.

Converting from EL format Checking the remaining memory

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

130

Audio

The convenient [AUDIO] button allows you to play back audio files (.WAV) saved to a USB flash drive.

Moreover, since you can record your performances and recordings as audio data (.WAV) to a USB flash drive,

it is possible to play back the files on computer, share them with your friends, and record your own CDs to

enjoy as well.

Compatible USB flash drives

Please make sure to use the compatible USB flash drives

listed in the Compatible USB Device List downloadable

from the Yamaha website:

http://download.yamaha.com/

Use of unsupported devices may result in data saving/

recalling operations to abort, etc. Before using a USB

flash drive, be sure to read “Connecting a USB device” on

page 108.

NOTICE

To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to data,

follow the notices below.

• Yamaha recommends that you format a USB flash drive,

after checking if the USB flash drive does not contain any

important data, and to use it only for audio recording/

playback. Using MDR Songs and audio data together in

the same drive may cause severe fragmentation of the

USB flash drive, and may stop audio recording/playback

altogether.

• Insert the USB flash drive firmly and take care that the

USB flash drive does not loosen from the connection from

sudden shaking while performing, etc. during audio

recording/playback. If the USB flash drive is disconnected

while recording, it may result in data corruption in the

USB flash drive.

Recording Your

Performance as Audio

Try recording your performance as an audio file to a USB

flash drive. Maximum amount of recording time is 60

minutes per recording, though this may be less

depending on the capacity of the particular USB flash

drive.

File format that can be recorded

.wav — 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16-bit resolution, stereo

NOTE

The file extension does not appear in the Electone display.

However, it can be viewed on a computer.

USB flash drive

External

audio device

Audio file Audio file

Computer

Audio file

Audio Recording

With this method, recorded performances are saved

to a USB flash drive as an audio file. An Audio file is a

recording of the performed sound itself. Since it is

saved in stereo WAV format of normal CD quality

resolution (44.1kHz/16bit), it can be transmitted to

and played on portable music players by using a

computer. You can also record the monophonic

sound of an external device since all the sounds

produced via your vocal or guitar performance and

the sound input from the [MIC] jack will be

recorded.

NOTE

• The sound input from the [AUX IN] jack cannot be recorded.

• Keep in mind, however, that Audio recording cannot be used

to save Registrations. If you want to save Registrations,

perform the “Recording” operation described on page 112 in

chapter 7.

Recording Your Performance as Audio

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

131

Audio

1 Connect a compatible USB flash drive

to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

Reference page

• Compatible USB flash drives (page 130)

2 Press the [AUDIO] button located at the

top right on the panel to call up the

AUDIO Page.

NOTE

Songs you’ve created on the Electone will not be shown in

the AUDIO Page even when the USB flash drive contains

Songs.

3 Select a blank audio file for recording

your performance.

To call up a blank audio file, press the (IN)

button in the display of step 2 to open the USB flash

drive, then select the blank audio file. Since the

operation for selecting audio files is the same as that

for Songs, refer to the “Selecting a Song” on

page 110.

4 Press the [ ] (Record) button to engage

Standby status for recording.

5 Start recording by pressing the

[ ] (Play) button, and then start your

performance.

When recording begins, the elapsed recording time

is shown in the lower left of the AUDIO Page. Once

the elapsed recording time is shown, you can load

the Registration or play the Song with the MDR.

NOTICE

Never attempt to disconnect the USB flash drive or turn

the power off during recording. Doing so may corrupt

the USB flash drive data or the recording data.

6 When you finish playing, press the

[ ] (Stop) button.

Recording stops and the audio file to which your

performance is recorded is automatically named and

selected in the AUDIO Page.

Elapsed recording time

Playing Back Audio Files

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

132

7 To hear your newly recorded

performance, press the [ ](Play)

button in the AUDIO Page.

Reference page

• Deleting the File/Changing the File Name (page 135)

Playing Back Audio Files

Try playing back audio files from a USB flash drive

connected to this instrument.

File format that can be played back

.wav — 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16-bit resolution, stereo

NOTE

This instrument cannot play back DRM protected files.

1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive

containing the audio file to be played

back to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

Reference page

• Compatible USB flash drives (page 130)

2 Press the [AUDIO] button located at the

top right on the panel to call up the

AUDIO Page.

NOTE

Songs you’ve recorded using the MDR function on this

Electone and Protected Songs will not be shown in the

AUDIO Page, even when the USB flash drive contains

Songs.

Recording the Song playback as an

audio file

Once you’ve recorded your performance as a Song

using the MDR function, you can record the playback

of the Song as an audio file.

1 Connect two compatible USB flash

drives, one containing the Song, and

another for recording audio files, to the

[USB TO DEVICE] terminals.

2 Start audio recording (perform steps 2 –

5 above).

3 Select the Song on the MDR Display,

then start playback of the Song.

Play back the Song to the end of the Song.

4 Stop the audio recording (perform steps

6 and 7 above).

Playing Back Audio Files

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

133

Audio

3 Select the desired audio file for

playback.

To simply play an existing audio file, select the

desired audio file (containing data), referring to the

audio file name and icon . Since the operation

for selecting audio files is the same as that for Songs,

refer to instruction steps 2 and 3 in “Selecting a

Song” on page 110.

4 Press the [ ] (Play) button in the AUDIO

Page to call up the Playback page of the

AUDIO Page.

When playback begins, the elapsed time is shown in

the lower left of the display.

5 Press the [ ] (Stop) button to stop

playback.

The display returns to the AUDIO Page.

NOTICE

Never attempt to disconnect the USB flash drive or turn

the power off during playback. Doing so may corrupt

the USB flash drive data.

Rewind and Fast Forward:

During audio playback (or when paused), press the

[ ] (Rewind) button or the [ ](Fast forward)

button and hold it down until the time reaches the

desired position. When the button is released, playback is

paused at the desired position. To resume playback from

the point you’ve reversed or advanced to, press the

[ ](Play) button.

Pause:

If you want to temporarily stop playback of the audio file

press the [ ] (Pause) button. To resume playback from

the point at which the audio file was paused, press the

[ ](Play) button again.

Rewind, Fast Forward and Pause

Playing Back Audio Files

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

134

You can change the volume, tempo and pitch of the audio

file as the file is playing.

1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive

to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

Reference page

• Compatible USB flash drives (page 130)

2 Press the [AUDIO] button.

3 Select the desired audio file for

playback.

Since the operation for selecting audio files is the

same as that for Songs, refer to instruction steps 2

and 3 in “Selecting a Song” on page 110.

4 Press the (SETTING) button to

call up the Setting display.

To adjust the Volume:

Touch the VOLUME slider in the display or use the

Data Control dial.

Range: 0 – 127

To change the Temp o:

Use the TEMPO buttons in the display or

the Data Control dial to change the tempo. The

value can be adjusted from 75% to 125% and the

default value is 100%. Higher values result in a faster

tempo. If you press the TEMPO [RESET] button in

the display or select another audio file, this setting is

restored to the default value.

Range: 75% – 125%

To change the Pitch:

Use the PITCH buttons in the display or

the Data Control dial to change the tempo. This lets

you shift the pitch of an audio file in semitone steps

(from -12 to 12). If you press the PITCH [RESET]

button in the display or select another audio file, this

setting is restored to the default value (0).

Range: -12 – +12

NOTE

• Changing the playback tempo or pitch of an audio file

may change its tonal characteristics.

• Volume, tempo and pitch changes are temporary; these

values revert to their defaults when the power is turned

off and then back on again.

5 Play back the audio file to hear and

check the changes you’ve made in the

Setting display.

1 Press the REPEAT button as often as

necessary to select the desired repeat

mode.

Each press of the button switches among the modes.

(SINGLE)

Repeats the currently selected Song indefinitely.

(ALL)

Repeats all Songs in the currently selected folder in

order.

(RANDOM)

Repeats all Songs in the currently selected folder

randomly.

(OFF)

Cancels repeat playback.

2 Exit from the Setting display by

pressing the (FINISH) button at

the top right of the display.

3 Press the [ ] (Play) button in the AUDIO

Page to begin repeat playback.

Changing the Volume, Tempo

and Pitch

Repeat playback

Other Functions (Tools)

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

135

Audio

Other Functions (Tools)

You can delete the file or change the file name.

1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive

containing the audio files to the [USB

TO DEVICE] terminal.

Reference page

• Compatible USB flash drives (page 130)

2 Press the [AUDIO] button.

3 Select the desired audio file.

Since the operation for selecting audio files is the

same as that for Songs, refer to instruction steps 2

and 3 in “Selecting a Song” on page 110.

4 Press the [TOOLS] button at the top

right of the display to call up the TOOLS

Page.

In this page, you can delete or rename the audio file.

To create a ne w folder :

Press the [CREATE FOLDER] button in the display,

then perform the same operation as in the

explanation of “CREATE FOLDER” in “Using the

MDR Display” on page 104 in chapter 7.

To delete the file:

Press the [DELETE] button in the display. A

message appears prompting confirmation of the

operation. You can cancel the operation at this point

by pressing the [CANCEL] button. If you want to

delete the file, press the [DELETE] button in the

display. The audio file will be deleted and the display

returns to the previous display.

To rename the file:

Press the [RENAME] button to call up the

CHANGE NAME display. For details on how to

enter characters, refer to the “Changing the Song

Name” on page 114. You can cancel the operation at

this point by pressing the [CANCEL] button. To

finalize the name, press the [OK] button. The audio

file will be renamed and the display returns to the

AUDIO Page.

To return to the AUDIO Page from the TOOLS Page,

press the [AUDIO] button in the display.

To copy an audio file:

Perform the same operation as in steps 1 – 5 in “Song

copy” on page 124 in chapter 7.

NOTE

• An audio file cannot be copied to the same folder that includes

the source audio file.

• Since copying of an entire folder including audio files cannot be

performed, copy the desired audio files one by one.

• When only one [USB TO DEVICE] terminal is available, an audio

file cannot be copied between different USB flash drives.

To check the remaining memory:

When an Audio file is selected on the TOOLS Page,

pressing the [INFORMATION] button indicates the data

capacity and playback time. When a USB flash drive is

selected on the TOOLS Page, pressing the

[INFORMATION] button indicates the remaining

memory in the USB flash drive.

To initialize (format) a USB flash drive:

Perform the same operation as in steps 3 – 5 in

“Formatting a USB Flash Drive” on page 109 in chapter 7.

Creating a New Folder/Deleting

the File/Changing the File Name

Audio file copy

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

136

Voice Edit

This Electone has a Voice Edit feature that allows you to create your own Voices. We suggest that you read

through the Voice Structure below at first to get a firm understanding of what comprises a Voice. Then go

through the editing steps, referring to page 137 for editing of an AWM Voice.

NOTE

Super Articulation Voices cannot be edited.

Voice Structure

The internal structure of the Voices of this Electone is

explained below. Refer also to “Tone Generator of this

Electone” (page 37).

AWM Voices consist of up to eig ht re corded samples of a

real instrument.

Each waveform, referred to as an “Element,” can be

edited, by changing the level (volume), filter settings, and

so on. A single Voice contains eight “boxes” (AWM1 –

AWM8) in which the Elements are put. If a Voice consists

of less than three Elements, some boxes are empty. For

example, Strings 1 consists of two Elements (as shown).

You can add Elements from other Voices – Brass, for

example – if a box (AWM3 – AWM8) is empty. This

allows you to create your own original ensemble sounds.

In the Voice Edit function, you can edit not only each

Element, but also assemble some Elements from other

Voic es .

Editing a Voice

Select the Voice you want to edit from

the Voice Menu.

For example, if you want to edit Accordion 1, select

[Accordion 1] in the Voice Menu of the [ORGAN]

button in any Voice section.

Mute all other Voice sections except for the targeted

Voice section.

2 While holding down the [VOICE EDIT]

button, press the Voice button

corresponding to the Voice you wish to

edit.

If you press [VOICE EDIT] without selecting a

Voice, the following display will prompt you to

complete the step. While this display appears, press

the desired Voice button.

AWM Voice structure

AWM1 AWM2 AWM3 AWM4

AWM5 AWM6 AWM7 AWM8

Strings 1

Element1 Element2

Selecting a Voice for editing

BRILLIANCE VOLUME

Editing a Voice

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

137

Voice Edit

After you have selected the Voice button, the AWM

Page (first page of the Voice Edit display) will

appear.

If you release the [VOICE EDIT] button before

pressing a Voice button, the Voice Edit function will

not be called up, and the normal Voice Display will

appear.

You can edit an AWM Voice on the AWM Page and

LAYER Page in the Voice Edit display. In the AWM Page,

the tonal balance of the entire Voice can be corrected by

some EQ parameters. In the LAYER Page, you can make

detailed edits to each Element.

AWM Page

Element On/Off switches

The [AWM1-4] and [AWM5-8] buttons enable you to

alternate the pages between AWM 1 – 4 and AWM 5 – 8.

The [AWM1] – [AWM8] buttons indicate the Elements

which make up the selected Voice. You can mute any of

the Elements by simply pressing the corresponding

button. Pressing the button again cancels the mute.

VOICE/ELEMENT

Indicates the Voice/Element currently being edited. In the

example screen above, Element 1 of Accordion 1 is

assigned to AWM1, Element 2 of Accordion 1 is assigned

to AWM2, and no Voice is assigned to AWM3 and

AWM 4.

You can also call up another Element from another Voice

and replace the currently selected Element with it.

Pressing the VOICE or ELEMENT button in the display

calls up the Voice or Element menu, from which you can

select the desired Voice/ Element (usually Element 1). If

you change the Voice, the Element will automatically

change to the first Element of the Voice (usually Element

1).

EQ LOW FREQ./EQ LOW GAIN

Sets the frequency and gain (level) of the low frequency

band. The EQ LOW FREQ. slider sets the desired

frequency band over a range of 32 Hz – 2.0 kHz. The EQ

LOW GAIN slider sets the level for the frequency band

(specified by the EQ LOW FREQ. slider) over a range of

-12 dB – +12 dB.

While holding down…

Press the Voice button.

Editing an AWM Voice

Editing a Voice

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

138

EQ HIGH FREQ./EQ HIGH GAIN

Sets the frequency and gain (level) of the high frequency

band. The EQ HIGH FREQ. slider sets the desired

frequency band over a range of 500 Hz – 16.0 kHz. The

EQ HIGH GAIN slider sets the level for the frequency

band (specified by the EQ HIGH FREQ. slider) over a

range of -12 dB – +12 dB.

LAYER Page

Element select buttons

Select the Element you wish to edit.

Element On/Off switches

The [AWM1] – [AWM8] buttons indicate the Elements

which make up the selected Voice. You can mute any of

the Elements by simply pressing the corresponding

button. Pressing the button again cancels the mute.

Muting all other Elements except for the one you are

editing lets you clearly hear that single Element for ease

in editing. Note that when some Elements are muted,

playing the keyboard in certain key areas or with certain

velocities may result in no sound.

Display switch buttons

The LAYER Page contains three pages. The

buttons are used to switch among them.

LEVEL

Determines the output level of the Element.

Range: 0 – 127

NOTE LIMIT

Determines the lowest and highest notes in the range for

which the Element sounds.

The setting of the HIGH slider cannot be set lower than

that of the LOW slider. Some Elements are not affected by

this parameter.

Range: C-2 – G8

PAN

Determines the position of the Element in the stereo

image.

Range: L64 – R63

LAYER Page 2

NOTE SHIFT

Determines the pitch settings in semitones.

Range: -64 – +63

TUNE FINE

Determines the fine tuning.

Range: -64 – +63

EQ (Equalizer)

An equalizer is usually used to correct the sound

output from amps or speakers to match the special

acoustic character of the room. The sound is divided

into several frequency bands, then by raising or

lowering the level for each band, the correction is

made. This Electone has a two-band (high and low)

digital equalizer that lets you adjust the overall sound

according to the type of music you play — classical

music being more refined and soft, pop music more

crisp, and rock music more dynamic.

LAYER Page 1

These buttons switch the display.

Editing a Voice

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

139

Voice Edit

ATTACK RATE

Determines how quickly the Element will reach its

maximum level after the key is played. Higher values

produce a faster attack.

Range: 0 – 127

RELEASE RATE

Determines how much time it takes for the level to reach

0 after the key is released.

Higher values make the time shorter.

Range: 1 – 127

CUTOFF FREQ.

Determines the cutoff frequency of the filter.

Range: 9600 – 24000 cent

RESONANCE

Determines the amount of resonance (harmonic

emphasis) applied to the signal at the cutoff frequency.

Some Elements are not affected by this parameter.

Range: 16 – 140

LAYER Page 3

LFO WAVE

Determines the LFO waveform used to vary the sound.

For details, see right column.

LFO SPEED

Determines the speed of the LFO waveform. Higher

values make the speed faster.

Range: 2 – 93

LFO PMD (Pitch Modulation Depth)

Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform

varies the pitch of the sound.

Higher values result in a greater amount of pitch change.

For the minimum setting, the pitch does not change.

Range: 0 – 400

LFO FMD (Frequency Modulation Depth)

Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform

varies the filter cutoff frequency.

Higher values result in a greater amount of frequency

change. For the minimum setting, the frequency does not

change.

Range: 0 – 4800 cent

LFO AMD (Amplitude Modulation Depth)

Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform

varies the amplitude of the sound. Higher values result in

a greater amount of amplitude change. For the minimum

setting, the amplitude does not change.

Range: 0 – 128

When playing a User Voice you have created using the

LFO parameters (above), set the Vibrato setting in the

Voice Condition display to “Preset,” not “User.” If Vibrato

is set to “User” and the Vibrato parameters (depth and/or

speed) are set fairly high, you may not be able to hear the

effect of the LFO.

Reference page

• Vibrato (page 42)

Filter — Cutoff Frequency and Resonance

Filter modifies the tone by cutting the output of a

specific frequency portion of the sound. This

Electone is equipped with a low pass filter, which

passes only those signals below the cutoff frequency

and cuts signals above the cutoff frequency.

You can produce a relatively brighter or darker sound

by setting the cutoff frequency.

Resonance is a parameter that boosts the level of the

signal in the area of the cutoff frequency. By

emphasizing the overtones in this area, this can

produce a distinctive “peaky” electronic tone.

Cutoff Frequency

Level

Frequency

Cutoff Frequency

Resonance

These frequencies are passed by the filter.

Saving the Edited Voice

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

140

Saving the Edited Voice

Edited AW M Voices can be saved as User Voices (up to

80).

1 Press the [SAVE] button at the top right

of the display to call up the SAVE Page.

2 Select the User Voice number you wish

to save to.

The message appears to prompt confirmation of the

operation. (Saving a new Voice automatically erases

the Voice previously stored to the selected User

number.)

3 (If necessary) Press the [RENAME]

button to give a name to your original

Voice.

The method for editing the name is the same as the

one for the Song name in the MDR section. (See

page 114 for more information.) Up to sixteen

characters can be entered.

4 Press the [SAVE] button to save the

Voice, or press [CANCEL] to abort the

operation.

After saving the Voice, be sure to quit the Voice Edit

function (page 141) before turning the power off.

Turning off the Electone without quitting Voice Edit

erases the User Voice you have edited.

LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)

As its name suggests, the LFO creates waveforms of a

low frequency.

These waveforms can be used to vary the pitch, filter

or amplitude to create effects such as vibrato, wah

and tremolo.

The following five waveforms are available.

saw (sawtooth) tri (triangle)

squ (square) rnd (random)

sine

NOTICE

This operation automatically erases any Voice that had

been previously saved to the selected User Voice

number. Be careful not to erase any important data.

Always save your important data in advance to a USB

flash drive using the MDR function.

Quitting Voice Edit

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

141

Voice Edit

Quitting Voice Edit

You can quit the Voice Edit function from any of its

display pages.

1 Press the [VOICE EDIT] button on the

panel.

If your original Voice has already been saved, the

Voice Edit function quits automatically. If the edited

Voice has not been saved, a message appears

prompting confirmation of the operation.

2 Select [EXIT] to quit the Voice Edit

function, or [CANCEL] to about the

operation and return to the previous

display.

Recalling an Edited Voice

Once your original AWM Voice has been saved, it can be

selected from the User button in each Voice section. Refer

to chapter 2, “Selecting Voices from the User buttons”

(page 28).

NOTICE

When quitting Voice Edit, the square at the top left of the

display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating

that the Voice you have created is currently being saved.

Do not turn the power off while the Voice is being saved.

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

142

Rhythm Program

The Electone includes powerful rhythm programming functions: Rhythm Pattern Program and Rhythm

Sequence Program. Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to record your own original rhythms and save them

as user rhythms. Rhythm Sequence Program lets you connect the existing rhythms or your original rhythms to

create complete rhythm tracks, which you can automatically play back during your performance. Moreover,

Rhythm Sequence Program includes an automatic Registration Shift feature — called Registration Sequence.

Outline of the Rhythm

Programming Operation

Rhythm Pattern Program

Rhythm Pattern Program lets you use any of the different

instrument sounds (drum and percussion) assigned to

each key on the Upper and Lower keyboards in creating

your own rhythms. Up to 48 of your original rhythms can

be saved as User Rhythms.

There are two ways to program a User pattern: copying a

preset rhythm that is similar to the rhythm you want to

create, or creating your own rhythm from scratch.

To copy a preset rhythm:

Copying a preset rhythm lets you make changes to an

existing rhythm, saving you time if you want to program

a rhythm that is similar to an existing preset pattern.

1 Select the rhythm you want to copy

from the Rhythm Menu.

2 While holding down the [PATTERN]

button in the panel (the display prompts

you to select a rhythm), select the

Rhythm button that contains the preset

rhythm to be copied to the Rhythm

Pattern Program.

NOTE

• Pressing the [PATTERN] button while the rhythm is running

automatically stops the rhythm.

• Rhythms with names ending with “+” cannot be edited

and used with the Assemble function (page 145).

Rhythm Pattern Program (pages 142 to

158)

You can create your original rhythm patterns by

entering percussion sounds or editing preset

rhythm patterns.

Rhythm Sequence Program (pages 168

to 172)

You can connect any of the rhythms together to

make complete rhythm compositions. Moreover,

you can also program Registration Shift events at

any point in the composition so that the

Registration Memory settings automatically change

as the Rhythm Sequence plays back.

Entering percussion sounds and/or editing them

Creating/editing the accompaniment backing patterns

played via the Lower Keyboard

Making effect settings and detailed settings for each

percussion Voice (Pan, Tune, and so on)

Saving your rhythm patterns as User rhythms

Selecting the destination of the sequence

Entering a rhythm pattern one by one

Programming the Registration Sequence

Entering the Rhythm Pattern

Program

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

143

Rhythm Program

To create your own rhythm from

scratch:

Press the [PATTERN] button and release it without

selecting a Rhythm button.

A blank pattern is loaded to the Rhythm Pattern

Program.

Deleting unnecessary Sections

When you create a Rhythm pattern based on Preset

Rhythm data or already created User Rhythm data,

created data will be stored together with the unedited

other Sections. Even if you edit only Main A and

Main B, all other Sections will also be stored as User

Rhythm data. Because of this, the remaining memory

capacity (page 158) may decrease faster than

expected. To save on memory capacity, you should

delete unnecessary Sections which may not be used

for your performance by pressing the [ALL] button

on the CLEAR PART window (page 146).

A Rhythm consists of 15 sections: Intro 1 – 3, Main A

– D, Fill In A – D, Ending 1 – 3, and Break.

In Rhythm Pattern Program, you can enter or edit

percussion notes one by one, or assemble each part

from other different rhythms to create your own new

User Rhythm.

Case 1: Creating your own rhythm by

changing a preset rhythm

Intro 1

Main A

Fill In A

Ending 1

Break

Intro 1'

Main A

Fill In A

Ending 1

Break

Preset Rhythm

Save as

a User Rhythm

User Rhythm

Changing Intro 1

to Intro 1'

All Rhythm sections, including any which have not

been edited, are saved as one User Rhythm.

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

144

In the SETTING Page of the display, set the conditions of

the rhythm, such as time signature, measure length, and

so on. You can also customize the part settings in this

SETTING Page — deleting any part or copying a part

from another rhythm to the currently selected rhythm.

1 Press the [SETTING] button in the

display to call up the SETTING Page.

2 Determines the time signature used for

the rhythm.

You can select the time signature with the BEAT

buttons.

If you start the Rhythm Pattern Program from a

preset rhythm, pressing a BEAT button that is not

the same as the currently selected rhythm calls up

the following message.

Case 2: Creating your own rhythm by

assembling parts from other different

rhythms

Case 3: Creating your own rhythm from

scratch

Intro 1

Main A

Fill In A

Ending 1

Break

Intro 1

Main A

Fill in A

Ending 1

Break'

Intro 1'

Main A'

Fill In A'

Ending 1'

Break'

Preset Rhythm

Save as

a User Rhythm

User Rhythm

Assemble some

sections or parts

Preset Rhythm

Intro 1

Main A

Fill In A

Ending 1

Break

Intro 1

Main A

Fill In A

Ending 1

Break

Blank Rhythm

Save as

a User Rhythm

User Rhythm

Entering percussion sounds

into each section

These are blank sections (no percussion sounds); if you

press the ENDING [2] or [3] button, no sound is played.

Basic settings for the rhythm

pattern

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

145

Rhythm Program

Selecting [CLEAR] deletes all data in the rhythm

and changes the time signature.

Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation.

3 Select a section to which you want to

enter or edit the rhythm pattern.

Pressing the SECTION button on the display calls

up the Section Select pop-up menu. After selecting

the desired section, the pop-up menu automatically

closes.

You can play the selected section by pressing the

Rhythm [START] button on the panel. You can also

change the section while the rhythm is playing. For

details on muting the accompaniment part, refer to

page 154.

4 Sets the measure length of the rhythm

pattern.

Pressing the MEASURE button on the display calls

up the Measure Select popup menu. Select the

desired number of measures in the pop-up menu. If

you select Break or Fill In as the section, the measure

value cannot be changed.

5 (If necessary) Set the Metronome, Part

Assemble, and Part Clear parameters.

METRONOME

Turns the metronome click on or off. When set to ON,

the metronome sounds on each beat of the measure (for

example, three times per measure in 3/4 time) to serve as

a rhythmic guide when programming patterns. Set to On

here with Real Time Write.

Reference pages

• Step Write and Real Time Write (page 146)

• Entering percussion sounds to a rhythm pattern — Real Time

Write (page 147)

NOTE

Pressing the VOLUME buttons for Rhythm also changes the

volume of the metronome.

ASSEMBLE

Copies parts from another rhythm to the currently

selected rhythm. You can assemble various sections from

multiple rhythms to create your original rhythm.

Pressing the [ASSEMBLE] button calls up the following

display.

Select the copy source: Rhythm, Section and Part. Then

select the destination. You can copy only one selected

part, or all parts of a rhythm.

After setting the source and destination, press

[EXECUTE]. Copy is executed and returning to the

previous display.

Select copy source (Rhythm, Section, and Part)

Select the part for the

copy destination

Press here to execute

the copy

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

146

CLEAR PART

Clears a specific part or parts from the currently selected

rhythm. Pressing this button calls up the following

display.

Select the part you want to delete from the displayed

parts. You cannot select a part that contains no data (the

button is grayed out). If you select [ALL] here, the

percussion and all accompaniment parts are cleared.

Reference page

• Accompaniment (page 63)

When selecting the desired part, a display prompting

confirmation of the operation appears. Select [CLEAR] to

execute the operation, or select [CANCEL] to abort the

operation.

NOTE

If you select BASS here, the bass phrase in the A.B.C. will be

cleared.

You can also select a rhythm pattern currently being

created as the COPY FROM RHYTHM.

To create a MAIN B section based on MAIN A, create the

MAIN A rhythm in the INPUT page, copy it to MAIN B,

then edit the MAIN B rhythm as desired.

To select the rhythm currently being created, select

“Current Rhythm” on the 5th page of the “USER” category.

Deleting the current Section

Pressing the [ALL] button on the CLEAR PART window

will delete all data of the current Section. To conserve

remaining memory capacity (page 158), delete unnecessary

Sections which may not be used for your performance.

Step Write and Real Time Write

There are two different methods you can use to program

rhythms: Step Write and Real Time Write.

Step Write allows you to enter percussion sounds as

individual note values. As a method, it is very similar to

writing down the notes on a sheet of music paper; each

note is entered one at a time, and though you can hear each

individual note entered, you cannot actually hear the

pattern playing as you create it. Step Write is good for

precision and for entering percussion sounds whose note

placement and rhythmic value has been determined, such

as a bass drum that plays every beat in a measure.

Real Time Write on the other hand, is similar to using a

multi-track tape recorder; you can hear previously recorded

parts of the pattern as you record new parts on top. Real

Time Write is best for capturing the “feel” of a rhythm,

because it allows you to actually play the pattern as you are

creating it.

Each method has its own advantages and uses. Which

method you use depends partly on the type of rhythm you

intend to create and partly on your own personal

preference.

You can switch between the two methods in editing to

create a single rhythm by the use of both methods. This

would come handy, for example, in programming the basic

beats of a rhythm with Step Write, then using Real Time

Write to add percussion accents and embellishments.

Which mode of the operation is selected depends on the

play status of the rhythm. If the rhythm is stopped, Step

Write is automatically selected. If the rhythm is playing,

Real Time Write is selected. See the instructions page 147

for Step Write, and page 151 for Real Time Write.

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

147

Rhythm Program

You can enter percussion sounds in the INPUT Page of

the display. Before entering percussion sounds, turn off

the Upper and Lower keyboard Voices by setting each

Voice’s volume to MIN.

NOTE

The volume of the percussion and accompaniment sound

during use of Rhythm Pattern Program can be controlled with

the VOLUME button of the RHYTHM section. When you quit

Rhythm Pattern Program, the VOLUME of the RHYTHM section

will return to the previous selected level.

1 Press the [INPUT] button at the top of

the display to call up the INPUT Page.

2 Select the part, MAIN DRUM or ADD

DRUM, to which you want to enter the

percussion.

In general, main (or basic) drum/percussion

instruments (such as Bass Drum, Snare Drum, and

so on) are entered in Main Drum part and others

(such as Tambourine, Triangle) are entered in Add

Drum part.

3 Select the desired Drum Kit.

You can select a kit from the two categories, Drum

Kit and SFX Kit. For details on each kit, see

page 160. Pressing the desired kit in the Kit list will

close the list, and then call up the selected kit to the

Upper and Lower keyboards.

You can select only one kit for each part (Main

Drum or Add Drum). When you want to create a

rhythm pattern including two different drum kits,

select one kit for Main Drum and another for Add

Drum.

4 Select the percussion sound you wish

to enter by pressing the key on the

Upper or Lower keyboard that

corresponds to the sound.

The selected instrument’s name appears on the

display.

Entering percussion sounds to a

rhythm pattern

—

Step Write

Drum kit SFX kit

Selected key Instrument name

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

148

5 Set the appropriate Quantize value.

For details on Quantize, refer to page 151.

NOTE

The Quantize setting can be changed in the middle of

Step Write.

6 Set the Gate Time. (This is optional, and

only necessary when you want to enter

a sustaining sound, such as a whistle.)

For a list of instruments that require a Gate Time

setting, refer to the Percussion Kit List on page 160.

For details on Gate Time, refer to page 154.

7 Use the ACCENT buttons to enter the

sound to the selected point. Press each

ACCENT button to actually enter the

percussion sounds.

You can change the rhythm clock to which the

percussion sound is entered by pressing the

QUANTIZE [ ] [ ] buttons.

Rhythm Clock box

Displays the current position in the pattern according to

measure, beat, and number of clicks.

A click is the smallest division of a pattern, and one beat

is made up of 480 clicks.

The rhythm clock advances up to the measures set in the

SETTING Page and loops back to the beginning of the

rhythm (01:01:000).

Reference page

• Basic settings for the rhythm pattern (page 144)

ACCENT buttons

Records the instrument and determines its volume or

Accent level. Press one of the ACCENT buttons you wish

to set (“ ” is softer and “ ” is louder; “REST” is no

sound). The instrument is automatically inserted at the

Accent level to the selected position in the pattern.

Selection of an Accent level automatically advances the

rhythm clock by one step, according to the current

Quantize resolution value.

QUANTIZE [ ] [ ] controls

Each press of the buttons advances or reverses the rhythm

clock by one step. The size of a single step is determined

by the Quantize value.

8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 above to layer

each instrument and complete your own

rhythm.

You can change the accent level, position, or gate time of

the entered sound, or delete the entered sound.

To change the accent level of an entered

note:

1 Select the desired note for changing the

accent level.

NEXT INSTRUMENT

Selects the entered instruments one by one, from left key

to right.

Editing entered percussion notes

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

149

Rhythm Program

NOTE [ ] [ ] controls

Selects the previous/next position’s note of the currently

selected instrument. In the notes below for example, you

can select notes , and one by one. Rests ( and

) are ignored.

QUANTIZE [ ] [ ] controls

Advances or reverses the rhythm clock by one step. The

size of a single step is determined by the Quantize value.

2 Change the accent level by using the

ACCENT buttons or Accent field.

The Accent field allows for finer changes.

Accent field

Touch on the box to enable the Accent field.

Turning the Data Control dial changes the accent level

over a range of 0 – 127.

The minimum setting results in no sound.

ACCENT buttons

Determines the coarse accent level. Eight accent levels

(from “ ” to “ ”) are available.

Press the desired Accent button to change the currently

selected note to the selected level.

To move an entered note:

1 Select the note you want to move (as in

step 1 on page 148).

2 Press the Rhythm Clock box to enable

the box.

3 Turn the Data Control dial to change the

position by one clock.

To change the length of an entered note:

The length of sustaining sounds such as Snare Roll and

Whistle can be changed by adjusting the Gate Time. See

page 154 for more information.

To erase an entered note:

1 Select the note you want to erase (as in

step 1 on page 148).

2 Press the [REST] button in the ACCENT

section of the display.

The selected note is deleted and replaced with a rest.

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

150

You can also erase all notes of a single instrument, or all

notes entered.

To erase one instrument:

1 Select the key to which the instrument

that you want to erase is assigned.

The key name you have selected and its instrument

name are displayed.

2 Press [CLEAR] in the display.

The following display appears, prompting

confirmation of the operation.

3 Select [CLEAR] to erase the selected

instrument.

A bell sound indicates that the instrument has been

erased.

The following method can also be used to erase one

instrument.

1 While holding down the [CLEAR]

button, press the key on the keyboard

corresponding to the instrument you

wish to erase.

A bell sound indicates that the instrument has been

erased.

To erase all instruments:

1 Press [CLEAR] in the display.

The following display appears, prompting

confirmation of the operation.

2 Select [CLEAR ALL] to erase all

instruments.

All instruments are instantly erased.

When you want to replace the instrument you have

already entered with another instrument, it’s not

necessary to delete and re-enter. You can quickly replace

the sound with the following procedure.

To replace the instrument:

Before the operation, stop the rhythm.

1 Select the key to which the instrument

you want to replace is assigned.

The key name you have selected and its instrument

name are displayed.

2 Simultaneously hold down the

[CHANGE] button in the display and

press the key on the Upper or Lower

keyboard that corresponds to the

instrument you want to use.

The instrument is instantly erased and replaced with

the newly selected one.

Selected key Instrument name

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

151

Rhythm Program

While you listen to the entered rhythm or metronome

click, play the Upper/Lower keyboards to enter the

desired percussion sounds.

1 Select the desired part to which the

percussion sounds are entered, and the

desired drum kit, by following steps 1 –

3 on page 147.

2 Set the appropriate Quantize value.

The positions at which the sounds are input will be

corrected according to the predetermined Quantize

value in the Real Time Write operation.

3 Press the rhythm [START] button in the

panel.

The rhythm (or Metronome) starts playing, enabling

the Real Time Write operation.

4 The rhythm (or Metronome) starts

playing, enabling the Real Time Write

operation.

If you have started the Rhythm Pattern Program by

copying a preset rhythm, you can listen to the

selected rhythm as you play the sound. If you have

started from scratch, set the Metronome to “on” in

the SETTING Page and listen to the metronome

click. The pattern will automatically repeat (or

About Quantize

The Quantize function is a process of rounding off timing

or duration values, so that each note plays with precise

timing. You can select nine types of Quantize value.

With Step Write

This allows you to automatically correct the length

(duration) and timing of each note you enter.

Steps Depending on the Quantize Values

Setting Quantize to FREE ( ) results in the finest, least

amount of quantization (1/480 beat).

With Real Time Write

This allows you to automatically correct the timing of the

notes you play, according to the specified Quantize

resolution. No correction occurs when you select FREE.

Generally, you should set Quantize to be the same as the

shortest note you intend to play.

With this button, change the displayed Quantize buttons

0 120 240 360 480

160

120

6060

240

320

Clock

(1 beat)

Original data (you play)

Quarter note

length

After applying a “ ” quantize value to the original data

Entering percussion sounds to a

rhythm pattern — Real Time Write

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

152

“loop”) for a certain number of measures as set in

the SETTING Page.

Reference page

• Metronome (page 145)

5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 above to layer

each instrument and complete your own

rhythm.

You can erase an instrument while the rhythm is playing

back.

To erase an instrument/key assignment:

While holding down the [CLEAR] button, press the key

on the keyboard corresponding to the instrument you

wish to erase. All instances of the selected instrument will

be erased from the pattern.

When you want to erase all instruments, or edit entered

percussion notes, you need to stop the rhythm before

editing. See page 148, “Editing entered percussion notes.”

The Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to use one of

the Electone’s Accompaniment patterns with your

original rhythm. You can select and save the

Accompaniment pattern that best matches the rhythm

that you have created. Moreover, Rhythm Pattern

Program features a Rhythmic Chord function that lets

you add your own backing patterns to the rhythms you

create.

To select an appropriate

Accompaniment pattern for your newly

created rhythm:

1 Press the [SETTING] button at the top of

the display to call up the SETTING Page.

2 Press the [ASSEMBLE] button.

A pop-up menu appears, letting you select the copy

source and destination parts.

3 Using the COPY FROM [RHYTHM] and

[SECTION] buttons, select the rhythm

and the section which has the

accompaniment you wish to use.

Reference page

• Basic settings for the rhythm pattern (page 144)

4 Using the COPY FROM [PART] button,

select the accompaniment part you

want to copy.

5 Using the COPY TO [PART] button,

select the desired accompaniment part

(CHORD 1 or CHORD 2) to be used for

the Rhythmic Chord pattern.

6 Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute

the copy.

The desired accompaniment part (Rhythmic Chord

pattern) has been copied.

To create your own backing patterns

with the Rhythmic Chord function:

The Rhythmic Chord pattern can be entered by the same

methods as the rhythm: Step Write and/or Real Time

Write.

1 Press the [INPUT] button at the top of

the display to call up the INPUT Page.

Creating backing patterns

(Rhythmic Chord function)

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

153

Rhythm Program

2 Select the part, CHORD 1 or CHORD 2,

which you want to create for the

Rhythmic Chord pattern.

If the part you have selected contains a preset

accompaniment pattern, a message appears

prompting you to confirm whether you want to clear

the existing data or not. To create your own

Rhythmic Chord pattern, select [CLEAR].

3 Select the desired Voice.

Pressing the button showing the Voice name calls up

the relevant Voice Menu.

Select the desired Voice category with the

instrument icon buttons, then select the desired

Voice from the Voice Menu. The selected Voice is

called up for both the Upper and Lower keyboards.

NOTE

The Voice menu that appears here is not the same as the

one for the Voice Sections.

Voices can also be changed even after entering the

Rhythmic Chord pattern.

You can select only one Voice for one part (Chord 1

or Chord 2). When you want to create a Rhythmic

Chord pattern including two different Voices, select

one Voice for Chord 1 and another for Chord 2.

4 Set the appropriate Quantize value.

For details on the Quantize function, refer to

page 151.

5 Set the Gate Time.

You can adjust the Gate Time setting by using the

GATE TIME buttons in the display, or

the Data Control dial. Using the buttons in the

display makes coarse changes in the value. Using the

Data Control dial makes fine changes.

6 Enter the Rhythmic Chord pattern.

The methods for entering the Rhythmic Chord

pattern are the same as those for entering the

rhythm pattern. Any key you press sounds a C major

triad chord (C, E, and G). For information on Step

Write, see page 148; for information on Real Time

Write, see page 151.

You can also edit the entered Rhythmic Chord pattern

using the same method as in “Editing entered percussion

notes” (page 148). To change the gate time of the notes of

the Rhythmic Chord pattern, follow the instructions (see

page 154).

Gate time determines the actual length of time a note

sounds. For example, a quarter note is sometimes played as

tenuto (long length) and sometimes played as staccato

(short length).

Since 1 beat is made up of 480 clocks, a quarter note played

tenuto may have a gate time between 450 – 470, and a

staccato quarter note may be about 240.

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

154

To change the Gate Time:

1 Select the note for which you want to

change the gate time (see step 1 on

page 148).

2 Press the Gate Time box to enable the

box.

3 Turn the Data Control dial to change the

Gate Time.

In Rhythm Pattern Program, you can create your original

drum patterns using Main Drum and Add Drum, and

original backing patterns using Chord 1 and Chord 2.

Moreover, you can change the Voices for all

accompaniment parts, including Pad, Phrase 1 and

Phrase 2.

Voices can be changed in the VOICE/EFFECT Page.

1 Press the [VOICE/EFFECT] button at the

top of the display to call up the VOICE/

EFFECT Page.

2 Press the [VOICE] button in the display.

The following display will appear.

3 Select the desired part for which you

wish to change the Voice.

The Voice menu appears.

4 Select the desired Voice, and the Voice

menu automatically closes.

NOTE

The Voice menu that appears here is not the same as the

one for the Voice Sections.

After selecting the desired Voice, customize the

accompaniment to your personal preference by adjusting

the volume and pan, and setting the desired effects (see

page 155).

Changing the Voices for

Accompaniment parts

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

155

Rhythm Program

Volume and Pan are set in the VOICE/EFFECT Page.

VOLUME display

ON/OFF

Determines the on/off status of each accompaniment

part. When this is set to OFF, the part is muted.

Volume sliders

Determines the volume of each accompaniment part.

Range: 0 – 127

PAN displ ay

Determines the position of each accompaniment part in

the stereo image.

Range: L64 – R63

You can set Reverb, Chorus, and Variation effects as

desired for your original rhythm.

Reverb adds a warm ambience to the sound, simulating

the complex reflections of actual performance spaces,

such as a concert hall or a small club. Chorus provides a

wide variety of sound transformations and

enhancements. Variation includes many kinds of special

effects for changing the sound, both subtly and radically.

These effects are set in the VOICE/EFFECT Page.

REVERB display

Determines the amount of reverb applied to each

accompaniment part.

Range: 0 – 127

CHORUS display

CHORUS TYPE

Determines the type of the chorus effect. Pressing the

CHORUS TYPE button calls up the chorus type list.

Select the desired chorus type, and the list automatically

closes.

Adjusting volume and panning

Effect settings

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

156

Chorus sliders

Determines the amount of chorus effect applied to each

accompaniment part.

Range: 0 – 127

VARIATION display

VARIATION (Variation Effect Category)

Selects the effect category of the variation effect. Pressing

the VARIATION button calls up the effect category list.

Reference page

• Effect List (page 52)

Select the desired effect category, and the list

automatically closes.

After changing the category, the variation type below

automatically changes corresponding to the selected

category.

TYPE (Variation Type)

Determines the type of the variation effect. Pressing the

TYPE button calls up the effect type list.

Select the desired type, and the list automatically closes.

Variation sliders

Determines the amount of Variation effect applied to

each accompaniment part.

Range: 0 – 127

You can independently adjust the settings of pan, pitch,

reverb and volume for each instrument.

1 Press the [DRUM SETUP] button at the

top of the display to call up the DRUM

SETUP Page.

2 Select the desired part, Main Drum or

Add Drum.

Detailed settings for each

percussion instrument

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

157

Rhythm Program

3 Press the appropriate key (the key to

which the instrument to be changed is

assigned).

The selected instrument’s name is shown on the

display and you can change its settings.

4 Adjust the parameters: Pan, Volume,

Reverb and Pitch.

Percussion Kit Name

Indicates the currently selected kit. Pressing this button

calls up the Percussion Kit list, letting you select the

desired kit. When you change the kit, the instruments

you have already entered are replaced with the

instruments of the newly selected kit.

Reference page

• Percussion Kit List (page 160)

PAN

Determines the position of the currently selected

instrument in the stereo image.

Range: L63 – R63

VOLUME

Determines the volume of the currently selected

instrument.

Range: 0 – 127

REVERB

Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently

selected instrument.

Range: 0 – 127

PITCH COARSE

Determines the pitch of the currently selected

instrument, adjustable in semitone (100-cent) steps.

Range: -64 – +63

PITCH FINE

Determines the pitch of the currently selected

instrument, adjustable in 1-cent steps, allowing more

detailed tuning of the instrument than in PITCH

COARSE ( ) above.

Range: -64 – +63

You can save your newly created rhythm pattern as a User

Rhythm, up to a maximum of 48 patterns.

1 If necessary, confirm the contents of the

rhythm you want to save.

2 Press the [SAVE] button at the top right

of the display to call up the SAVE Page.

If the rhythm is playing, it will automatically be

stopped.

Saving rhythm patterns

Confirming rhythm patterns before saving

The rhythm pattern you have created will be saved with 15

sections collectively into one rhythm. Before saving, we

recommend that you confirm the contents of each section.

Example: When saving the Main A and Main B sections

you have created into one user rhythm

First select “Main A” by using the [SECTION] button on

the SETTING Page, then press the [START] button on the

panel. This lets you hear the Main A pattern you have

created.

Confirm that the rhythm pattern is what you want to save

as Main A. Next, select “Main B” by using the [SECTION]

button, then play it back and confirm that this is what you

want to save as Main B.

If the Main A and/or Main B patterns contain undesired

data or no data, create the desired data by using the

Assemble function (page 145).

After confirming the desired section (Main A and Main B

here), we recommend that you confirm that all other

sections contain no data. If unnecessary data is contained

in some sections which you don’t want to save, delete that

unnecessary data. This can reduce the data size of the user

rhythm.

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

158

3 Select the User Rhythm number to

which you wish to save.

The following display appears, prompting

confirmation of the operation.

4 Press the [SAVE] button to save the

pattern, or press [CANCEL] to abort the

operation.

After saving the Rhythm, be sure to quit Rhythm Pattern

Program before turning the power off. Turning off the

Electone without quitting Rhythm Pattern Program

erases the User Rhythm you have created.

You can quit the Rhythm Pattern Program from any of its

display pages.

1 Press the [PATTERN] button.

If a rhythm is playing, it will automatically be

stopped.

If you leave Rhythm Pattern Program without

having edited any patterns, this simply quits the

Rhythm Pattern Program.

If you have not saved the edited pattern, a message

appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.

2 Select [EXIT] to leave Rhythm Pattern

Program, or [CANCEL] to abort the

operation and return to the previous

display.

NOTICE

When you leave the Rhythm Pattern Program, the

square at the top left in the display turns light blue for a

few seconds, indicating that data is currently being

saved. Do not turn the power off while the data is being

saved.

Checking the Remaining Memory

Capacity

Remaining Memory (amount of memory available for

storing rhythms) is shown on the display as a percentage.

If a “Data full” message appears when you press the [SAVE]

button, the pattern cannot be saved because of lack of

available memory space. If this occurs, check through all

fifteen sections for any unnecessary data. After erasing

some of the less necessary data, try to save the pattern

again.

To avoid this, you should periodically check the amount of

remaining memory while you are creating your rhythm.

Reference pages

• Confirming rhythm patterns before saving (page 157)

• CLEAR PART (page 146)

Remaining Memory

Quitting the Rhythm Pattern

Program

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

159

Rhythm Program

The User rhythms you have created in the Rhythm

Pattern Program can be selected and played from the

User buttons in the panel Rhythm section. Refer to

Chapter 5, “Selecting Rhythms from the User buttons”

(page 58).

You can load rhythms from a USB flash drive and edit

and save them as User Rhythms. Data that can be loaded

includes not only that of the Electone, but also all Style

File Format files.

1 Insert the USB flash drive which

contains the desired pattern into the

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

2 Press the [PATTERN] button on the

panel.

3 Press [FILE] at the top right in the

display.

If you open the FILE Page while the rhythm is

playing, the rhythm will automatically be stopped.

4 Press the [SELECT] button to select the

desired pattern file.

The method for selecting a file is the same as that in

the MDR section. See page 106 for more

information.

5 Press the [LOAD] button to load the

pattern.

To edit the loaded pattern, go to the INPUT Page

(page 148), then save your created pattern(s) as a User

Rhythm (page 157).

Recalling User rhythm patterns

Selecting rhythms from a USB

flash drive

User buttons

Select “USER” category here.

About file types that can be loaded to the

Electone

This Electone is compatible with Style File

Format data.

The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s

original Style data format, which uses a

unique conversion system to provide high-quality

automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord

types. In this format, each rhythm pattern (called a “Style”)

is made up of fifteen sections (Intro 1 – 3, Main A – D, Fill

In A – D, Break, Ending 1 – 3) as rhythm pattern variations.

Each of these fifteen sections in turn has eight different

parts, made up of MIDI sequence data.

You can load any patterns (Styles) which have been created

by an SFF-compatible instrument.

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

160

*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.

Percussion Kit list

Drum

ELKit 1 ELKit 2 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Hit Kit Room Kit

Scratch Maracas High Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute

Concert BD Surdo Mute Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open

Noise Percussion Maracas Low Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q

Bass Drum March Surdo Muff Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap

Analog BD Short Surdo Rim Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H

Synth Tom 3 Cuica High Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L

Analog BD Long Surdo Open Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap

Synth Tom 2 Cuica Middle Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise

Synth Bass Drum Tamborim Mute Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click

Synth Tom 1 Cuica Low Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell

Bass Drum Attack Tamborim Open Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L

Bass Drum Heavy Pandeiro Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H

Tom 4 Bongo High Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap

Bass Drum Light Conga Slide Brush Swirl * Brush Swirl * Brush Swirl * Brush Swirl *

Tom 3 Bongo Low Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap

Orch Snare Drum Conga Slap Brush Tap Swirl * Brush Tap Swirl * Brush Tap Swirl * Brush Tap Swirl *

Snare Drum Roll * Conga Muff Snare Roll * Snare Roll * Snare Roll * Snare Roll *

Tom 2 Bongo Mute Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet

SD Brush Roll Conga High Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Electro Snare Soft

Tom 1 Bongo Slap Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks

SD Brush Shot 2 Conga Low Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Tight L Kick Soft

Tom Brush Shot 4 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot H Snare Pitched Open Rim Shot

SD Brush Shot 1 Timbale 1 High Kick Tight Kick Tight Kick Wet Kick Tight

SD Heavy Timbale 1 Low Kick Kick Short Kick Tight H Kick

Tom Brush Shot 3 Side Stick Side Stick Light Stick Ambient Side Stick

Snare Drum Light Timbale 2 High Snare Snare Short Snare Ambient Snare Snappy

Tom Brush Shot 2 Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap

SD Accent 2 Timbale 2 Low Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight 2 Snare Tight Snap

SD Accent 1 Timbale 3 High Floor Tom L Floor Tom L Hybrid Tom 1 To m R o om 1

Tom Brush Shot 1 Wood Block High Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed 2 Hi-Hat Closed

SD Reverb 2 Timbale 3 Low Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Hybrid Tom 2 To m R o o m 2

Snare Drum Rim 2 Wood Block Mid Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Hi-Hat Pedal

SD Reverb 1 Timbale 4 High Low Tom Low Tom Hybrid Tom 3 To m R o om 3

Snare Drum Rim 1 Wood Block Low Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open 2 Hi-Hat Open

Synth Snare Drum Timbale 4 Low Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Hybrid Tom 4 Tom Room 4

Analog SD Vibraslap Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Hybrid Tom 5 Tom Ro om 5

Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1

Tambourine Tambourine High Tom High Tom Hybrid Tom 6 To m R o o m 6

Triangle Open Triangle Open Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1

Castanet Castanet Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal

Claves Claves Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup

Tambou ri ne Ta mb ou ri ne Tambourine Light Tambourine

Cabasa Cabasa Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal

Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell

Finger Snap Finger Snap Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2

Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap

Hand Claps Hand Claps Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2

Crash Cymbal 2 Wind Chime Down Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H

Hi-Hat Closed Agogo High Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L

Crash Cymbal 1 Wind Chime Up Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute

Hi-Hat Open Agogo Low Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open

Crash Cym Mute Bells Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L

Ride Cymbal 2 Cowbell 4 Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H

Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Shaker Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L

Ride Cymbal 1 Cowbell 3 Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H

Hi-Hat Pedal 1 Guiro Short Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L

Ride Cymbal Cup Cowbell 2 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa

Guiro Long Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas

Cym Brush Shot Cowbell 1 Samba Whistle H * Samba Whistle H * Samba Whistle H * Samba Whistle H *

Cymbal March Ta i k o 2 Samba Whistle L * Samba Whistle L * Samba Whistle L * Samba Whistle L *

Analog HH Closed Ohdaiko 2 Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short

Orch Cymbal Roll Tai k o 1 Guiro Long * Guiro Long * Guiro Long * Guiro Long *

Analog HH Open Ohdaiko 1 Claves Claves Claves Claves

Orch Cymbal Ohtsuzumi 2 Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H

Orch Cymbal Mute Ohtsuzumi 1 Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L

Kakegoe 3 Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute

Tam-Tam Kotsuzumi 4 Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open

Kakegoe 2 Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute

Kotsuzumi 3 Tr ian g l e Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open

Kakegoe 1 Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker

Kotsuzumi 2 Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells

Kotsuzumi 1 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

Lower Ke

board

Upper Keyboard

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

161

Rhythm Program

*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.

Drum

Rock Kit Electro Kit Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit

Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Kick Dance 1 Surdo Mute Surdo Mute

Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Kick Dance 2 Surdo Open Surdo Open

Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q

Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap

Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch Dance 1 * Scratch H Scratch H

Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch Dance 2 * Scratch L Scratch L

Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap

Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise

Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Dance Perc 1 Metronome Click Metronome Click

Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Reverse Dance 1 Metronome Bell Metronome Bell

Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Dance Perc 2 Seq Click L Seq Click L

Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Hi Q Dance 1 Seq Click H Seq Click H

Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Snare Analog 3 Brush Tap Brush Tap

Brush Swirl * Brush Swirl * Brush Swirl * Vinyl Noise * Brush Swirl * Brush Swirl *

Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Snare Analog 4 Brush Slap Brush Slap *

Brush Tap Swirl * Reverse Cymbal * Reverse Cymbal * Reverse Cymbal * Brush Tap Swirl * Brush Tap Swirl

Snare Roll * Snare Roll * Snare Roll * Reverse Dance 2 * Snare Roll * Snare Roll *

Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Castanet Castanet

Snare Noisy Snare Snap Elec Snare Noisy 4 Snare Techno Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2

Sticks Sticks Sticks Snare Dance 1 Sticks Sticks

Kick Soft Kick 3 Kick 3 Kick Techno Q Kick Soft Kick Soft

Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Rim Gate Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot

Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Anlg Short Kick Techno L Kick Tight Kick Tight

Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Kick Analog Kick Techno Kick Jazz Kick Jazz

Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick Anlg Side Stick Anlg Side Stick Light Side Stick Light

Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Analog Snare Clap Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3

Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Dance Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap

Snare Rock Tight Snare Noisy 3 Snare Analog 2 Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2

Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 1 Tom Analog 1 Tom Dance 1 Floor Tom L Tom Brush 1

Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hat Close Analog Hi-Hat Closed 3 Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed

Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Analog 2 Tom Dance 2 Floor Tom H Tom Brush 2

Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hat Close Anlg 2 Hat Close Anlg 3 Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal

Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Analog 3 Tom Dance 3 Low Tom Tom Brush 3

Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hat Open Analog Hi-Hat Open 3 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open

Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4 Tom Analog 4 Tom Dance 4 Mid Tom L Tom Brush 4

Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5 Tom Analog 5 Tom Dance 5 Mid Tom H Tom Brush 5

Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Analog Crash Analog Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1

Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Tom Analog 6 Tom Dance 6 High Tom Tom Brush 6

Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1

Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal

Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup

Tambourine Tambourine Ta mb ou rin e Tambourine Anlg Tambourine Tambourine

Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal

Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Analog Cowbell Dance Cowbell Cowbell

Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2

Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Analog Vibraslap Vibraslap

Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Analog Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2

Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo Analog H Bongo H Bongo H

Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo Analog L Bongo L Bongo L

Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga Analog H Conga Analog H Conga H Mute Conga H Mute

Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga Analog M Conga Analog M Conga H Open Conga H Open

Conga L Conga L Conga Analog L Conga Analog L Conga L Conga L

Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H

Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L

Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H

Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L

Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa

Maracas Maracas Maracas 2 Maracas 2 Maracas Maracas

Samba Whistle H * Samba Whistle H * Samba Whistle H * Samba Whistle H * Samba Whistle H * Samba Whistle H *

Samba Whistle L * Samba Whistle L * Samba Whistle L * Samba Whistle L * Samba Whistle L * Samba Whistle L *

Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short

Guiro Long * Guiro Long * Guiro Long * Guiro Long * Guiro Long * Guiro Long *

Claves Claves Claves 2 Claves 2 Claves Claves

Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Dance Perc 3 Wood Block H Wood Block H

Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Dance Perc 4 * Wood Block L Wood Block L

Cuica Mute Scratch H 2 Scratch H 2 Dance Breath 1 Cuica Mute Cuica Mute

Cuica Open Scratch L 2 Scratch L 2 Dance Breath 2 * Cuica Open Cuica Open

Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute

Triangle Open Triangle Open Tria n g le Op e n Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open

Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker

Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells

Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

Lower Ke

board

Upper Keyboard

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

162

*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.

Drum

Symphony Kit China Mix Kit Live!Std Kit Live!Std+P Kit Live!Funk Kit Live!Funk+P Kit

Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute

Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open

Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q

Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap

Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H

Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L

Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap

Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise

Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click

Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell

Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L

Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H

Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap

Brush Swirl * Brush Swirl * Brush Swirl * Brush Swirl * Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl *

Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap

Brush Tap Swirl * Brush Tap Swirl * Brush Tap Swirl * Brush Tap Swirl * Brush Tap Swirl * Brush Tap Swirl *

Snare Roll * Snare Roll * Snare Roll * Snare Roll * Snare Roll * Snare Roll *

Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet

Snare Soft Snare Soft Snare Soft Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Soft 2

Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks

Kick Soft 2 Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Soft

Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot H Open Rim Shot H

Gran Cassa Kick Tight Kick Tight Kick Tight Kick Tight Kick Tight

Gran Cassa Mute Kick Kick Kick Kick Short Kick Short

Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick Light Side Stick Light

Band Snare Snare Snare Snare Snare Short Snare Short

Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap

Band Snare 2 Snare Tight Snare Tight Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight H

Floor Tom L Floor Tom L Floor Tom L Floor Tom L Floor Tom L Floor Tom L

Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed

Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Floor Tom H

Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal

Low Tom Low Tom Low Tom Low Tom Low Tom Low Tom

Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open

Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Mid Tom L

Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Mid Tom H

Hand Cymbal Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1

High Tom High Tom High Tom High Tom High Tom High Tom

Hand Cymbal S Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1

Chinese Cymbal China Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal

Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup

Tambourine Tambourine Ta mb ou rin e Tam bo ur in e Tambourine Tambourine

Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal

Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell

Hand Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2

Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap

Hand Cymbal 2 S Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2

Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H

Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L

Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute

Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open

Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L

Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H

Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L

Agogo H Dagu Mute Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H

Agogo L Zhongcha Mute Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L

Cabasa Dagu Heavy Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa

Maracas Zhongcha Open Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas

Samba Whistle H * Paigu Middle Samba Whistle H * Samba Whistle H * Samba Whistle H * Samba Whistle H *

Samba Whistle L * Paigu Low Samba Whistle L * Samba Whistle L * Samba Whistle L * Samba Whistle L *

Guiro Short Xiaocha Mute Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short

Guiro Long * Bangu Guiro Long * Guiro Long * Guiro Long * Guiro Long *

Claves Xiaocha Open Claves Claves Claves Claves

Wood Block H Bangzi Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H

Wood Block L Muyu Low Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L

Cuica Mute Zhongluo Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute

Cuica Open Muyu Mid-Low Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open

Triangle Mute Zhongluo Open Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute

Triangle Open Muyu Middle Tri angl e O pen Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open

Shaker Xiaoluo Open Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker

Jingle Bells Muyu Mid-High Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells

Bell Tree Muyu High Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

Lower Ke

board

Upper Keyboard

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

163

Rhythm Program

*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.

Drum

Live!Brush Kit Live!Brush+P Kit Live!Studio Kit Live!AcousticKit Live!Power Kit 1 Live!Power Kit 2

Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute

Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open

Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q

Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap

Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H

Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L

Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap

Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise

Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click

Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell

Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L

Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H

Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap

Brush Swirl * Brush Swirl * Brush Swirl * Brush Swirl * Brush Swirl * Brush Swirl *

Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap

Brush Tap Swirl * Brush Tap Swirl * Brush Tap Swirl * Brush Tap Swirl * Brush Tap Swirl * Brush Tap Swirl *

Snare Roll * Snare Roll * Snare Roll * Snare Roll Aco * Snare Roll * Snare Roll *

Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet

Brush Slap 2 Brush Slap 2 Snare Studio 2 Snare Soft Aco SnareSoftPower 1 SnareSoftPower 2

Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks

Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Ambience H Kick Soft Aco Kick Ambient+ Kick Ambient+

Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Rim Acoustic Open Rim Power 1 Open Rim Power 2

Kick Tight Kick Tight Kick Ambience L Kick Mute Aco Kick Power Open Kick Power Open

Kick Jazz Kick Jazz Kick Studio Kick Open Aco Kick Power Mute Kick Power Mute

Side Stick Light Side Stick Light Side Stick Stick Acoustic Side Stick Power Side Stick Power

Brush Slap 3 Brush Slap 3 Snare Studio M Snare Acoustic Snare Power 1 Snare Power 2

Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Power Hand Clap Power Hand Clap Power

Brush Tap 2 Brush Tap 2 Snare Studio L Snare Rough Aco Snare Rough 1 Snare Rough 2

Tom Bru sh 1 To m B r u s h 1 Floor Tom L To m Aco u s t i c 1 To m P o w e r 1 Tom Power 1

Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-HatClosedAco Hi-HatClosePower HH Closed PW Eg

Tom Bru sh 2 To m B r u s h 2 Floor Tom H To m A c o u s t i c 2 To m Power 2 Tom P o w e r 2

Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-HatPedal Aco Hi-HatPedalPower Hi-HatPedalPower

Tom Bru sh 3 To m B r u s h 3 Low Tom Tom A c o u s t i c 3 To m P o w e r 3 To m P o w e r 3

Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Aco Hi-HatOpen Power Hi-HatOpen Power

Tom Bru sh 4 To m B r u s h 4 Mid Tom L Tom A c o u s t i c 4 To m P o w e r 4 To m P o w e r 4

Tom Bru sh 5 To m B r u s h 5 Mid Tom H To m A c o ust ic 5 Tom P o w e r 5 Tom P o w er 5

Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 CrashCymbalAco 1 CrashCymbalAco 1 CrashCymbalAco 1

Tom Bru sh 6 To m B r u s h 6 High Tom To m Acoust i c 6 Tom P o w e r 6 Tom P ower 6

Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 RideCymbal Aco 1 RideCymbal Aco 1 RideCymbal Aco 1

Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal China Cymbal Aco China Cymbal Aco China Cymbal Aco

Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup RideCymbalCupAco RideCymbalCupAco RideCymbalCupAco

Tambourine Tambourine Ta mb ou rin e Tam bo ur in e Tambourine Tambourine

Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal SplashCymbal Aco SplashCymbal Aco SplashCymbal Aco

Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell

Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 CrashCymbalAco 2 CrashCymbalAco 2 CrashCymbalAco 2

Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap

Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 RideCymbal Aco 2 RideCymbal Aco 2 RideCymbal Aco 2

Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H

Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L

Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute

Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open

Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L

Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H

Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L

Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H

Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L

Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa

Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas

Samba Whistle H * Samba Whistle H * Samba Whistle H * Samba Whistle H * Samba Whistle H * Samba Whistle H *

Samba Whistle L * Samba Whistle L * Samba Whistle L * Samba Whistle L * Samba Whistle L * Samba Whistle L *

Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short

Guiro Long * Guiro Long * Guiro Long * Guiro Long * Guiro Long * Guiro Long *

Claves Claves Claves Claves Claves Claves

Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H

Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L

Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute

Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open

Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute

Triangle Open Triangle Open Tria n g le Op e n Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open

Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker

Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells

Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Wind Chime Wind Chime Wind Chime

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

Lower Ke

board

Upper Keyboard

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

164

*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.

Drum

Live!Rock Kit Live!Real Drums Live!RealBrushes Analog T8 Kit Analog T9 Kit House Kit

Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute W Kick *

Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Disco Fx *

Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q WhiteNoiseDown 1 *

Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap PinkNoise Down 1 *

Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H WhiteNoiseDown 2 *

Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L PinkNoise Down 2 *

Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Snare Hammer Snare Drum&Bass1 White Noise Up 2 *

Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Kick Zap Hard Kick Break 2 White Noise Up 1 *

Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Snare Garg L Snare Distortion Pink Noise Up *

Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Kick Tek Power Kick Tek Power WhiteNoiseUp Rel *

Seq Click L Seq Click L Vintage Tip Kick Slimy KickDistortionRM PinkNoise Up Rel *

Seq Click H Seq Click H Vintage Swirl 1 * Kick T8 4 Kick T9 2 Kick T9 4

Brush Tap Brush Tap Vintage Slap 1 Snare Analog CR Snare Analog CR Snare T8 Rim

Brush Swirl * Brush Tap Swirl * Vintage Swirl 2 * Snare T8 7 Snare T9 5 Snare T8 5

Brush Slap Brush Slap Vintage Slap 2 SnareClap Analog Clap Analog Sm Hand Clap

Brush Tap Swirl * Brush Tap Swirl * Vintage TapSwirl * Snare T8 6 Snare T9 Gate 1 Snare Garg L

Snare Roll Rock * Snare Roll Rock * VintageSlapSwirl * Tom T8 5 Snare Rock Roll * Snare Roll *

Castanet Castanet Vintage Swirl 3 * Snare T8 5 Snare T9 3 Snare T9 3

Snare Soft Rock Snare Tight Vintage Slap 3 Kick T8 3 Snare T9 4 Snare T8 1

Sticks Sticks Sticks Snare T8 4 Snare T9 Gate 2 Snare T9 5

Kick Soft Rock Kick Genuine Kick Soft L Kick T8 2 Kick T9 4 Kick T9 1

Rim Rock Rim Real Open Rim Shot RB Snare T8 3 Snare T9 6 Snare T9 Gate

Kick Rock Heavy Kick Real 1 Kick Soft H T8 Kick Bass Kick T9 1 Kick T9 2

Kick Rock Kick Real 2 KickJazzAmbience Kick T8 1 Kick T9 3 Kick T9 5

Stick Rock Stick Real Stick Brush Snare T8 Rim Snare T9 Rim Snare T9 Rim

Snare Rock Snare Real 1 Vintage Slap 4 Snare T8 2 Snare T9 1 Snare T9 1

Hand Clap Power Clap Power Clap Power Clap T9 Clap T9 Clap T9

Snare Dry Rock Snare Real 2 Vintage Slap 5 Snare T8 1 Snare T9 2 Snare T9 2

Tom Rock 1 Tom Real 1 TomRealBrushes 1 Tom T8 1 Tom T9 1 Tom T9 1

Hi-HatClosedRock Hi-HatClosedReal Hi-Hat Closed RB Hi-Hat Closed T8 Hi-Hat Closed T9 Hi-Hat Closed T8

Tom Rock 2 Tom Real 2 TomRealBrushes 2 Tom T8 2 Tom T9 2 Tom T9 2

Hi-HatPedal Rock Hi-Hat PedalReal Hi-Hat Pedal RB Hi-Hat Pedal T8 Hi-Hat Pedal T9 Hi-Hat Pedal T9

Tom Rock 3 Tom Real 3 TomRealBrushes 3 Tom T8 3 Tom T9 3 Tom T9 3

Hi-Hat Open Rock Hi-Hat Open Real Hi-Hat Open RB Hi-Hat Open T8 Hi-Hat Open T9 Hi-Hat Open T9

Tom Rock 4 Tom Real 4 TomRealBrushes 4 Tom T8 4 Tom T9 4 Tom T9 4

Tom Rock 5 Tom Real 5 TomRealBrushes 5 Tom T8 6 Tom T9 5 Tom T9 5

CrashCymbalAco 1 CrashCymbalReal1 CrashCymbal RB 1 Crash Cymbal T8 Crash Cymbal T9 Crash Cymbal T9

Tom Rock 6 Tom Real 6 TomRealBrushes 6 Tom T8 7 Tom T9 6 Tom T9 6

RideCymbal Aco 1 RideCymbalReal 1 Ride Cymbal RB Ride Cymbal T9 Ride Cymbal T9 Ride Cymbal T9

China Cymbal Aco ChinaCymbal Real ChinaCymbal RB China Cymbal 2 China Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 4

RideCymbalCupAco RideCym Cup Real Ride Cup RB 1 RideCymbal Cup 2 RideCymbal Cup 2 RideCymbal Cup 2

Tambourine Tambourine Ta mb ou rin e Tambourine RX5 Tambourine RX5 Tambourine Hit

SplashCymbal Aco SplashCymbalReal Splash Cymbal RB Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal 2

Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell T8 Cowbell 1 Cowbell 1

CrashCymbalAco 2 CrashCymbalReal2 CrashCymbal RB 2 Crash Cymbal 4 Crash Cymbal 4 Crash Cymbal 1

Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Cowbell T8 Cowbell T8

RideCymbal Aco 2 RideCymbalReal 2 Ride Cup RB 2 Ride Cymbal 3 Ride Cymbal 3 Ride Cymbal 3

Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Conga T8 5 Conga T8 5 Bongo H Open 1 F

Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Conga T8 4 Conga T8 4 Bongo L Open 3 F

Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga T8 3 Conga Tip Conga H Tip

Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga T8 2 Conga Open Slap Conga H SlapOpen

Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga T8 1 Conga Open Conga H Open 2

Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H

Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L

Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Glass H Analog Click Agogo H

Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Glass L Conga T8 1 Agogo L

Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa

Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas T8 Maracas Slur 2 Maracas Slur 2

Samba Whistle H * Samba Whistle H * Samba Whistle H * Fx Gun 2 * Fx Gun 2 * Vox Drum L

Samba Whistle L * Samba Whistle L * Samba Whistle L * Fx Gun 1 * Fx Gun 1 * Vox Drum H

Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Analog Shaker H * Scratch H 3 * Guiro Short

Guiro Long * Guiro Long * Guiro Long * Analog Shaker L * Scratch Down * Guiro Long *

Claves Claves Claves Claves T8 Hi Q 3 Claves

Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Hi Q 1 Hi Q 1 Wood Block H

Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Wood Block L

Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Scratch H 2 Scratch H 2 Cuica H

Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Scratch L 2 Scratch L 2 Cuica L

Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute

Triangle Open Triangle Open Tria n g le Op e n Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open

Shaker Shaker Shaker Analog Shaker Analog Shaker Analog Shaker

Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Sleigh Bells Sleigh Bells Sleigh Bells

Wind Chime Wind Chime Wind Chime Wind Chime Wind Chime Wind Chime

Snare Hip 1 Snare Piccolo Snare Break Roll

Snare Hip 2 Snare T8 7 Noise Burst

Snare Hip Gate SnareRckRollDist Vox Bell

Snare Break 1 Snare Brush Mute Snare R&B 1

Kick Blip Kick Blip Hard Vox Alk

Snare Fx 1 Snare Jungle 1 Udu High

Kick Fx Hammer Kick Sustain Filter Kick

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

Lower Ke

board

Upper Keyboard

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

165

Rhythm Program

*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.

Drum SFX

HipHop Kit Drum Machine Break Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Live! SFX Kit 1

Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute

Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open

Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q

Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap

Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H

Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L

Hi-HatClosedT8 2 Snare Drum&Bass1 Finger Snap

Tom T8 3 Kick Break 2 Snare Break 8

Hi-Hat Open T8 2 Snare Distortion Snare Break 9

Tom T8 6 Kick Tek Power Hi-HatClosedBrk1 *

Crash T8 KickDistortionRM Hi-HatClosedBrk2 *

Triangle Mute BassDrumHardLong Kick Break Deep

Triangle Open BassDrumTekPower Snare Hip

Wind Chime Bass Drum Dist 5 Snare Lo-Fi

TambourineLight2 Bass Drum Dist 3 Snare Clappy

TambourineLight1 Bass Drum Dist 1 * Snare LdwH Mono

Kick HipHop 9 BD Drum & Bass 1 Snare Rock Roll *

Hi-HatClosed Tek Bass Drum Blip Snare Gate 1

Kick Gate BassDrumAnalogSm Snare Mid

Hi-HatOpen Lo-Fi Kick T8 2 Snare Break Rim

KickGranCasaOpen Kick T8 3 Kick Break Heavy

Hi-HatReverseD&B Kick T9 HD 3 Snare Hip Rim 4

Kick HipHop 1 Kick T9 2 Kick Break 2

Kick Analog CR Kick T9 4 Kick Break 1 Cutting Noise 1 * Phone Call * Cutting Noise 1 *

SnareAnalogSmRim Snare T9 Rim Snare Hip Rim 1 Cutting Noise 2 * Door Squeak * Cutting Noise 2 *

Snare HipHop 1 Snare T9 1 Snare Break 3 Door Slam *

Snare Clappy Clap T9 Snare Break 1 String Slap * Scratch Cut * String Slap *

Snare HipHop 2 Snare T9 4 Snare Break 2 Scratch Split *

Floor Tom L To m T 9 1 To m B rea k 1 Wind Chime *

Hi-HatClosed Hip Hi-Hat Closed T9 HHClosedRockSoft Telephone Ring *

Low Tom To m T 9 2 Tom Bre a k 2

Hi-Hat Pedal Hip Hi-Hat Pedal T9 Hi-Hat PedalRock

Mid Tom L To m T 9 3 To m B reak 3

Hi-Hat Open Hip Hi-Hat Open T9 HH HalfOpen Rock

High Tom To m T 9 4 To m B r e a k 4

Ride Cymbal 3 Tom T9 5 To m B reak 5

Crash Cymbal 3 Crash Cymbal T9 Crash Cymbal 1

Shaker 2 Conga T8 1 To m Bre a k 6

ScratchBDForward Ride Cymbal T9 Ride Cymbal 3

ScratchBDReverse Conga T8 2 China Cymbal 2 Flute Key Click * CarEngn Ignition * Flute Key Click *

Kick HipHop 2 Analog Click RideCymbal Cup 2 Car Tires Squeal *

SnareHipHopRim 2 Claves T8 1 Tambourine 1 Hit Car Passing *

HipHop Clap 2 Maracas T8 Splash Cymbal 2 Car Crash *

HipHop Snap 1 TambourineAna CR Cowbell 1 Siren *

Snare HipHop 3 Analog Shaker Crash Cymbal 2 Tra in *

Electric Clap 2 Cowbell T8 Cowbell RX11 Jet Plane *

Kick Hip Deep CowbellAnalog CR Ride Cymbal 2 Starship *

Kick HipHop 3 Snare T8 1 Bongo H Burst *

SnareHipHopRim 3 Snare T8 2 Bongo L Roller Coaster *

Snare HipHop 5 Snare T8 3 Conga H Tip Submarine *

Electric Clap 1 Snare Analog CR Conga H OpenSlap

Handbell H Snare Jungle 1 Conga H Open

Kick HipHop 4 Snare Drum&Bass2 Bongo 2 H

HipHop Clap 3 Snare Hip 1 Bongo 2 L

HipHop Snap 2 Snare R&B 1 Conga Open

SnareHipHopRim 5 Snare R&B 2 Agogo L Shower * Laugh * Shower 2 *

HipHop flex 1 Snare Hip 1 Cabasa Thunder * Scream * Thunder 2 *

HipHop flex 2 Snare Wood Maracas Slur Wind * Punch * Wind 2 *

Shaker 2 Snare Timbre Timbale H Stream * Heart Beat * Stream 2 *

Kick HipHop 5 Hi-HatClosedT8 1 Timbale L Bubble * Foot Steps * Bubble 2 *

SnareHipHopRim 4 Hi-Hat Open T8 1 Scratch H 3 * Feed * Feed *

Snare HipHop 6 Hi-HatClosedT8 2 Scratch Down *

Snare HipHop 11 Hi-Hat Open T8 2 Claves

Kick HipHop 10 Hi-Hat Pedal Aco Wood Block H

Snare HipHop 7 Hi-HatClosed Aco Wood Block L

HipHop Clap 5 Hi-Hat Open Aco Scratch H 2

Conga H Tip Hi-HatClosedLoFi Scratch L 2

Conga H Heel Hi-HatOpen Lo-Fi Triangle Mute

Conga H Open Hi-HatClosed Syn Tr ian g l e Open

Conga L Open 1 Hi-Hat Open Syn Kick Break 3

Conga L Open 2 Analog Shaker 1 Kick Break 4

Kick HipHop 8 Tambourine RX5 2 Kick Break 5 * Dog * Machine Gun * Dog *

HipHop Clap 6 Tambourine 1 Hit Kick Break 6 Horse * Laser Gun * Horse *

Snare T8 1 Electric Cowbell Kick Break 7 Bird Tweet * Explosion * Bird Tweet *

Snare T8 1 H Conga T8 3 Hi-HatClosedBrk3 Firework *

HipHop Clap 7 ElectricTriangle Snare Break 4

Tom T8 1 Claves T8 2 Snare Break 5

Hi-HatClosedT8 2 Analog Shaker 2 Snare Break 6 Ghost * Ghost *

Tom T8 2 Electric Clap 1 Snare Break 7 Maou * Maou *

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

Lower Ke

board

Upper Keyboard

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

166

*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.

SFX

Live! SFX Kit 2 Noise Kit VocalEffectsKit GospelAdLibs Wonderland Kit PopLatin Kit

Cajon Low

Cajon Slap

Cajon Tip

Claves High

Claves Low

Hand Clap

Finger Snap

Castanet

Conga H Tip

Conga H Heel

Laser Beam Conga H Open

Laser Shot * Conga H Mute

Water Phone * Conga H SlapOpen

Bubble Conga H Slap

Puddle Conga H SlapMute

Thunder * Conga L Tip

Shower * Conga L Heel

Beach * Conga L Open

Stream * Conga L Mute

Footstep Conga L SlapOpen

Door Squeak Conga L Slap

Door Slam Conga L Slide *

Phone Call * White Noise * Male Ha 1 * Bass Drum Bongo H Open 1 f

Door Squeak 2 * Pink Noise * Female Ha 1 * Gran Cassa Bongo H Open 3 f

Door Slam 2 * WhiteNoiseDown 1 * Male Ha 2 * Tom 2 Bongo H Rim

Scratch Cut * PinkNoise Down 1 * Male Ha 3 * Tom 1 Bongo H Tip

Scratch Split * WhiteNoiseDown 2 * Male Bh 1 * Snare Bongo H Heel

Wind Chime * PinkNoise Down 2 * Female Bh 1 * Snare Roll * Bongo H Slap

Telephone Ring 2 * White Noise Up 2 * Male Kh 1 * Hi-Hat Closed Bongo L Open 1 f

White Noise Up 1 * Female Kh 1 * Cymbal Bongo L Open 3 f

Pink Noise Up * Male Ph 1 * Hi-Hat Open Bongo L Rim

WhiteNoiseUp Rel * Female Ph 1 * Tambourine Bongo L Tip

PinkNoise Up Rel * Male Th 1 * Finger Snap Bongo L Heel

WhiteNoiseUp LFO * Female Th 1 * Castanet Bongo L Slap

PinkNoise Up LFO * Male Bh 2 * C'mon * Triangle Mute Timbale L

Female Bh 2 * Hoo! * Wood Block L

Male Kh 2 * Aha! * Triangle Open

Female Kh 2 * Oh Yeah * Wood Block H

CarEngn Ignition * Male Ph 2 * Yayayayayah * Hand Clap

Car Tires Squeal * Female Ph 2 * Put Your Hands…* Jingle Bells Paila L

Car Passing * Male Th 2 * C'mon Now * Bell Tree Timbale H

Car Crash * Female Th 2 * Heeey * Alarm Bell *

Siren 2 * Male Ha 4 * Everybody Now * Trai n *

Train 2 * Female Ha 2 * ClapYourHands…* Horn 1 *

Jet Plane 2 * Male Ha 5 * WithAllYourSoul * Horn 2

Starship * Male Ha 6 * Stand Up On…* Siren * Paila H

Burst * Male Bh 3 * Uhh Yeah * CarEngn Ignition * Cowbell Top

Roller Coaster * Female Bh 3 * Aaoh * Car Crash * Cowbell 1

Submarine * Male Kh 3 * Come On! * Helicopter * Cowbell 2

Female Kh 3 * Yeah ! * Starship * Cowbell 3

Male Ph 3 * Alright Now! * Sheep * Guiro Short

Female Ph 3 * One * Goat * Guiro Long *

Male Th 3 * Two * Oxen * Metal Guiro Short

Female Th 3 * Three * Whinny * Metal Guiro Long *

Laugh * Male Bh 4 * Four * Horse * Tambourine

Scream 2 * Female Bh 4 * One! * Lion * Tambourim Open

Punch 2 * Male Kh 4 * Tw o! * Dog Tambourim Mute

Heart Beat * Female Kh 4 * Three! * Cat * Tambourim Tip

Foot Steps 2 * Male Ph 4 * Four! * Hen * Maracas

Female Ph 4 * Five! * Owl * Shaker

Male Th 4 * Six! * Insects Cabasa

Female Th 4 * Seven! * Frog Cuica Mute

Eight! * Twe et 1 Cuica Open

Clap! * Twe e t 2 * Cowbell High 1

Gospel Clap 1 * Cuckoo Clock * Cowbell High 2

Gospel Clap 2 * Big Clock Shekere

Bell * Shekere Tone

Telephone * Triangle Mute

Camera Triangle Open

Gnaw

Machine Gun 2 * Applause * Wind Chime

Laser Gun *

Explosion 2 *

Firework *

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

Lower Ke

board

Upper Keyboard

Rhythm Pattern Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

167

Rhythm Program

*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.

SFX

Cuban Kit Arabic Kit Turkish Kit China Kit OrchestraPerc

Asma Davul L Symphonic Gong 1

Asma Davul R Symphonic Gong L *

Asma Davul Side Symphonic Gong 2

Asma Davul Both Timpani E

KoltukDavul Flam Timpani F

KoltukDavul Teke Timpani F#

Koltuk Davul Tek Timpani G

Koltuk Davul Dum Timpani G#

Bendir Teke Flam Timpani A

Conga H Tip Bendir Teke Dead Timpani A#

Conga H Heel Bendir Tek Dead Da Cha 2 Timpani B

Conga H Open Nakarazan Dom Bendir Teke Da Gu mp Timpani C

Conga H Mute Cabasa Bendir Tek Da Gu Rim Timpani C#

Conga H SlapOpen Nakarazan Edge Bendir Slap Da Gu f Timpani D

Conga H Slap Hager Dom Bendir Dum Da Gu Hand Timpani D#

Conga H SlapMute Hager Edge Zil Right Close Da Gu Roll * Timpani High E

Conga L Tip Bongo H Zil Right Open Pai Gu 4 Gran Cassa Hard

Conga L Heel Bongo L Zil Left Close Pai Gu 4 High Gran Cassa Soft

Conga L Open Conga H Mute Zil Left Open Pai Gu 3 Gran Cassa Hit

Conga L Mute Conga H Open Tef Te k e F l a m Pai Gu 3 High Gran Cassa Cresc

Conga L SlapOpen Conga L Tef Te k M ute Pai Gu 2 ConcertSnareDrum

Conga L Slap Zagrouda H Te f Te k e D amped Pai Gu 2 High Snare Roll *

Conga L Slide * Zagrouda L * TefTekMuteMedium Pai Gu 1 Snare Drum Light

Bongo H Open 1 f Kick Soft Tef Dum Mute Luo High 1 Snare Ensemble

Bongo H Open 3 f Side Stick Te f C y m b a l Gong Batter Sus Cym 1 Roll S *

Bongo H Rim Snare Soft Tef Cymbal Mute Jin Luo Sus Cymbal 1

Bongo H Tip Arabic Hand Clap Tef Tremolo * Luo High 2 Sus Cym 2 Roll L *

Bongo H Heel Snare Drum Te f S h a k e 1 Luo Mid-Low Sus Cymbal 2

Bongo H Slap Floor Tom L Tef S ha ke 2 Luo Concert Tom 1

Bongo L Open 1 f Hi-Hat Closed Te f Te k F l a m Jin Luo Low OrchCymbal 1 ckd

Bongo L Open 3 f Floor Tom H Tef Full Open Da Cha 1 Concert Tom 2

Bongo L Rim Hi-Hat Pedal Tef Te k e O p S h o r t Da Cha Effect Orch Cymbal 1

Bongo L Tip Low Tom Tef Te k O p S h o r t Zhongcha Concert Tom 3

Bongo L Heel Hi-Hat Open Tef Te k O p e n Xiaocha Effect Orch Cymbal 2

Bongo L Slap Mid Tom L Te f D u m Op e n Xiaocha Concert Tom 4

Timbale L Mid Tom H Hollo FingerDead Mang Luo Low Concert Tom 5

Crash Cymbal 1 Hollo Slap Mang Luo Mid Finger Cymbal

High Tom Hollo Dum Qing Gong

Ride Cymbal 1 Kasik Finger Bell Ride Cymbal Tip

Crash Cymbal 2 Kasik Flam Luo Big China Cymbal

Paila L Duhulla Dom BDarbuka TekDead Muyu Low Ride Cymbal Cup

Timbale H Tambourine BDarbuka TekFlam Muyu Mid-Low Tambourine

Duhulla Tak BassDarbuka Teke Muyu Mid Splash Cymbal

Cowbell BDarbukaTekeFin1 Muyu High Cowbell

Duhulla Sak BDarbukaTekeFin2 Nanbangzi Roll * Jingle Ring

Claves Bass Darbuka Tek Nanbangzi Castanet Roll *

Paila H Doff Dom BassDarbukaSlap1 Bangu Table Castanet

Cowbell Top Katem Dom BassDarbukaSlap2 Ban Bongo H Stick

Katem Tak Bass Darbuka Dum Bangu Roll * Bongo L Stick

Katem Sak DarbukaRollClose * ChineseOperaVo 1 * Conga H Stick

Katem Tak Darbuka RollOpen * ChineseOperaVo 2 * Conga L Stick

Guiro Short Doff Tak DarbukaTekeFlamD ChineseOperaVo 3 * Whip

Guiro Long * Tab la D om Darbuka Tek Dead Yunluo F Rotating Tom 1

Tabla Tak 1 DarbukaTekDamped Yunluo F# Tubular Bell L

Tabla Tik Darbuka TekeFlam Yunluo G Rotating Tom 2

Tambourine Tab la Tak 2 Darbuka Teke Yunluo G# Tubular Bell M

Tabla Sa k DarbukaTekeFin 1 Yunluo A Rotating Tom 3

Tabla Roll Edge * DarbukaTekeFin 2 Yunluo A# Tubular Bell H

Tabla Flam Darbuka Tek 1 Yunluo B Rotating Tom 4

Maracas Sagat 1 DarbukaTekeFin 3 Yunluo C Rotating Tom 5

Shaker Tabel Dom DarbukaTekeFin 4 Yunluo C# Tem p l e B l o c k H

Cabasa Sagat 3 Darbuka Tek 2 Yunluo D Te m p l e B l o ck L

Tabel Tak Darbuka Slap Med Yunluo D# Claves

Sagat 2 Darbuka Slap Yunluo E Wood Block H

Rik Dom Darbuka Dum Yunluo High F Wood Block L

Rik Tak 2 Bongo Tek Roll * Yunluo High F# Anveil

Rik Finger 1 Bongo Flam Yunluo High G Triangle Roll *

Rik Tak 1 Bongo Tek Flam Yunluo High G# Triangle Mute

Rik Finger 2 Bongo Tek Yunluo High A Triangle Open

Rik BrassTremolo * Bongo Slap Yunluo High A# Bell Tree

Rik Sak Bongo Flam Hi Yunluo High B Sleigh Bells

Rik Tik Bongo Dum Yunluo High C Wind Chime

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

$

%

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

*ᅊ

$ᅊ

&

'

(

)

*

&ᅊ

'ᅊ

)ᅊ

Lower Ke

board

Upper Keyboard

Rhythm Sequence Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

168

Rhythm Sequence Program

With the Rhythm Sequence Program function, you can

string together any of the Electone’s existing rhythms and

the rhythms of your own creation together to make

complete rhythm compositions.

You can save four rhythm compositions (each containing

up to 140 bars) to the Sequence buttons on the panel for

future recall. Two or more rhythm compositions can be

played back in succession, letting you divide a Song into

parts and play back the rhythm data as desired. Here are a

couple of example applications:

• When you want to play more than two Songs in a

medley, save the rhythm composition for each Song to

a separate sequence button. You can then recall each

desired Song by simply pressing the corresponding

sequence button to which the Song is saved.

• When you want to practice a Song in separate sections

(for example, separately practicing the verse, chorus

and bridge), divide the Song into the relevant parts. For

example, save the intro part to the [SEQ. 1] button, the

main chorus part to the [SEQ. 2] button, the ending to

the [SEQ. 3] button, and so on. Then, recall the desired

part simply by pressing the appropriate sequence

button. You can also play through a Song by recalling

all the parts in sequence.

There are two ways to program a Rhythm Sequence:

creating your own sequence from scratch, or copying and

editing an existing sequence that is similar to the

sequence you want to create.

Reference pages

• Programming a Sequence (page 169)

• Copying a Rhythm Sequence (page 173)

1 Press the [SEQUENCE] button in the

DISPLAY SELECT section.

The MENU Page of the Sequence display appears.

Any rhythm currently playing will automatically be

stopped when you call up the Rhythm Sequence

Program function.

2 Press one of the Sequence buttons

([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) on the left half in

the display to select the Rhythm

Sequence number you want to edit.

The lamp of the selected numbered sequence button

in the Rhythm section lights.

Selecting a sequence

Rhythm Sequence Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

169

Rhythm Program

Instead of pressing the Sequence button on the

display, you can press one of the sequence buttons in

the Rhythm section on the panel to select the

sequence number.

This selects the Sequence number, to which a

rhythm composition can be saved.

If you want to edit an existing rhythm composition,

refer to “Copying a Rhythm Sequence” on page 173.

If you want to program a Rhythm Sequence from

scratch, refer to “Programming a Sequence” below.

1 Press the [RHYTHM] button at the top

right of the display to call up the

RHYTHM Page.

2 Press the rhythm button corresponding

to the rhythm you want to enter to the

sequence. If you press User button [1]

or [2], you can select a rhythm of your

own creation (User rhythm).

The rhythm menu of the selected rhythm button is

displayed.

3 Select the desired rhythm from the

displayed rhythm menu.

4 Select a rhythm section (Main A – D, Fill

in A – D, Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3, or

Break) by pressing one of the rhythm

control buttons on the panel.

The selected rhythm and section appears at the top

of the display.

NOTE

• When entering an Intro section, you can confirm the

number of measures at the top of the display.

• When you press the ENDING [1] button while the Main

section is playing back, a fill in pattern will be called up

before the Ending 1 pattern. In the Rhythm Sequence

program, however, a fill in pattern is not called up when

Ending 1 is entered to the Sequence.

5 Press the [SET] button in the display.

One measure of the selected rhythm is entered and

its name is displayed as a box in the rhythm row on

the display. When the rhythm is entered, the cursor

(colored orange) will automatically move one step to

the right. A maximum of 140 measures can be

entered to a single sequence. When you select an

ending pattern and press the [SET] button, an entire

ending pattern (more than one measure) is entered.

You cannot enter a rhythm after an ending pattern.

6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 above to enter

the rhythm and create your own rhythm

composition.

Turning the power off before quitting or closing the

Rhythm Sequence Program erases any sequences you

have made. Before turning the power off, quit the

Rhythm Sequence Program (page 172).

You can play a sequence you are editing at any time to

audition the changes.

1 Move the cursor to the desired position

for playback.

Move the cursor by using the Data Control dial, or

the POSITION buttons on the display.

Programming a sequence

Auditioning a sequence

Rhythm Sequence Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

170

2 Press the rhythm [START] button on the

panel.

The Sequence plays back. Pressing the [START]

button again stops playback.

You can insert a new rhythm between the rhythms you

have already entered, or delete the entered rhythm from

the sequence.

POSITION

These are cursor controls for moving the cursor (colored

orange) along the rhythm row in the display.

Moves the cursor to the first position.

Moves the cursor one step to the left.

Moves the cursor one step to the right.

Moves the cursor five steps to the right.

DATA

These are data controls for entering rhythms and deleting

existing rhythms in the rhythm row.

NOTE

When you insert an ending pattern into the editing sequence,

any existing rhythm data that follows an Ending pattern is

automatically deleted.

SET

For initially entering a rhythm to an empty position

in the rhythm row, or for replacing a pattern at the

cursor position. Pressing the [SET] button enters the

rhythm selected from the rhythm menu to the

cursor position.

This operation is not available between measures of

an ending pattern.

INSERT

For inserting a rhythm before the current cursor

position. The new rhythm is entered just before the

cursor position and all other rhythms to the right of

the cursor are moved to accommodate the new

number. This operation is not available between

measures of an ending pattern.

Additional rhythms cannot be entered beyond the

Rhythm sequence function’s capacity of 140. If the

Insert operation results in the rhythm number going

over the capacity, a “Data Full” message appears and

the operation cannot be executed.

DELETE

For deleting a rhythm at the current cursor position.

When the ending pattern is selected, pressing the

[DELETE] button deletes the entire ending pattern

(more than one measure).

CLEAR

For erasing all patterns entered to the selected

sequence.

After selecting [CLEAR], a message appears

prompting confirmation of the operation.

Select [CLEAR] to clear the currently selected

Rhythm Sequence, or select [CANCEL] to abort the

operation and return to the previous display.

The Registration Sequence feature allows you to have

desired Registrations automatically called up in sequence,

when playing a Rhythm Sequence. It lets you program the

timing (measure/beat/clock) at which the Registration is

changed. You can also program the Next Unit function in

Registration Sequence.

A Registration Sequence is saved as a part of the

corresponding Rhythm Sequence.

With this feature, you can have the sounds of the

instrument change as desired automatically to match the

Rhythm Sequence playback.

1 Press the [REGIST] button at the top

right in the display to call up the

Registration Sequence display.

NOTE

If you are loading a Registration while a rhythm is playing,

the sequence data and User rhythms in the Registration

data cannot be loaded.

Editing an existing Rhythm

Sequence

Programming a Registration

Sequence

Rhythm Sequence Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

171

Rhythm Program

The Registration Sequence is programmed from this

display. The entered Registration number is shown

along the Registration row in the middle of the

display.

2 Select a Bank, then press the desired

numbered button in the Registration

Memory section.

3 Using the buttons in the

display or the Data Control dial, set the

Measure/Beat/Clock position at which

you want to change the Registration (1

beat = 96 clocks).

When using the Data Control dial, first press the

number you wish to change in the display, then turn

the dial.

4 Press the DATA [SET] button in the

display.

The Registration number appears in the display (in

the timing order), indicating that the Registration is

entered. Up to 140 Registrations can be entered.

If some Registration numbers are entered to the

same Measure/Beat/Clock, the last entered one takes

priority.

5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 above to set

the Registration Sequence.

Entering Next Unit:

When you program the Next Unit function in

Registration Sequence, the next registration data in

current Song can be loaded automatically just by playing

the Rhythm Sequence.

1 Using the buttons in the

display or the Data Control dial, set the

Measure/Beat/Clock position at which

you want to enter the Next Unit (1 beat =

96 clocks).

2 Press the NEXT UNIT [INSERT] button in

the display.

The Next Unit mark appears at the timing point

you set in step 1, indicating that the Next Unit is

entered.

You can move or delete the entered Registration

Sequence (Registration number or Next Unit data) from

the sequence.

To move an entry:

1 Using the POSITION buttons, move the

cursor and select the data (Registration

number or Next Unit) you want to move.

2 Change the position by pressing the

Bar/Beat/Clock buttons in the display.

3 To move the Registration number

timing, press the DATA [SET] button. To

move the Next Unit timing, press the

NEXT UNIT [SET] button.

The position of the Registration number or Next

Unit is changed and displayed in the proper order.

Next Unit Loading Time

• Loading a Next Unit may take a few seconds (the time

may differ depending on the size of the data to be

loaded).

• Next Unit data can be loaded by two ways: using the right

footswitch and programming Next Unit in the

Registration Sequence. Loading time is the same

regardless of which way you load the Next Unit data.

Editing an existing Registration

Sequence

Rhythm Sequence Program

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

172

To erase an entry:

1 Using the POSITION buttons, move the

cursor and select the data (Registration

number or Next Unit) you want to delete.

2 Press the [DELETE] button to delete the

data.

You can quit the Rhythm Sequence Program from any of

its display pages. When you quit, the sequence you have

made will be automatically saved.

To quit the Rhythm Sequence Program:

Press the [SEQUENCE] button on the panel.

The Voice Display appears, indicating that the Rhythm

Sequence Program is closed.

To play any of the Rhythm Sequences

you have created:

1 Press the appropriate Sequence button

([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) on the panel.

The SEQ button’s lamp lights.

2 Press the rhythm [START] button.

The rhythm in the selected sequence starts playback.

When one of the four Rhythm Sequences is playing,

each programmed rhythm that plays is indicated by

the lit LED of the Rhythm buttons.

The Registration Memory also changes with

Rhythm Sequence playback, if the sequence includes

a Registration Sequence.

Rhythm playback automatically stops when the

sequence reaches its end.

If you’ve stopped rhythm playback in the middle of

the sequence, press the [START] button again to

resume playback.

You can also have up to all four Rhythm Sequences

automatically play in order, one after another.

1 Press the desired Sequence buttons,

making sure that all their LEDs are lit.

2 Press the rhythm [START] button.

The Rhythm Sequences start from the lowest

number and play in order automatically to the

highest number. (For example, if you press Sequence

buttons 4, 2 and 1 in that order, the sequences will be

played back not in the order you pressed them, but

in their numeric order: 1, 2, then 4.) This function

effectively allows you to make a long Rhythm

Sequence that exceeds the 140-pattern memory limit

of a single sequence.

Pressing one of the SEQ. buttons while a Rhythm

Sequence is playing back automatically cancels the

pressed sequence, and its LED turns off. You cannot

cancel a sequence that is currently playing. The SEQ.

lamp goes out when the sequence assigned to it is

finished playing.

To start a sequence using the Left

Footswitch:

You can start or stop the Rhythm Sequence playback

using the left footswitch.

1 Press the desired Sequence buttons,

making sure that all their LEDs are lit.

2 Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button on the

panel to call up the Footswitch display,

LEFT Page.

Quitting the Rhythm Sequence

Program

NOTICE

When quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program, the

square at the top left of the display turns light blue for a

few seconds, indicating that the sequence is currently

being saved. Do not turn the power off while the

sequence is being saved.

Playing Rhythm Sequences

Playing all sequences in order

Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data to a USB

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

173

Rhythm Program

3 Set the control mode of the Footswitch

to RHYTHM STOP.

(See page 174 for information about the Footswitch

settings.)

4 Press the Left Footswitch with your

right foot to turn the sequence on.

Pressing the Left Footswitch again in the middle of

the sequence playback cancels the Rhythm

Sequence.

When you are playing a Rhythm Sequence that is

made up of several sequences (SEQ. buttons),

pressing the Left footswitch turns off the currently

playing Rhythm Sequence, and pressing it again

starts the next sequence.

You can copy a Rhythm Sequence stored on a sequence

button to another button. You can also add a Rhythm

Sequence to the end of another Rhythm Sequence.

1 Select the destination sequence for the

copy operation in the Sequence Menu

page.

2 Press the EDIT [COPY] or [ADD] button

in the Sequence Menu page.

The Copy From or Add From display appears.

NOTE

If you add a Rhythm Sequence to another Rhythm

Sequence that has an ending at the end, the section will

automatically change to MAIN A and the new sequence

will be added after the MAIN A part.

3 Select the number of the desired

Rhythm Sequence program to which

you want to copy or to which you want

to add.

A message appears prompting confirmation of

operation.

4 Press the [COPY] or [ADD] button to

copy or add the Rhythm Sequence.

Press [CANCEL] to abort the operation.

5 If necessary, edit the sequence.

Refer to the section “Editing an existing Rhythm

Sequence” on page 170 and/or “Editing an existing

Registration Sequence” on page 171.

Saving Rhythm Pattern and

Rhythm Sequence Data to a

USB Flash Drive

You can save your own rhythm patterns (created in the

Rhythm Pattern Program) and Rhythm Sequences

(created in the Rhythm Sequence Program) to a USB

flash drive. Refer to the section “Saving Registrations and

Other Data to a Unit” on page 116 for instructions.

When loading your original Rhythm data from a USB

flash drive back to the Electone, be sure to stop the

rhythm if it is playing. Loading cannot be executed when

a rhythm is running.

Copying a Rhythm Sequence

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

174

Foot Controllers

The Electone features a variety of convenient foot-operated controllers that allow you to execute various

performance functions and switch effects on/off, without taking your hands from the keyboard.

Footswitches

The Electone has two Footswitches on the main

expression pedal. The Right Footswitch is used for the

Registration Shift function. The Left Footswitch can be

set to control one of the following functions: Rhythm,

Glide, and Rotary speaker.

See page 97 for the details of the Registration Shift

function or Right Footswitch.

The explanation of the Left Footswitch is given here.

1 Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button.

2 Press the [LEFT] button at the top right

of the display to call up the LEFT Page.

In this display, you can assign the control function to

the Left Footswitch: Rhythm, Glide, and Rotary

Speaker.

If you choose OFF here, the Left Footswitch will not

control any function.

NOTE

When the Next Page function of the score display is

assigned to the left foot switch, and if rhythm, glide and/or

rotary speaker are assigned to the left foot switch as well,

pressing the foot switch performs both the assigned

function and the Next Page function.

For details on the Next Page function, refer to page 123.

Left Footswitch Right Footswitch

Expression

Pedal

Footswitches

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

175

Foot Controllers

You can control the rhythm start/stop or switch the

rhythm sections by using the Left Footswitch.

STOP

Switches the rhythm on/off whenever you press the

Footswitch.

BREAK

When you press the Footswitch, the Break section turns

on. This function corresponds to the [BREAK] button on

the panel.

MAIN A – MAIN D

These functions correspond to the MAIN/FILL IN [A] –

[D] buttons on the panel.

For example, when the [MAIN A] button is selected in

this display and you press the Footswitch, the rhythm

section switches to Main A or Fill In A.

INTRO 1 – INTRO 3

These functions correspond to the INTRO [1] – [3]

buttons on the panel. For example, when the INTRO [1]

button is selected in this display and you press the

Footswitch, the rhythm section switches to Intro 1.

ENDING 1 – ENDING 3

These functions correspond to the ENDING [1] – [3]

buttons on the panel. For example, when the ENDING

[1] button is selected in this display and you press the

Footswitch, the rhythm section switches to Ending 1.

After the ending pattern is played, the rhythm stops.

Reference page

• Rhythm Structure (page 55)

You can control the Glide effect by using the Left

Footswitch.

Pressing the Footswitch immediately lowers the pitch of

the selected Voice or Voices by a half-step and releasing it

slowly returns the pitch to the original.

Voice Selections (UPPER1/UPPER2/

LEAD1/LEAD2/LOWER1/LOWER2)

Select the desired Voice section(s) to which the Glide

function is to be applied.

TIME

Determines the speed of the Glide function, or in other

words, how gradually the pitch returns when the

Footswitch is released. Higher values make the speed

slower.

Range: 1 – 5

Controlling the Rhythm Controlling Glide

Foot Pedal (sold separately)

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

176

You can control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off ) by

using the Left Footswitch.

Reference page

• Rotary Speaker (page 47)

When the [Rotary Speaker] button is selected in this

display and you press the Footswitch, the Rotary Speaker

effect is switched on or off. This function corresponds to

the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel. To use

this function, you’ll need to make the appropriate Rotary

Speaker settings for each Voice section or Organ Flute

Voice. For details, see page 47.

From the MDR display, you can call up another page of

the music score by using the Left Footswitch. For details,

see page 123.

By following the settings on page 43, you can control the

Super Articulation Voice (of which the name starts with

“S-”) by using the Left Footswitch.

Foot Pedal (sold separately)

The Foot Pedal can be used to turn one of the following

on and off: Sustain effect, Melody On Chord function,

Lead Slide effect, or Solo function.

NOTE

• One or more functions can be assigned to the Foot Pedal

simultaneously. This enables you to use the Foot Pedal to instantly

turn on/off all assigned functions.

• The foot pedal which can be used is FC4A/FC5.

• Other than the above-mentioned functions, the foot pedal cannot

be assigned the functions.

You can control the on/off status of sustain for the Upper

and Lower keyboards by using the Foot Pedal. Sustain for

the Pedalboard cannot be controlled.

1 Make sure that the Upper and/or Lower

Sustain buttons have been turned on.

Reference page

• Sustain (page 46)

2 Connect a Foot Pedal to the [FOOT

PEDAL] jack located on the rear of the

Electone.

Sustain is off in this status.

Reference page

• Connecting a Foot Pedal (page 186)

3 To apply sustain, press the Foot Pedal.

Sustain is constantly applied as long as the Foot

Pedal is pressed. Releasing the Foot Pedal turns

sustain off.

When the Foot Pedal is not

connected:

Sustain is applied constantly, as long as the front

panel Sustain buttons are on.

When the Foot Pedal is connected:

Sustain is canceled even if the front panel Sustain

buttons are on.

Controlling Rotary Speaker

Calling up another page of the

music score

Controlling the Super

Articulation Voices

Controlling Sustain

Foot Pedal (sold separately)

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

177

Foot Controllers

When the Foot Pedal is continuously

pressed:

Sustain is applied constantly, as long as the front

panel Sustain buttons are on.

1 Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button on the

front panel.

The Melody On Chord section appears in the right

half of the display.

2 Set the Foot Pedal control to “ON,” and

select one of the modes (1 to 3).

Reference page

• Melody On Chord (page 65)

3 Press the Foot Pedal when you want to

apply the M.O.C. effect.

The M.O.C. effect is applied constantly, as long as

the Foot Pedal is pressed.

When you release the Foot Pedal, the M.O.C. effect

is cancelled.

1 Call up the Voice Condition display

Page 2 of the Lead Voice section to

which you want to apply the Lead Slide

effect.

Reference page

• Voice Condition display (page 42)

2 Press the [FOOT PEDAL] button of the

Slide section on the display.

3 Press the Foot Pedal when you want to

apply the Slide effect.

The Slide effect is applied as long as the Foot Pedal is

pressed. Releasing the Foot Pedal, cancels the Lead

Slide effect.

You can turn the Solo function on/off by using the Foot

Pedal. See page 27 for more information.

Controlling Melody On Chord

Controlling Lead Slide with Foot

Pedal (sold separately)

Controlling the Solo function

Expression Pedals

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

178

Expression Pedals

The Expression pedal can be used to control the volume

with your foot as you play.

The 2nd Expression Pedal can be used to control the

Pitch Bend and the Tempo of the Rhythm. It also features

a center detent for easily returning to the middle (zero)

position. The explanation of the 2nd Expression Pedal is

given here.

Reference page

• Getting Started (page 13)

1 Press the [UTILITY] button on the front

panel.

The Utility display appears.

2 Press the [EXP.] button in the upper

right of the display to call up the EXP.

(Expression) Page.

In this display, you can assign the Pitch Bend control

or Tempo control to the 2nd Expression Pedal. If

both Pitch Bend and Rhythm Tempo controls are set

to ON, both functions are applied when you press

the 2nd Expression Pedal.

Generally one of them is assigned to the 2nd

Expression Pedal.

MODE

Determines the range of the Pitch Bend control. Each

step changes the pitch range by a semitone.

Range: 1 – 12

The setting 2 (NARROW) results in a small amount of

pitch variation (over +/- two semitones); the setting 12

(WIDE) results in a large amount of pitch variation (over

+/- one octave).

Voice Sections (PITCH BEND)

Selects the Voice sections to which the Pitch Bend

function will be applied, and turns the function ON.

Pitch Bend can be selected independently or together for

Upper Voices 1 and 2, Lead Voice 1 and 2, Pedal Voices 1

and 2.

2nd Expression Pedal

Expression Pedal

Controlling Pitch Bend

Expression Pedals

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

179

Foot Controllers

MODE

Determines the range of tempo change.

Range: 1 – 12

The setting 2 (NARROW) results in a small amount of

tempo change (70% – 140%); the setting 12 (WIDE)

results in a large amount of tempo change (50% – 200%).

TEMPO

When you want to control the tempo with the 2nd

Expression Pedal, set this to “ON.”

When set to on, pressing the pedal down with your toe

speeds up the tempo and pressing it back with your heel

slows it down. Because of the spring-loaded center

detent, you can instantly return to the normal tempo by

releasing your foot from the pedal.

Controlling the Rhythm Tempo

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

180

Transpose and Pitch Controls

There are two pitch-related controls on the Electone: Transpose and Pitch. Transpose allows you to change the

key of the instrument and Pitch lets you finely adjust the tuning.

Transpose and Pitch can be adjusted in the Utility display. (The settings here cannot be recorded to the Music

Data Recorder.)

1 Press the [UTILITY] button.

The Utility display appears.

2 Press the [PITCH] button at the top right

of the display to call up the PITCH Page.

In this display, you can change the Transpose and

Pitch settings by using the buttons on the

display or the Data Control dial.

TRANSPOSE

Determines the coarse pitch setting of all the Voices, and

is adjustable in half-steps (semitones).

Range: -6 – +6

PITCH

Determines the fine pitch setting of all the Voices. Each

step changes the pitch by 0.2 Hz. The default Pitch is

440.0 Hz (corresponding to key A3).

Range: 427.2 Hz – 452.6 Hz

You can also change the Transpose and Pitch for each

Voice section, in the Voice Condition display. For more

information, see page 44.

NOTE

The Transpose/Pitch setting here is not applied to an XG Song.

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

181

Connections

On the backside and front left side of this Electone is a separate panel equipped with various input/output

terminals and miscellaneous controls, including a terminal for connecting a Foot Pedal (sold separately).

Accessory Jacks and

Controls

This section provides brief explanations for each jack/

control on the Electone. For details on connecting to

external devices, see page 183.

DC IN jack

For connecting the AC adaptor.

PHONES jack

For connection of a stereo headphone set. When

headphones are connected to this jack, sound to the

Electone’s speaker system is automatically cut off,

allowing you to play without disturbing others.

Reference page

• Using headphones (page 183)

MIC jack

For connecting a mono input, such as a microphone. This

Electone outputs the microphone signal, with reverb

processing, through the OUTPUT jacks or AUX OUT

jacks.

Reference page

• Connecting a microphone (page 185)

MIC VOLUME knob

For adjusting the level of input signal from the MIC jack.

USB TO DEVICE terminal

For connecting USB storage devices such as USB flash

drive.

Accessory Jacks and Controls

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

182

FOOT PEDAL jack

For connecting to a Foot Pedal (sold separately).

Reference page

• Foot Pedal (Sold Separately) (page 176)

MIDI IN/OUT terminals

For connecting external MIDI devices such a synthesizer

or sequencer. You can also use these to connect with a

computer that has a MIDI Interface.

Reference pages

• Controlling external MIDI devices from the Electone

(page 185)

• Controlling the Electone from an external device (page 186)

• Connection with Computer (page 187)

USB terminals

-1 [USB TO HOST] terminal

For connecting to a computer with a USB cable. To

connect to a computer, make sure that an

appropriate USB-MIDI driver is installed to the

computer.

Reference page

• Connection with Computer (page 187)

-2 [USB TO DEVICE] terminal

For connecting USB storage devices (such as USB

flash drive).

TO PEDAL terminal

For connecting to the Pedal Unit.

Reference page

• Connecting a Pedal Unit (page 186)

AUX IN (Phone; L/L+R, R) jacks

This pair of stereo phone jacks is for connection to an

external device. The signal from the connected external

device sounds from external speakers connected to the

Electone.

Reference page

• Outputting the Sound of an external device through the

external speakers of the Electone (page 185)

AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) jacks

-1 SUB (1, 2) jacks

For connection to an external amplifier/speaker

system. These outputs can be selected for each part.

The output level is fixed and cannot be controlled

with the MASTER VOLUME dial.

-2 MAIN (L/L+R, R) jacks

This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an

external amplifier/speaker. The output level is fixed

and cannot be controlled.

Reference pages

• Playing the sounds of the Electone through an external audio

system (page 183)

• Recording the sounds of the Electone to an external recorder

(page 184)

OUTPUT (L/L+R, R) jacks

This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an external

amplifier/speaker. Connect the included speakers.

The output level can be controlled.

NOTE

• While using the headphone jack, the sound is not outputted from

the OUTPUT jacks.

• Speakers are not included with the ELCU-M02. Use commercially

available powered speakers.

Reference page

Recording the sounds of the Electone to an external recorder

(page 184)

-1 -2

USB

USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial

interface for connecting a computer with peripheral

devices.

Connection Examples – External Devices

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

183

Connections

Connection Examples –

External Devices

CAUTION

Before connecting the Electone to other electronic

components, turn off the power to all the components.

Before turning the power of the components on or off, set all

volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or

damage to the components may occur.

To use headphones, connect them to one of the PHONES

jacks (standard 1/4" phone jacks).

By using the OUTPUT jacks, you can connect your

Electone to external powered speakers. If you’re

connecting the Electone to a mono device, use only the

OUTPUT L/L+R jack.

NOTE

• When sounding the Electone from the speakers using the

OUTPUT jacks, connecting a set of headphones automatically

disables the sound from the speakers.

• Speakers are not included with the ELCU-M02. Please use

commercially available powered speakers.

Generally, when you use this Electone on stage (in

concert, etc.), you should connect it to a mixer. By using a

mixer, you can easily adjust the volume and tone quality

of each component.

To connect to a mixer, use the AUX OUT jacks of the

Electone. The Electone features two types of AUX OUT

jacks: MAIN and SUB, allowing you to assign some parts

of the Electone's output to the SUB jacks and the other

parts to the MAIN jacks. In this way, you can apply

effects to the specific parts or adjust the volume balance

among the parts with an external mixer. For details, see

“Selecting Outputs for Each Part” on page 184.

AUX OUT of this Electone is a a terminal of LEVEL

FIXED terminal which outputs on a fixed level.

The OUTPUT terminal can be used for connection the

Electone with a mixer.

The OUTPUT terminal can be adjusted the output level

by using the MASTER VOLUME dial.

*The Unbalanced line is intended for line-level signals.

Using headphones

Playing the sounds of the Electone

through an external audio system

PHONES

AUX OUT L/L+R R

Speaker (Left) Speaker (Right)

Using a mixer for live performance

Jacks Output Type

AUX OUT MAIN jacks

L/L+R, R

Unbalanced*

LEVEL FIXED

AUX OUT SUB jacks

1, 2

Unbalanced

LEVEL FIXED

OUTPUT jacks

L/L+R, R

Unbalanced

LEVEL FIXED

AUX OUT

(MAIN)

L/L+R 2

AUX OUT

(SUB)

Mixer

Main Speakers

(ex. Powered-amp Speakers)

Monitor

Speakers

SoundSound

Sound

Other keyboard

MIC.

External

effect

device

Other

Parts

Some

Parts

Connection Examples – External Devices

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

184

Power-on procedure

Before turning the power on to all components, set all

volume levels to minimum (0) then turn on the power in

the following order:

(1) Electone and external keyboard(s)

(2) Mixer

(3) Powered Speaker

To turn the power off, first turn down the volume for

each device, then turn off the power in the reverse order

(3 → 2 → 1).

You can assign each individual part of the Electone’s

sounds such as Voice, Percussion, to be output from

specific AUX OUT jacks: MAIN and/or SUB.

1 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the

GLOBAL Page of the Utility display.

2 Press the [AUX OUT] button in the upper

right of the display to call up the AUX

OUT Page.

You can assign individual parts to the AUX OUT

MAIN and/or SUB jacks: each Voice section, Organ

Flute Voice, Main drum, Add drum,

Accompaniment, Keyboard Percussion, XG and

microphone to the AUX OUT MAIN and/or SUB

jacks.

3 Turn the desired output on for each

part.

You can select these from MAIN, SUB1, SUB2 and

SUB1&2.

If you select a setting other than MAIN, no sound

will be heard from the headphones and monitor

speakers because the parts assigned to SUB1, SUB2

and SUB1&2 will not be output through PHONES

and OUTPUT jacks.

Any parts assigned to the AUX OUT MAIN or

SUB1&2 will be output in stereo (1: left, 2: right).

Any parts assigned to AUX OUT SUB1 or SUB2 will

be output in mono.

NOTE

• Chorus and variation effects of the Rhythm, and Reverb

are not applied to the sound output through SUB1, SUB2

and SUB1&2.

• The settings in the Utility display are automatically saved

when another display is called up.

By using the AUX OUT jacks, you can record your

performance sound to an external audio recorder.

NOTE

If you want to record the sound input from the AUX IN jack

together with the Electone sound, use the AUX OUT standard

phone jack on the rear side of the keyboard.

Selecting Outputs for Each Part

Recording the sounds of the

Electone to an external recorder

AUX OUT

(MAIN) L/L+R

LINE IN R

External recorder

Audio cable

Recording

Connection Examples – External Devices

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

185

Connections

You can connect the AUX IN jacks of the Electone with

the LINE OUT of an external device, such as a CD player.

The sound from the CD player is output from an external

audio system via the Electone.

First turn on the power of the external device(s), then

that of the Electone. Reverse this order when you turn the

power off.

If you’re connecting the Electone to a mono device, use

only the AUX IN L/L+R jack.

By connecting a microphone to the Electone, you can

enjoy singing along with your own performance. The

Electone outputs your vocals through the external audio

system connected to the AUX OUT or OUTPUT jacks of

the Electone.

1 Connect your microphone to the MIC

jack.

A dynamic microphone is recommended.

2 Use the INPUT VOLUME knob to set the

microphone volume.

To adjust the volume/reverb:

1 Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel

to call up the Utility display.

2 Using the MIC. REVERB and VOLUME

sliders in the GLOBAL Page, adjust the

amount of the reverb applied to the

microphone, and the volume.

Reference page

• Reverb (page 44)

No sound from the microphone can be heard even

though you raise the volume here, unless you turn

the INPUT VOLUME knob to the right. Similarly,

no reverb can be heard even though you raise the

reverb level here, unless you raise the total reverb

level with the panel REVERB control.

You can use the Electone to remotely play the Voices of a

MIDI keyboard (or tone generator), combining them

with the Electone and letting you create even richer, more

multi-layered sound textures. (The MIDI receive

channels of the MIDI keyboard must match the transmit

channels on your Electone.)

The Electone transmits as digital data a variety of

performance messages along with note information,

including values that indicate how far the expression

pedal is pressed down and how hard you play the

keyboard. How the connected external device responds

to these messages depends on the particular device.

Outputting the sound of an

external device through the

speakers of this Electone

Connecting a microphone

External

audio device

Playing

Speaker (Left) Speaker (Right)

Playing

MIC

Controlling external MIDI devices

from the Electone

Connection Examples – External Devices

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

186

If you use a USB wireless LAN adaptor, MIDI

communication is not available via neither the [USB TO

HOST] terminal nor the MIDI terminal.

NOTE

When you are using the MDR, MIDI data cannot be transmitted.

You can use an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer to

remotely play the sounds of your Electone and change its

Registrations. (You will need to set the MIDI transmit

channels of the MIDI keyboard to match the fixed receive

channels on your Electone.)

If you use the [USB TO HOST] terminal, MIDI

communication is not available via the both of the [USB

TO HOST] terminal and the MIDI terminal.

NOTE

When you are using the MDR, MIDI data cannot be received.

Use this Electone attaching the pedal unit by necessity.

Connecting a Pedal Unit to the Electone allows you to use

the Pedalboard, right and left Footswitches, Expression

Pedal and 2nd Expression Pedal. These foot operated

controls allow you to execute various performance

functions and switch effects on/off, without taking your

hands from the keyboard. If you connect and disconnect

the Pedal Unit, you must be sure to first turn off the

power of the Electone, then use the cable to make the

connection. If you connect and disconnect the cable

while the power to the Electone is on, Electone and the

Pedal Unit can be damaged.

Reference pages

• Voices for Each Keyboard (page 24)

• Footswitches (page 174)

• Expression Pedals (page 178)

Connecting an optional Foot Pedal (sold separately) to

the Electone allows you to execute various performance

functions and switch effects on/off, without taking your

hands from the keyboard. To do this, you must assign a

desired function to the Foot Pedal.

Reference pages

• Foot Pedal (Sold Separately) (page 176)

• Controlling Sustain (page 176)

• Controlling Melody On Chord (page 177)

• Controlling Lead Slide (page 177)

• Controlling the Solo Function (page 177)

Controlling the Electone from an

external device

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

MIDI cable

External MIDI device

MIDI messages

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI keyboard or synthesizer

MIDI cable

MIDI messages

Connecting a Pedal Unit

Connecting a Foot Pedal

TO PEDAL

Dedicated cable

Messages

TO MAIN

FOOT PEDAL

Foot Pedal

Connection with Computer

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

187

Connections

Connection with Computer

By using the [USB TO HOST] terminal, you can connect

the Electone and computer enabling the MIDI

communication between both. Install the USB-MIDI

driver to your computer, then make the MIDI connection

between the Electone and computer. Regarding the USB-

MIDI driver, you can download the latest version from

the Yamaha website:

http://download.yamaha.com/

Connecting your Electone to a computer opens up a

whole new world of musical possibilities. You can save

your original Songs to computer and create notation

(score writing application or sequencing software is

needed), and even upload your original Electone Song

data to your own website, to promote your talents or

share Songs with your friends. You can also control the

Electone from the computer, for example, by playing a

MIDI file on the computer to play back the sounds of

your Electone.

NOTE

When you are using the MDR, MIDI data cannot be transferred

from the computer.

The [USB TO HOST] terminal of the Electone can be

connected to the USB terminal of the computer using a

USB cable.

If you use the [USB TO HOST] terminal, MIDI

communication is not available via the both of the [USB

TO HOST] terminal and the MIDI terminal.

USB TO HOST

Computer

USB cable

Precautions when using the [USB TO

HOST] terminal

When connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST]

terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing

to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or

losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes,

restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn

the power to the instrument off then on again.

NOTICE

• Use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB

3.0 cables cannot be used.

• Before connecting the computer to the [USB TO

HOST] terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of

the computer (such as suspend, sleep, standby).

• Before turning on the power to the instrument,

connect the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

• Execute the following before turning the power to the

instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB

cable to/from the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

- Quit any open application software on the computer.

- Make sure that data is not being transmitted from

the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing

notes on the keyboard or playing back a Song.)

• While the computer is connected to the instrument,

you should wait for six seconds or more between

these operations: (1) when turning the power of the

instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately

connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.

MIDI Control

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

188

MIDI Control

When you connect your Electone with a second MIDI

device (such as a synthesizer or computer), you can

determine how the Electone controls that MIDI device,

or how the Electone is controlled.

1 Press the [UTILITY] button in the panel

to call up the Utility display.

2 Press the [MIDI] button at the top right

of the display to call up the MIDI Page.

OUTPUT

For setting the channels over which MIDI information

will be transmitted. Any channel from 1 through 16 can

be assigned to each keyboard (the Upper keyboard, the

Lower keyboard and the Pedalboard) as well as the

Expression pedal and 2nd Expression pedal. The MIDI

messages for each keyboard and Expression pedal will be

sent on the channels set here. You must set the transmit

channel here to match the receive channel of the

connected device.

Pressing each OUTPUT button calls up the channel

selection pop-up menu. After you select the desired

channel, the pop-up menu automatically closes.

The Expression pedal and 2nd Expression pedal can be

set to “OFF” (MIDI information will not be transmitted).

On the 2nd Expression pedal, CC#4 by which MIDI

information is output as Second Expression can be also

set.

MIDI OUT FILTER

Deletes unnecessary MIDI data and keeps it from being

transmitted from the Electone. After Touch, second

Expression and Rhythm start/stop are automatically

filtered.Set the parameter for which you wish to disable

transmission to ON. Set the parameter for which you

wish to disable transmission to ON.

NOTE

If you set Second Expression to on in the MIDI OUT FILTER

parameters, the setting in the OUTPUT ( ) parameters will be

disabled.

INTERNAL/EXTERNAL

Switches control over the displayed items between the

Electone (INTERNAL) or the connected device

(EXTERNAL).

-1 LEAD 1

Determines Internal or External control of the Lead

Voic es.

INT. (Internal): Lead Voice 1 is played from the

Upper keyboard of the Electone. (If the To Lower

function is on, it is played from the Lower

keyboard.)

EXT. (External): Lead Voice 1 is played from the

connected instrument via MIDI channel 4.

-2 SYNC.

To synchronize playback with an external MIDI

device, you can use either the instrument's internal

clock (INT.) or MIDI clock signals from the external

device (EXT.).

INT. (Internal): The instrument uses its own

internal clock.

EXT. (External): The instrument uses MIDI clock

signals from the external device (MIDI).

-3 EXPRESSION

Determines the control of the expression pedal

functions. Ordinarily, this control is set to AUTO.

AUTO: Internal and External is automatically

switched.

INT. (Internal): You can manually control the

expression pedal even during MDR playback.

EXT. (External): While playing the MDR or

receiving MIDI messages, the expression pedal is

invalid. (The volume is controlled by the recorded

data in a USB flash drive or received MIDI data.)

-1 -2 -3

Connecting to an iPhone/iPad

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

189

Connections

Connecting to an iPhone/

iPad

You can connect a smart device such as an iPhone or iPad

to the instrument. By using an application tool on your

smart device, you can take advantage of convenient

functions and get more enjoyment out of this instrument.

For details on connections, refer to the “For Electone

users iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” on the website.

http://download.yamaha.com/

For information about compatible smart devices and

application tools, access the following page:

http://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/

Connection with a USB wireless LAN

adaptor (sold separately)

The USB wireless LAN adaptor lets you connect the

Electone to an iPhone/iPad wirelessly. Please make sure

to use the compatible USB wireless LAN adaptor listed in

the Compatible USB Device List downloadable from the

Yama h a web s ite :

http://download.yamaha.com/

To enable a wireless connection between the Electone and

an iPhone/iPad, follow the instructions in the “For

Electone users iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” on the

website, and also refer back to “Wireless LAN settings” in

this manual for the specific Wireless LAN settings you’ll

need to make for wireless connection.

NOTE

MIDI and [USB TO HOST] terminals are automatically disabled

when the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected.

Start wireless connection according to the instructions in

the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” on the website,

then make sure to make appropriate setups from the

following instructions: “Automatic Setup by WPS,”

“Displaying available networks in the wireless LAN and

connecting to a network,” “Manual Setup” or

“Connecting by the Ad Hoc Mode.” Refer to pages 190 –

193 in this Manual, then set up as required.

If there is no access point, follow the instructions in

“Connecting by the Ad Hoc Mode” (page 193).

Reference pages

• Wireless LAN Detailed Settings (page 194)

• Initialize the wireless LAN settings (page 196)

NOTICE

• When you use the instrument along with an application on

your iPhone/iPad, we recommend that you first set

“Airplane Mode” to “ON” then set “Wi-Fi” to “ON” on your

iPhone/iPad in order to avoid noise caused by

communication.

• Do not place your iPhone/ iPad in an unstable position.

Doing so may cause the device to fall and result in

damage.

NOTE

Before using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, be sure to read

“Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal” on

page 108 in chapter 7.

Wireless LAN settings

Connecting to an iPhone/iPad

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

190

Automatic Setup by WPS

If your access point supports WPS, you can easily connect

the instrument to access point by WPS, without making

settings, such as key input, etc.

NOTE

Check whether your access point supports WPS by referring to

the owner’s manual for the access point you are using.

1 Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor.

2 Press the [UTILITY] button, then press

the [WIRELESS LAN] button on the

display to call up the WIRELESS LAN

Page.

3 Make sure that the wireless LAN mode

is set to Infrastructure Mode.

If the wireless LAN mode is set to Ad Hoc Mode,

press the [MODE CHANGE] button in the display

to switch to the Infrastructure Mode (page 193).

4 Press the [WPS] button in the

WIRELESS LAN Page.

A message appears prompting confirmation of

operation. You can cancel the operation at this point

by pressing the [CANCEL] button.

5 Press the [OK] button to start WPS

setup, then press the WPS button on

your access point within two minutes.

The “Connected” indication appears when

connection between the instrument and the access

point is successful.

6 After successfully enabling connection

between the instrument and the access

point, connect the iPhone/iPad to the

access point by referring to the “For

Electone users iPhone/iPad Connection

Manual.”

Wireless LAN mode

“Connected” indication appears.

Connecting to an iPhone/iPad

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

191

Connections

Displaying available networks in the

wireless LAN and connecting to a

network

Select the desired Network for connection from the

Network list in the display by following the steps below.

1 Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor.

2 Press the [UTILITY] button, then press

the [WIRELESS LAN] button on the

display to call up the WIRELESS LAN

Page.

3 Make sure that the wireless LAN mode

setting is Infrastructure Mode.

When the wireless LAN mode is Ad Hoc mode,

press the [MODE CHANGE] button in the display

to switch to the Infrastructure Mode (page 193).

4 Press the [UPDATE] button in the

display to call up the network list.

For a network with a lock icon ( ), you need to

enter the proper password.

5 Select the desired network by pressing

the button shown the name of the

network in the display.

For a network without a lock icon:

Connecting starts.

For a network with a lock icon:

You need to enter the proper password, which is

identical to that in the settings on the Access Point.

For details on how to enter characters, refer to the

“Changing the Song Name” on page 114. After

entering the password, press the [OK] button in the

display to finalize the setting. This operation starts

connecting automatically.

6 After successfully enabling connection

between the instrument and the access

point, connect the iPhone/iPad to the

access point by referring to the “For

Electone users iPhone/iPad Connection

Manual.”

Wireless LAN mode

The “Connected” indication appears when the instrument

and the access point have been successfully connected.

Connecting to an iPhone/iPad

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

192

Manual Setup

If you cannot find the desired network on the display, it

may be a network that is closed or hidden. In this case,

you will need to manually input SSID, Security and

Password settings for connection.

NOTE

About the confirmation and changes in the access point

settings, refer to the manual of the access point.

1 Perform the same operation as in steps

1 – 3 in the “Displaying available

networks in the wireless LAN and

connecting to a network” instructions

on page 191.

2 Press to select [OTHER] at the bottom of

the network list.

The OTHER NETWORK display will be shown.

3 Set the SSID, Security and Password to

the same as the settings on the access

point.

Set the same contents with the setting contents by

the access point side.

SSID

Press the [SSID] button in the display to call up the

display for SSID input, then enter the SSID. For

details on how to enter the characters, refer to the

“Changing the Song Name” on page 114. Up to 32

characters (half size), alphanumeric characters,

marks can be entered. After entering the SSID, press

the [OK] button to finalize the setting.

SECURITY

Press the [SECURITY] button in the display to call

up the display for security select, then press either

the [NONE], [WPA2-PSK (AES)] or [WEP] button.

PA S S WO R D

Press the [PASSWORD] button to call up the display

for Password input, then set the password in the

same way as SSID. Press the [OK] button to finalize

the setting.

NOTE

The password cannot be set when you select [NONE] for

the security setting.

Press the [CONNECT] button to start

connection.

5 After successfully enabling connection

between the instrument and the access

point, connect the iPhone/iPad to the

access point by referring to the “For

Electone users iPhone/iPad Connection

Manual.”

The “Connected” indication appears when the instrument

and the access point have been successfully connected.

Connecting to an iPhone/iPad

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

193

Connections

Connecting by the Ad Hoc Mode

1 Set the Wireless LAN mode to “Ad Hoc

Mode.”

Refer to “Wireless LAN Mode.”

2 The settings for the instrument are

complete if you do not need to change

the SSID and so on. Connect the

iPhone/iPad to the instrument by

referring to the “For Electone users

iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.”

You can change the SSID, Security, etc. from the

DETAIL display.

Reference page

• Wireless LAN Detailed Settings (page 194)

Wireless LAN Mode

1 Perform the same operation as in steps

1 – 3 in the “Displaying available

networks in the wireless LAN and

connecting to a network” instructions

on page 191.

2 Set the Wireless LAN mode.

You can set between two modes:

INFRASTRUCTURE and AD HOC. Press the

[MODE CHANGE] button on the display to call up

a message prompting confirmation of the operation,

then press the [OK] button to execute the operation.

Connecting to an iPhone/iPad

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

194

You can set the detailed settings for each mode: INFRASTRUCTURE and AD HOC. There is no need to change or make

any settings if you’ve enabled connection between the iPhone/iPad and instrument.

Reference page

• Wireless LAN Mode (page 193)

1 Set the Wireless LAN mode, then call up the display for detailed settings by pressing the

[DETAIL] button in the WIRELESS LAN display.

Wireless LAN Detailed Settings

INFRASTRUCTURE mode AD HOC mode

DETAIL (IP ADDRESS)

DETAIL (OTHER)

DETAIL (IP ADDRESS)

DETAIL (OTHER)

DETAIL (WIRELESS)

Connecting to an iPhone/iPad

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

195

Connections

2 As necessary, set the detailed settings.

3 Save the settings.

Set the detailed settings, then press the [SAVE] button on the display. When the saving operation is completed, the

detailed settings display returns to the previous display.

Wireless LAN mode Display Item Default setting Setting/Input

INFRASTRUCTURE

mode

DETAIL

(IP ADDRESS)

display

DHCP ON Determines whether or not DHCP is

used. If your router is compatible with

DHCP, select [ON] (set DNS

automatically) here.

Select on or off by pressing [ON] or

[OFF] button on the display.

IP ADDRESS 0.0.0.0 Set the wireless LAN detailed settings.

IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway,

DNS Server1, DNS Server2 can be set

when DHCP is set to Off but cannot be

set when DHCP set to On. For details on

confirmation and changes in the setting

of the access point on the router side,

refer to the owner’s manual for the

product you are using.

For details on how to enter characters,

refer to the instructions “Changing the

Song Name” on page 114. The setting

range is 0.0.0.0 – 255.255.255.255.

SUBNET MASK 0.0.0.0

GATEWAY 0.0.0.0

DNS SERVER 1 0.0.0.0

DNS SERVER 2 0.0.0.0

AD HOC mode DETAIL

(WIRELESS)

display

SSID ap-(model name

such as “ELC-02”)-

(last 6 characters of

MAC address in

lowercase); or simply

“ap-(model name),” if

MAC address cannot

be used.

To find the specific MAC address, see

“MAC address” below.

• SSID, Security and Password can be set

in the same way as those described in

the section “Manual Setup” on

page 192. The last 6 characters of the

MAC address must be entered in

lowercase.

• Press the number button which appears

by pressing the [CHANNEL] button on

the display then, select the channel.

• DHCP and IP Address can be set in the

same way as those of

INFRASTRUCTURE mode in this table.

• The Subnet Mask value can be input in

the numerical input display, which is

called up by pressing the [SUBNET

MASK] button in the display.

CHANNEL 11

SECURITY –

PASSWORD –

DETAIL

(IP ADDRESS)

display

DHCP ON

IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.1

SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0

INFRASTRUCTURE

mode / AD HOC mode

DETAIL (OTHER)

display

HOST NAME (Model name such as

“ELC-02”)-(last 6

characters of MAC

address in

lowercase); or simply

“(model name),” if

MAC address cannot

be used.

Set the Host name. Up to 57 characters

(half size) including alphanumeric

characters, the “_” (underscore) and “-”

(hyphen) character. For details on how

to enter characters, refer to the

instructions “Changing the Song Name”

on page 114. After entering the

characters, press the [OK] button on the

display to finalize the setting.

The last 6 characters of the MAC

address must be entered in lowercase.

MAC ADDRESS – Shows the MAC address of the USB

wireless LAN adaptor. You cannot

change the MAC address here.

LAN DRIVER

VERSION

– This only displays the version of the LAN

driver; the setting cannot be made.

STATUS 00000000 Shows the error code of network

function. “00000000” means no error.

Connecting to an iPhone/iPad

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

196

“Factory Set (Initializing the Electone)” on page 23 in chapter 1 does not affect the wireless LAN settings, which can be

initialized by the following procedure. Be careful when executing initialize, since it erases all the wireless LAN settings

and replaces them with the factory defaults.

1 Press the [UTILITY] button, then press the [WIRELESS LAN] button on the display to call

up the WIR

ELESS LAN Page.

2 Initialize the wireless LAN settings.

Press the [INITIALIZE] button on the display. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation.

Press the [OK] button to execute the operation, or the [CANCEL] button to cancel.

Initialize the wireless LAN settings

Glossary of Terms

Access point A device which acts as a base station when transmitting data by wireless LAN.

Some access points are combined with modem functions.

Ad Hoc mode Communication method for performing data communication with the terminal and other devices directly

without using a relay device, such as an access point of a wireless LAN.

DHCP A standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level network configuration information can

be dynamically and automatically assigned each time the computer and the instrument connect to the

Internet.

DNS server A server that maps names to actual IP addresses of devices connected to a network.

Gateway A Gateway is a link between two computer programs or systems.

Infrastructure mode Communication method for performing data communication with each terminal via a relay device, such

as an access point of the wireless LAN.

IP address A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network that indicate the device’s

location on the network.

LAN Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that connects a group of computers at a

single location (such as an office or home) by means of a special cable.

Router A device that allows multiple devices (e.g., computers, your Yamaha instrument) to share the same

Internet connection.

Site Short for “website,” this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together. For example, the

collection of web pages whose addresses begin with “https://www.yamaha.com/en/” is referred to as the

Yamaha site.

SSID A name used to identify a particular access point, or the wireless networks set as the access point.

Subnet mask The structure for dividing a large-scale network.

Wireless LAN A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless, cable-free connection.

WPS A structure to easily make a setting of wireless LAN by pushing only the WPS buttons of an access point

and the wireless LAN device.

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

197

Appendix

Stand Assembly

CAUTION

• Be sure to install the stand with two or more people.

• Take care not to drop the Main unit or to pinch your

finger(s).

• Always place the stand on a flat, stable surface. Placing

the stand on uneven surfaces may result in it becoming

unstable or overturn, causing the Main unit to drop and

possibly resulting in injury.

• Do not use the stand for anything other than its designed

purpose. The stand is not designed to hold anything other

than the specified keyboard. Placing any object other than

the specified keyboard on the stand may result in the

object dropping or the stand overturning.

• Do not apply excessive force to the Main unit as it may

cause the stand to overturn or the Main unit to drop.

• Make sure the stand is sturdy and safe, and all screws are

tight and firm before use. If not, the stand may overturn,

the keyboard may drop, or may result in injury to the user.

Please confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are

provided.

1 Unfold the folded stand.

Unfold the stand as shown.

2 Fix the joints.

2-1 Extend the frame so that the joints are

straight.

NOTE

Once the joints reach the stoppers, the frame is at the

maximum length. Do not try to force them beyond this.

2-2 Loosen the fixation bolts and slide them

into position, then tighten the screws with

your hand.

NOTE

If the fixation bolts cannot be slid into position, make sure

that the joints are straight, as shown in the illustration of

step 2-1.

Stand

Braces

Installing the Speaker

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

198

3 Install the braces while pressing to

extend the frames by hand.

Since the screws are attached to both below and

above the frame beforehand, align them to the

positions of the frame and brace, then tighten them

from the upper side first, by hand.

The positioning screws are attached on the lower

side of the frame, and the positioning holes are at the

end of the braces.

NOTE

When removing the braces at disassembly, the screws of

the braces may hard to loosen. In this case, loosen the

screws while moving the braces lightly to the front, back,

left and right.

4 Raise the assembled stand as shown,

then confirm that all screws shown in

the illustration are tight and firm.

Assembly is completed.

Installing the Speaker

Please confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are

provided.

1 Install the fixing brackets to the

corresponding indentions on the frame.

Insert the corresponding indentions to the notches

of the fixing brackets.

Positioning hole

Screws x 4

Speakers x 2

Fixing brackets x 2

Speaker audio

cables x 2

Speaker power

cords x 2

Installing the Pedal unit

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

199

Appendix

2 Place the speaker onto the fixing

bracket, and secure it by finger-

tightening the two screws from the

bottom surface.

As shown in the illustration below, since the speaker

fixing bracket faces upward when seen from the

front, the position of the screw hole can easily be

checked.

3 Install the other speaker in the same

way.

Installation is completed.

For instructions on connecting the speaker power

cords and the speaker audio cables, refer to

“Installing and Connecting the Main Unit” on

page 201.

Installing the Pedal unit

CAUTION

• Before installing/uninstalling, turn the power of the Main

unit off.

• Take care not to drop the Pedal unit or to pinch your

finger(s).

• Do not remove the expression pedal and the 2nd

Expression Pedal once they have been installed, since

this may cause a faulty contact and result in a

malfunction.

Please confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are

provided.

1 Install the Expression Pedal.

1-1 Remove the tape from the connector in the

hole of the Pedal unit.

1-2 Remove the screw.

Be careful not to drop any screws inside the Pedal

unit during installation. Do not discard the screw;

you will need it later in step 2.

Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size

ready.

Pedal unit Cord

Expression Pedal 2nd Expression Pedal

Install the Expression Pedal

Install the 2nd Expression Pedal

Installing the Pedal unit

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

200

1-3 Hold the cable connector so that the two

lines on the connector are facing upward,

then carefully plug it into the inside

connector on the bottom of the Expression

Pedal.

1-4 Install the Expression Pedal to the

corresponding indentation on the Pedal unit

by first fitting the protrusion on the back

side and then fitting the front side as

shown.

As you fit it in position, the front side of the

Expression Pedal is slightly lifted. When installing

the Expression Pedal, be careful to avoid catching

the connector.

2 Tighten the screw.

Fix the Expression Pedal to the Pedal unit while

holding the Expression Pedal, using the screw you

removed in step 1-2.

3 As with the Expression Pedal, install the

2nd Expression Pedal, then fix it with

the screw.

4 Attach the hollow parts on the rear of

the Pedal unit to the corresponding

indentions on the frame of the stand, as

shown below.

Installation is completed.

To disassemble the unit, reverse the assembly

sequence.

NOTE

For information on installing the connecting cord, refer to

page 201.

Convenient carrying handle

You can transport the Pedal unit by holding the carrying

handle on the rear.

CAUTION

Do not hold the keys, since this may damage or result in

a malfunction.

Installing and Connecting the Main Unit

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

201

Appendix

Installing and Connecting

the Main Unit

1 Mount the Main unit.

Hold the Main unit horizontally (with two people),

and place it on the stand, aligning the rear panel

with the stoppers on the stand. Make sure that the

protrusion on the bottom of the Main unit fits inside

of the stand frames.

CAUTION

• Be careful not to drop the Main unit or to get your fingers

caught between the main unit and the stand parts.

• Do not hold the keys. Since this may damage or result in a

malfunction.

2 Connect one end of the included cord to

the [TO MAIN] jack on the rear of Pedal

unit and the other to the [TO PEDAL]

jack on the rear of Main unit.

3 Connect one end of the included

speaker audio cable to the INPUT2 jack

on the rear of speakers and the other to

the OUTPUT jack on the rear of Main

unit.

4 Connect the included speaker power

cord to the AC IN jack on the rear of the

speaker.

Post-assembly checklist

Once you’ve assembled the stand, check the following

points:

• Are there any parts left over?

If so, read the assembly instructions again and correct

any mistakes you might have made.

• Is the Electone clear of doors and other movable

fixtures?

If not, move the Electone to an appropriate location.

• Does the Electone make a rattling noise when

you play it or move it?

If so, take the Main unit off of the stand and properly

tighten all screws.

Also, if the Main unit makes a creaking noise or seems

unsteady when you play it, refer carefully to the assembly

instructions and diagrams and retighten all screws.

Rear of the speaker

Installing the Music Rest

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

202

Installing the Music Rest

Please confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are

provided.

1 Attach the two music rest brackets to

the rear panel of the Main unit.

Use the inside slots (as shown).

2 Attach the Music rest to the brackets.

Using the Bench (if included)

CAUTION

• Be careful not to get your finger(s) caught while

assembling.

• Always place the chair on a flat, stable surface. Placing

the chair on uneven surfaces may result in it becoming

unstable or overturn, and possibly resulting in injury.

• Keep special watch over any small children, since the

bench is not stable compared to benches of four legs.

1 Place the bench on the floor with the

seating surface face down.

Untie the securing band on the legs, and put the

ends into the pockets on both sides.

2 Pull up the leg slowly.

Music rest brackets x 2 Music rest

Securing

band

Using the Bench (if included)

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

203

Appendix

3 Open the legs, then secure one side to

the hooks (as shown), making sure they

are locked in.

4 Turn over the bench as shown in the

illustration.

The lock is at the rear side of the bench.

To keep the stand from teetering, adjust the two

oblong shaped caps (on the side of the lock lever),

rotating them as necessary.

NOTE

When rotating the caps, pull them outward slightly (about

10 mm) for ease in rotating. After making adjustments,

push them back inside.

5 To fold back, put the bench on the floor

with the seating surface face down.

6 Press the lock lever downward, then

press the leg not having the lock, then

release the hooks while closing the

legs.

7 Reverse the sequence of steps 1 – 2 to

fold back the bench.

Hooks

Lock

lever

Caps

Lock lever

Troubleshooting

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

204

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

GENERAL OPERATION

A click or pop is heard when the power is

turned on or off.

Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. This is normal.

The sound is not heard for about 10 seconds

after turning the power on.

This is normal; the Electone takes a while to start up.

A cracking noise is sometimes heard. Noise may be produced when either an electrical appliance is turned on or an

electric power tool (such as drill) is used in the proximity of the Electone. If this

occurs, plug the Electone into an electrical outlet located as far as possible from the

device that seems to be the source of the problem.

Interference from radio, TV, or other sources

occurs.

This is caused by the proximity of a high-power broadcasting station, an amateur

ham radio setup or a mobile phone.

The sound of the Electone causes

surrounding objects to resonate.

Because the Electone is capable of producing powerful bass sounds, resonance

may be caused in surrounding objects, such as cabinets or glass windows. To avoid

this, relocate the objects or lower the Electone’s volume.

In the LCD display, there are some black

points (unlit) or white points (always lit).

Unfortunately, this is a common characteristic of TFT-LCDs.

Some buttons on the panel do not respond. The UPPER/LOWER ORGAN FLUTES and LEAD VOICE 2 buttons are invalid on the

Electone.

Some of the LEDs in the DISPLAY SELECT

section do not light.

The LEDs of on/off buttons (UPPER/LOWER ORGAN FLUTES, VOICE EDIT, RHYTHM

PROGRAM, and ROTARY SP SPEED) are lit when those functions are turned on. The

LEDs of other function’s buttons momentarily light when the functions are selected.

The sound is too small even when the

volume is set to its maximum.

• The Master Volume may be set around the minimum position. Turn it clockwise.

• The Expression Pedal may not be pressed down. Press it down with your toe.

• The POWER switch of the speaker may have been turned off. Turn it on.

• The POWER switch of the speaker may have been set to OFF. Switch it to ON.

The Electone panel does not function

normally or the content of the memorized

data has changed.

This happens very rarely. Occasionally, power surges and spikes due to electrical

storms or other reasons may cause the Electone to malfunction and/or alter the

contents of memorized data. If this happens, perform the Factory Set operation to

reset the Electone (page 23).

VOICES/RHYTHMS

The pitch may sound excessively high on

the Pedalboard and low in the higher

registers of the Lower and Upper keyboards.

This may occur when you compare the Electone’s sounds with that of a piano.

Because of the difference of the harmonics structure, the tuning system of the

Electone is different from the piano in the higher and lower ranges.

Some of the Voices may contain cracking

and/or noisy sounds.

You may find these mainly in the wind instrument Voices. These are purposely added

effects to the Voices to reproduce the characteristics of the wind instruments such as

the pipe vibrations, breath noises and squeaks.

When too many keys are pressed, not all of

the notes sound.

Total polyphonic capacity (notes sounding for both Upper and Lower Keyboards) is

14 notes. When you turn the Pedal Polyphonic mode to on, the total is 14 for all

keyboards, Upper, Lower and Pedalboard.

When sustain length is set to HOLD,

previously played notes are cut off.

Since the HOLD setting causes notes to keep sounding, the cumulative notes

(elements) may go over the maximum elements that the Electone can sound.

When this occurs, previously played notes are cut off.

Only one sound is heard when two notes of

the Lead or Pedal Voices are simultaneously

played.

For practical performance reasons, the Electone has been designed so that only one

note of the Lead or Pedal Voices can be played at a time. If you want, the Pedal

Voice can be set to polyphonic mode (page 42).

Troubleshooting

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

205

Appendix

The Pedal Voices do not sound, even though

the volume is properly set.

• The Single Finger or Fingered Chord mode of Auto Bass Chord is on. Turn off the

mode in the display (page 64).

• [TO LOWER ] button in the Pedal Voice section is turned on. Turn the function off

(page 27).

When selecting a User button Voice or

rhythm, the Voice or rhythm title at the top of

the LCD does not match the selected Voice

or rhythm.

The currently assigned Voice or rhythm is displayed at the top of the LCD, and

remains until another Voice or rhythm has been selected.

When keys are pressed, the sounds of

percussion instruments are also heard.

The Keyboard Percussion function has been turned on. When not using the function,

be sure to turn it off (page 66).

Even though a User button’s rhythm has

been selected and started, the pattern does

not sound.

Since the User buttons contain User rhythms, no rhythm will sound if a pattern has

not been saved to the selected User button.

EFFECTS

The Touch Tone function does not operate. Adjust the Touch Tone settings in the Voice Condition display (page 41).

The Reverb effect is not applied to the

desired Voice sections, even when the

REVERB button setting on the panel is

increased.

Increase the Reverb depth for the desired Voice sections in Reverb display Pages 2

– 4.

The Rotary Speaker effect cannot be heard,

even when the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button

in the DISPLAY SELECT section is on.

Rotary Speaker must be selected first in Voice Condition display Pages 3 and/or 4

(for panel Voices), or in the Organ Flute Voices ATTACK/VOLUME Page (for Organ

Flute Voices).

ACCOMPANIMENT

The pitch in the Single Finger mode does not

change, even when pressing different keys

of the keyboard.

Single Finger mode will only produce notes when played within a fixed octave

interval on the Lower keyboard. If notes with the same letter name are pressed

outside of that range, the chords that are sounded will share the same pitch.

While an Intro/Ending pattern is

automatically playing, the Lower keyboard

does not produce any sound, even when the

keys are played.

Since the Accompaniment chords play automatically one after another, the Lower

keyboard is designed not to produce any sound during the playback of an Intro/

Ending pattern.

The Accompaniment cannot be heard even

when an appropriate Accompaniment type is

selected and the rhythm has been started.

• The Accompaniment volume may have been set to 0. Be sure to raise the

Accompaniment volume in the Rhythm Condition display (page 63).

• All Accompaniment parts may be set to off (mute). Set the desired part on

(page 63).

The harmony notes of the Melody On Chord

function cannot be heard.

The Upper keyboard has been set to sound only Lead Voices. Increase the volume

of the Upper Keyboard Voices.

The bass phrase of the Auto Bass Chord

cannot be heard.

The pedal polyphonic mode may be set to on. Turn it off in the Voice Condition

display (page 42).

REGISTRATION MEMORY

Certain functions have not been memorized

to Registration Memory.

Some functions cannot be memorized. Refer to page 93.

VOICE EDITING

The Voice Edit display cannot be called up

even when the [VOICE EDIT] button is

pressed.

The Voice Edit display cannot called up by pressing only the [VOICE EDIT] button.

While holding down the [VOICE EDIT] button, press the desired Voice button.

During Voice editing, the specified Voice

isn’t heard, even when the keyboard is

played.

• The Element is turned to mute or its level is set to minimum. Turn it to on or

increase the volume.

• You may have played keys outside the range of Note Limit. Play only keys within

the Note Limit range.

An error message appears while the Voice

name is entered.

Voice name capacity is 16 characters. Delete the unnecessary letters or spaces.

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

Troubleshooting

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

206

RHYTHM PROGRAM

During use of the Rhythm Pattern Program,

no sound is produced even when you play a

certain percussion sound.

If percussion sounds have been recorded while memory is full, no subsequently

selected instruments can be heard or recorded. If necessary, erase some of the less

necessary percussion sounds and play again.

MUSIC DATA RECORDER

The USB flash drive is not recognized. Check whether the connected USB flash drive is supported or not from the website

below:

http://download.yamaha.com/

Recording or playback cannot be

performed.

• The part buttons in the Rec Standby display or Playing display may have been

turned off. Turn the desired part to REC or PLAY.

• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording performance

data is 1 MB.

Recording is stopped before the

performance is finished.

• The amount of recorded data on the USB flash drive is close to the maximum limit.

Either use another USB flash drive or delete the data of unnecessary Songs.

• When you overwrite the Song, the length of a subsequently recorded part cannot

exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. Delete the previously recorded

Song, then record again (page 126)

• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording performance

data is 1 MB.

An error message appears while entering a

folder name or Song name.

• The folder/Song name is too long. The capacity is 50 letters.

• The folder/Song name may be an invalid name. Refer to page 115.

• The path name is too long. The capacity of the path name is 234 letters. Reduce

the layer or shorten the folder/Song name to shorten the path.

The rhythm does not start at the beginning of

a recording, or stops in the middle of the

performance.

The MDR is designed so that the rhythm cannot be started at the very beginning of a

recording. If you wish to use the rhythm, start it after the time indicator appears in the

display.

The notes of the recording are “stuck” and

sound continuously.

During playback, you may have removed the USB flash drive. Whenever you wish to

stop playback, always press the [ ] (Stop) button before removing the USB flash

drive.

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

Specifications

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

207

Appendix

Specifications

PRODUCT NAME

DIGITAL ORGAN

TONE GENERATION

AWM

KEYBOARD

Upper: 49 keys (C – C), Lower: 49 keys (C – C), Pedal: 20 keys (C – G)

Keyboard Type

Standard (FS)

Initial Touch

Upper, Lower, Pedal

After Touch

Upper, Lower

REGISTRATIONS Registration Menu

506

Registration Memory

1 Unit 16 x 5

M. (Memory), 1 – 16, D. (Disable)

Registration Shift

Shift, Jump, User (1 Unit: 400 steps), Next Unit

VOICE Voice Sections

Upper 1, Upper 2, Lead 1, Lead 2, Lower 1, Lower 2, Pedal 1, Pedal 2

Voice Buttons Upper/

Lower

STRINGS, BRASS, WOODWIND, TUTTI, PAD, SYNTH, PIANO, ORGAN,

PERCUSSION, GUITAR, CHOIR, WORLD, USER 1, USER 2

Lead

VIOLIN, SYNTH, FLUTE, TRUMPET, USER 1, TO LOWER (Lead 1), SOLO (Lead 2)

Pedal

CONTRABASS, ELEC. BASS, TIMPANI, SYNTH BASS, USER 1, TO LOWER

Preset Voices

AWM: 986

User Voices

AWM: 80 (each Unit)

Voice Link

Yes

Organ Flute Voices

Types: Sine, Vintage, Euro

Footage: 16', 5 1/3', 8', 4', 2 2/3', 2', 1 3/5', 1 1/3', 1'

Attack: 4', 2 2/3', 2', Length, Response

Mode: First, Each

Vibrato: Depth, Speed

Effects: XG Rotary Sp, Rotary Sp 1 – 5, 2Way Rot Sp, Dual Rotsp 1 – 2, Dual Rot Brt,

Dual Rot Wrm, Dist+Rot Sp, Odrv+Rot Sp, Amp+Rot Sp, Dist+2Rot Sp,

Odrv+2Rop Sp, Amp+2Rot Sp, OFF

Rotary Speaker Control

2.69 – 39.7 Hz, Slow, Stop

EFFECT/

CONDITION

Sustain

Upper1, 2 (Foot pedal), Lower1, 2 (Foot pedal), Pedal1, 2

Reverb

(Voice Sections/

Rhythm)

Types

Hall 1 – 3, M, L, XG Hall 1 – 2, Room 1 – 4 , S, M, L, XG Room 1 – 3, Stage 1 – 2,

XG Stage 1 – 2, Plate 1 – 2, XG Plate, GM Plate, White Room, Atmo Hall,

Acostic Room, Drums Room, Perc Room, Tunnel, Canyon, Basement

Depth

Upper 1 – 2, Lower 1 – 2, Lead 1 – 2, Pedal 1 – 2, Percussion, Accompaniment,

Keyboard Percussion, Upper Organ Flutes, Lower Organ Flutes

Voice Section Effects

Reverb, Delay, ER/Karaoke, Chorus, Flanger, Phaser, Tremolo/Auto Pan,

Rotary Speaker, Distortion, Distortion+, Amp Simulator, Wah, Dynamic, EQ/Enhancer,

Pitch Change, Miscellaneous, Thru

RHYTHMS Rhythm Buttons

MARCH, WALTZ, SWING&JAZZ, POPS, R&B, LATIN, WORLD MUSIC, BALLAD,

ROCK, DANCE, USER 1, USER 2

Preset Rhythm Patterns

634 (including the metronome)

Parts

Main Drum, Add Drum

Sections

Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3, Main/Fill In A – D, Break, Auto Fill

ACCOMPANI-

MENT

Accompaniment Parts

Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase1, Phrase 2

Auto Bass Chord

OFF, Single Finger, Fingered Chord, Custom A.B.C.

Memory: Lower, Pedal

Melody On Chord

OFF, 1, 2, 3, Foot pedal

PROGRAMS Voice Edit

Yes

Rhythm Pattern Program

Yes

Rhythm Sequence Program

1 Unit SEQ. 1 – 4 (Rhythm and Registration program)

Keyboard Percussion

1 Unit

Preset 1 – 2, User 1 – 40

(Pan, Pitch coarse, Pitch fine, Reverb, Volume)

CONTROLS Footswitch Left

Rhythm: Stop, Break, Main A – D, Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3

Glide: Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead 1, 2, Glide Time

Rotary Speaker

Right

Registration Shift

Expression Pedal

Yes

2nd Expression Pedal

Pitch Bend, Tempo

Foot Pedal

Sustain (Upper/Lower), M.O.C., Lead Slide, Solo (Lead 2)

Specifications

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

208

*The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then

download the manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same in every locale, please check with your

Yamaha dealer.

CONTROLS

Transpose

-6 – +6

Pitch

A = 427.2 – 452.6 Hz, Default value: A = 440.0 Hz

MIDI Control

Yes

Main Controls Main unit

POWER on/off, MASTER VOLUME

Speaker

POWER on/off, VOLUME, SOUND TYPE1/2

MDR

Search,

Song Select: Stop, Play, Pause, Rewind, Fast Forward, Record, Custom Play, Score,

Setting (Tempo/Part), Unit Edit

Tools: Create Folder, Change Song Name, Copy, Delete,

Conversion (XG/TO EL/FROM EL), Format, Information

Audio Recording/Playback

Play: Stop, Play, Pause, Rewind, Fast Forward, Volume, Tempo, Pitch

Record: Stop, Record

Tools: Create Folder, Change Name, Copy, Delete, Format, Information

File Format: .wav (44.1kHz,16bit, stereo)

Utility

Language (English/Japanese), Touch Panel Sound, LCD Brightness,

Mic. (Reverb/Volume), Disable Mode (Normal/Tempo), Initialize

Display Select

VOICE DISPLAY, A.B.C./M.O.C., MDR, FOOTSWITCH, UTILITY, AUDIO, VOICE EDIT,

RHYTHM PATTERN PROGRAM, RHYTHM SEQUENCE PROGRAM,

U. ORGAN FLUTES, L. ORGAN FLUTES, ROTARY SP SPEED

OTHERS Display Type

TFT Color Wide VGA LCD

Size

800 × 480 dots

7 inch

Sound System Power

Amplifiers

(20W + 15W) × 2

Speakers

(Cone: 96 mm, Dome: 19 mm) × 2

Storage

USB flash drive

Connectors Main unit

PHONES (PHONE), MIC (PHONE), MIC VOLUME, OUTPUT L/L+R, R (PHONE),

AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) MAIN L/L+R, R, SUB 1, 2 (PHONE),

AUX IN L/L+R, R (PHONE), TO PEDAL, USB TO DEVICE×3, USB TO HOST,

MIDI IN/OUT, FOOT PEDAL (SUSTAIN)

Speaker

INPUT1 (RCA), INPUT2 (PHONE)

Power

Supply

Adaptor Main unit

PA-300C

Power

Consumption

Main unit

28W (When using PA-300C AC adaptor)

Dimensions (W x D x H) ELC-02

1185 mm × 652 mm × 938 mm

1185 mm × 652 mm × 1091 mm (with Music rest)

Weight

45.8 kg

46.8 kg (with Music rest)

Dimensions (W x D x H) ELCU-M02

(Main unit)

1149 mm × 425 mm × 209 mm

1149 mm × 519 mm × 362 mm (with Music rest)

Weight

17.0 kg

18.0 kg (with Music rest)

Dimensions (W x D x H) Pedal unit

873 mm × 539 mm × 310 mm

Weight

13.0 kg

Dimensions (W x D x H) Speaker

144 mm × 191 mm × 242 mm

167 mm × 243 mm × 390 mm (with the fixing bracket for the speaker installed)

Weight

3.3 kg × 2

4.9 kg × 2 (with the fixing bracket for the speaker installed)

Dimensions (W x D x H) Stand

1185 mm × 652 mm × 750 mm

Weight

6.0 kg

Dimensions (W x D x H) Bench

637 mm × 324 mm × 580 mm

Weight

5.4 kg

Supplied Accessories

• Owner’s Manual (this book)

• Owner’s Manual (for the Speaker)

•Music rest

• Music rest brackets (× 2)

• AC adaptor: PA-300C

• Power cord (for the Electone)

• Bench

Index

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

209

Appendix

Index

Numerics

2nd Expression Pedal .........................178

A.B.C./M.O.C. .................................64, 65

ACCENT ..............................................148

Accompaniment ....................................63

Ad Hoc Mode ......................................193

Add Drum .............................................63

AEM ........................................................7

AFTER touch (Pitch) ..............................41

AFTER touch (Touch Tone) ...................41

AMP SIMULATOR .................................53

ARTICULATION ....................................43

ASSEMBLE .........................................145

ATTACK (Organ Flutes) ........................38

ATTACK RATE (Voice Edit) .................139

Audio ...................................................130

Audio Recording .................................130

Auto Bass Chord ...................................64

Auto Fill .................................................56

AUX IN ................................................182

AWM (Voice Edit) ................................137

AWM Voice ...........................................37

Bank ......................................................96

BAR/BEAT .............................................57

BREAK ..................................................55

BRILLIANCE .........................................42

CHANGE NAME (Song) ......................114

CHORD 1 ..............................................63

CHORD 2 ..............................................63

CHORUS (Effect) ..................................52

CHORUS (Rhythm Pattern Program) ..155

Computer ............................................187

CONVERT FROM EL ...........................129

CONVERT TO EL ................................128

CONVERT TO XG ...............................127

CUSTOM A.B.C. ...................................65

CUTOFF FREQ. ...................................139

[D.] (Disable) ........................................94

DATA CONTROL dial ............................12

DELAY (Effect) ......................................52

DELAY (Vibrato) ....................................42

DEPTH (Reverb) ...................................44

DEPTH (Vibrato) ....................................42

Display Select .......................................12

DISTORTION .........................................52

DYNAMIC ..............................................53

EACH (Organ Flutes) ............................ 38

EFFECT ................................................. 43

Effect category (Voice) ......................... 43

Effect Parameters ................................. 43

EFFECT TYPE (Organ Flutes) ............... 39

Effect type (Voice) ................................ 43

Element ............................................... 136

ENDING .......................................... 55, 56

EQ (Equalizer) .................................... 138

EQ/ENHANCER (Effect) ....................... 53

ER/KARAOKE ....................................... 52

Expression pedal .................................. 13

EXTERNAL .......................................... 188

Factory Set ........................................... 23

Fast forward ........................................ 120

FEET ..................................................... 42

File ...................................................... 107

FILL IN .................................................. 55

Filter .................................................... 139

FINGERED CHORD .............................. 64

FIRST (Organ Flutes) ............................ 38

FLANGER ............................................. 52

Folder ................................................. 107

Foot Pedal .......................................... 176

FOOT SWITCH ............................. 97, 174

FOOTAGE ............................................. 38

Footswitch .......................................... 174

FORMAT (MDR) .................................. 109

Gate Time ........................................... 153

Glide ................................................... 175

Headphones ....................................... 183

Infrastructure Mode ............................ 190

INITIAL touch ........................................ 41

Initialize (Factory Set) ........................... 23

Initialize (Registration Memory) ............ 96

Initialize (Wireless LAN settings) ........ 196

INTERNAL .......................................... 188

INTRO ................................................... 55

Jacks and Controls ............................. 181

JUMP .................................................... 97

Keyboard Percussion ........................... 66

L. ORGAN FLUTE ................................ 38

LANGUAGE ......................................... 16

LAST (Lead Voice) ............................... 42

LAYER (Voice Edit) ............................ 138

LCD BRIGHTNESS ............................... 16

LCD Display ......................................... 12

Lead Slide ............................................ 43

Lead Voice ........................................... 24

LEAD VOICE (Panel) ............................ 10

LEVEL (Voice Edit) ............................. 138

LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) ........ 140

Lower Keyboard Voice ......................... 25

LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE (Panel) .... 10

[M.] (Memory) ...................................... 93

M.O.C. .................................................. 65

MAIN .................................................... 55

Main Drum ............................................ 63

MASTER VOLUME ............................... 13

MDR ................................................... 104

Melody On Chord ................................. 65

MEMORY (A.B.C.) ................................ 65

METRONOME .................................... 145

MIDI Control ....................................... 188

MIDI IN/OUT ....................................... 182

MIDI OUT FILTER ............................... 188

MISCELLANEOUS ............................... 53

MODE (Organ Flutes) .......................... 38

MODE (Rotary Speaker) ...................... 47

Music Data Recorder ......................... 104

Next Page .......................................... 123

Next Unit ............................................ 117

NEXT UNIT (Shift End) ......................... 98

NOTE LIMIT ........................................ 138

NOTE SHIFT ....................................... 138

Organ Flutes ........................................ 38

OUTPUT (MIDI) .................................. 188

PAD ...................................................... 63

PAN (Voice Edit) ................................ 138

PAN (Voice) .......................................... 41

Part (Rhythm) ....................................... 63

PATTERN ........................................... 142

Pause ................................................. 120

Pedal polyphonic mode ....................... 42

Pedal unit ........................................... 199

Pedal Voice .......................................... 25

PEDAL VOICE (Panel) .......................... 10

Index

ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual

210

PHASER ................................................52

PHONES .............................................181

PHRASE 1 .............................................63

PHRASE 2 .............................................63

Pitch ....................................................180

PITCH (Voice section) ...........................41

Pitch Bend ..........................................178

PITCH CHANGE ...................................53

Playback .............................................119

POLY .....................................................42

Power switch .........................................13

PRESET (Vibrato) ..................................42

Preset Keyboard Percussion ................66

PRESET TEMPO ....................................58

PRIORITY ..............................................42

Protected Song ...................................119

Punch-in Recording ............................114

Quantize ..............................................151

Real Time Write ...........................146, 151

Recording (Audio) ..............................130

Recording (Lead Voice 1 Voice only) .113

Recording (MDR) ................................112

Recording (Part) .................................113

Registration Memory .............................93

REGISTRATION MENU .........................19

Registration Sequence .......................170

Registration Shift ...................................97

RELEASE RATE (Voice Edit) ...............139

Remaining Memory Capacity .............158

Repeat ................................................121

Re-recording (Retry) ...........................112

RESONANCE ......................................139

RESP. (Response) ................................38

Reverb ..................................................44

REVERB (MIC.) ...................................185

REVERB (Panel) ....................................44

REVERB (Rhythm Pattern Program) ...155

Rewind ................................................120

Rhythm ..................................................54

Rhythm button .......................................54

Rhythm Clock ......................................148

Rhythm Condition .................................56

Rhythm Menu ........................................54

Rhythm Pattern Program .....................142

Rhythm Program .................................142

Rhythm Sequence Program ................168

Rhythmic Chord ..................................152

ROTARY SP SPEED ..............................47

Rotary Speaker .....................................47

SCORE ................................................122

Section ..................................................55

SEQUENCE .........................................168

SETTINGS (MDR) ................................110

SHIFT (Registration Shift) ......................97

SHIFT END ............................................98

SINGLE FINGER ................................... 64

SLIDE .................................................... 43

SLOW (Rotary Speaker) ....................... 47

SOLO .................................................... 27

Song ........................................... 107, 110

Song Copy .......................................... 124

Song Delete ........................................ 126

Speaker ........................................ 13, 198

Specifications ..................................... 207

SPEED (Rotary Speaker) ...................... 47

SPEED (Vibrato) ................................... 43

Stand .................................................. 197

START ................................................... 55

Step Write ........................................... 146

STOP (Rotary Speaker) ........................ 47

STOP (Shift End) ................................... 98

Style File Format ................................. 159

Super Articulation Voice ....................... 37

Sustain .................................................. 46

SUSTAIN (Panel) .................................. 46

SYNCHRO START ................................ 55

Tempo (MDR) ..................................... 121

TEMPO (Rhythm) .................................. 57

THRU (Effect) ....................................... 53

TIME (Slide) .......................................... 43

TO LOWER ........................................... 27

TOP ....................................................... 42

TOP (Lead Voice) ................................. 42

TOP (Shift End) ..................................... 98

TOUCH PANEL SOUND ....................... 16

TOUCH TONE ...................................... 41

TOUCH VIBRATO ................................. 43

Transpose ........................................... 180

TRANSPOSE (Voice section) ................ 44

TREMOLO/AUTO PAN .........................52

TUNE (Voice section) ........................... 44

TUNE FINE (Voice Edit) ...................... 138

U. ORGAN FLUTES .............................. 38

Unit ....................................................... 96

UNIT EDIT (MDR) ............................... 116

Upper Keyboard Voice ......................... 24

UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE (Panel) ..... 10

USB flash drive ................................... 108

USB TO DEVICE ......................... 108, 182

USB TO HOST .................................... 182

USER (Registration Shift) ...................... 97

USER (Vibrato) ..................................... 42

User button (Rhythm) ........................... 58

User button (Voice) .............................. 28

User Keyboard Percussion .................. 79

User Rhythm ....................................... 157

User Voice .......................................... 140

UTILITY ................................................. 16

VARIATION (Rhythm Pattern Program)

............................................................. 156

Version ................................................. 23

VIBRATO .............................................. 42

VIBRATO (Organ Flutes) ...................... 39

Voice .................................................... 24

Voice button ......................................... 25

Voice Condition .............................. 26, 41

VOICE DISPLAY ................................... 17

Voice Edit ........................................... 136

VOICE EDIT (Panel) ........................... 136

Voice Guide ......................................... 17

Voice Link ....................................... 41, 48

Voice Menu .......................................... 25

Voice section ........................................ 24

Volume (Accompaniment) ................... 63

Volume (Keyboard Percussion) ........... 67

VOLUME (MIC.) ................................. 185

VOLUME (Organ Flutes) ...................... 39

VOLUME (Rhythm Pattern Program) .. 155

VOLUME (Rhythm) ............................... 57

VOLUME (Voice) .................................. 26

WAH ..................................................... 53

Wireless LAN settings ........................ 189

WPS .................................................... 190

XG .......................................................... 7

About Using BSD-Licensed Software

The software used by this product includes components

that comply with the BSD license.

The restrictions placed on users of software released

under a typical BSD license are that if they redistribute

such software in any form, with or without modification,

they must include in the redistribution (1) a disclaimer of

liability, (2) the original copyright notice and (3) a list of

licensing provisions.

The following contents are displayed based on the

licensing conditions described above, and do not govern

your use of the product.

WPA Supplicant

contributors

This program is dual-licensed under both the GPL version

2 and BSD license. Either license may be used at your

option.

License

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or

without modification, are permitted provided that the

following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above

disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the

above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the

following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other

materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name(s) of the above-listed copyright

holder(s) nor the names of its contributors may be used

to endorse or promote products derived from this

software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT

HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR

CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE

GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR

PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR

TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY

OF SUCH DAMAGE.

XySSL

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or

without modification, are permitted provided that the

following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above

disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the

above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the

following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other

materials provided with the distribution.

* Neither the name of XySSL nor the names of its

contributors may be used to endorse or promote

products derived from this software without specific

prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT

HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR

CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE

GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR

PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR

TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY

OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Manual Development Group

Published 05/2017 MWTO-C0

Printed in Japan

ZY80650

Yamaha Downloads

http://download.yamaha.com/

ZY80650

Yamaha ELC-02 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: ELC-02

Categorie: Synthesizer

Type: de handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

ELCU-M02

Download PDF

rapport

in andere talen

English: Yamaha ELC-02 Owner's manual
italiano: Yamaha ELC-02 Manuale del proprietario
русский: Yamaha ELC-02 Инструкция по применению
français: Yamaha ELC-02 Le manuel du propriétaire
español: Yamaha ELC-02 El manual del propietario
Deutsch: Yamaha ELC-02 Bedienungsanleitung
português: Yamaha ELC-02 Manual do proprietário
dansk: Yamaha ELC-02 Brugervejledning
čeština: Yamaha ELC-02 Návod k obsluze
svenska: Yamaha ELC-02 Bruksanvisning
Türkçe: Yamaha ELC-02 El kitabı
polski: Yamaha ELC-02 Instrukcja obsługi
română: Yamaha ELC-02 Manualul proprietarului

Yamaha ELC-02 de handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

Yamaha ELC-02 de handleiding

in andere talen

Gerelateerde artikelen

Andere documenten